MTG Economics Eng

pi basic education WE ———* é c Department: © Basic Education LS REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA

© Department of Basic Education 2014 This content may not be sold or used for commercial purposes. Curriculum and Assessment Policy Statement (CAPS) Mind the Gap Grade 12 Study Guide Economics ISBN 978-1-4315-1949-1 This publication has a Creative Commons Attribution NonCommercial Sharealike license. You can use, modify, upload, download, and share content, but you must acknowledge the Department of Basic Education, the authors and contributors. If you make any changes to the content you must send the changes to the Department of Basic Education. This content may not be sold or used for commercial purposes. For more information about the terms of the license please see: http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/3.0/. Copyright © Department of Basic Education 2014 222 Struben Street, Pretoria, South Africa Contact person: Dr Patricia Watson Email: watson.p@dbe.gov.za Tel: (012) 357 4502 http://www.education.gov.za Call Centre: 0800202933 The first edition published in 2012 Revised National Curriculum Statement (RNCS) Mind the Gap Grade 12 Study Guide Economics ISBN 978-0-621-40910-9 Second edition published in 2014 Curriculum and Assessment Policy Statement (CAPS) Mind the Gap Grade 12 Study Guide Economics : ISBN 978-1-4315-1949-1 Mind the Gap team Series managing editor: Dr Patricia Watson Production co-ordinators for CAPS edition: Lisa Treffry-Goatley and Radha Pillay Authors: Richard Gouws, Janice Hardine, Andre Olivier, Nithiananthan Pillay, Irmela Roodt Expert readers: Eugenia Maila, Maureen Mashinini, Neo Mejoane, Mogale Philemon Mochaki, Tammy Pike, Edwin Pretorius, Natalie Winter Editors: Julia Grey, Herbert Opland Proofreader: Jenny de Wet Designers: Alicia Arntzen, Philisiwe Nkosi, Michele Dean, Nomalizo Ngwenya Study skills: Margarita Karnasopoulos Illustrators: Michele Dean, Kenneth Kunene, Vusi Malindi, Bié Venter Cover illustration: Alastair Findlay Onsite writers’workshop support: Wayne Cussons

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Ministerial foreword The Department of Basic Education has pleasure in releasing the second edition of Mind the Gap study guides for Grade 12 learners. These study guides continue the innovative and committed attempt by the Department of Basic Education to improve the academic performance of Grade 12 candidates in the National Senior Certificate (NSC) examination. The study guides have been written by subject expert teams comprised of teachers, examiners, moderators, subject advisors and subject co- ordinators. Research started in 2012 shows that the Mind the Gap series has, without doubt, had a positive impact in improving grades. It is my fervent wish that the Mind the Gap study guides take us all closer towards ensuring that no learner is left behind, especially as we move forward in our celebration of 20 years of democracy. Matsie Angelina Motshekga, MP The second edition of Mind the Gap is aligned to the 2014 Curriculum and Minister of Basic Education Assessment Policy Statement (CAPS). This means that the writers have considered the National Policy pertaining to the programme, promotion requirements and protocol for assessment of the National Curriculum Statement for Grade 12 in 2014. The Mind the Gap CAPS study guides take their brief in part from the 2013 National Diagnostic report on learner performance and draws on the 2014 Grade 12 Examination Guidelines. Each of the Mind the Gap study guides provides explanations of key terminology, simple explanations and examples of the types of questions that learners can expect to be asked in an exam. Marking memoranda are included to assist learners in building their understanding. Learners are also referred to specific questions in past national exam papers and examination memos that are available on the Department’s website – www.education.gov.za. The CAPS edition include Accounting, Economics, Geography, Life Sciences, Mathematics, Mathematical Literacy and Physical Sciences. The series is produced in both English and Afrikaans. There are also nine English First Additional Language study guides. They include EFAL Paper 1 (Language); EFAL Paper 3 (Writing); and a study guide for each of the Grade 12 prescribed literature set works. The study guides have been designed to assist those learners who have been underperforming due to a lack of exposure to the content requirements of the curriculum and aims to mind-the-gap between failing and passing, by bridging the gap in learners’ understanding of commonly tested concepts so candidates can pass. All that is now required is for our Grade 12 learners to put in the hours preparing for the examinations. Learners make us proud – study hard. We wish each and every one of you good luck for your Grade 12 examinations. _________________________________ Matsie Angelina Motshekga, MP Minister of Basic Education May 2014

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Table of Contents Dear Grade 12 learner. .......................................................................................................vii How to use this study guide.................................................................................................xi Top 10 study tips..................................................................................................................xii Question words to help you answer questions. ..............................................................xiii Study skills to boost your learning. ..................................................................................xiii On the day of the exam … .................................................................................................xvi Learner’s checklist............................................................................................................xviii Chapter 1: The circular flow model, national account aggregates and the multiplier . ............................................................................................. 1 1.1 Key concepts ..........................................................................................................4 1.2 The open economy circular flow model.................................................................6 1.3 National account aggregates ............................................................................. 12 1.4 The multiplier . ..................................................................................................... 19 Chapter 2: Business cycles and forecasting ................................................ 23 2.1 Key concepts ....................................................................................................... 25 2.2 The composition and features of business cycles ............................................ 25 2.3 Explanations ........................................................................................................ 27 2.4 Government policy . ............................................................................................. 29 2.5 The new economic paradigm.............................................................................. 32 2.6 Features underpinning forecasting with regard to business cycles. ................ 32 Chapter 3: The role of the public sector . ...................................................... 37 3.1 Key concepts ....................................................................................................... 40 3.2 Composition and necessity. ................................................................................ 41 3.3 Problems of public sector provisioning .............................................................. 42 3.4 Objectives of the public sector and its budgets................................................. 43 3.5 Fiscal policy ......................................................................................................... 46 3.6 Public sector failure ............................................................................................ 48 Chapter 4: The foreign exchange market and the balance of payments accounts . ....................................................................................... 51 4.1 Key concepts ....................................................................................................... 54 4.2 The reasons for international trade ................................................................... 55 4.3 The balance of payments accounts ................................................................... 56 4.4 Foreign exchange markets . ................................................................................ 59 4.5 Establishment of foreign exchange rates........................................................... 61 4.6 Corrections of the balance of payments. ........................................................... 63 Chapter 5: Protectionism and free trade . ..................................................... 67 5.1 Key concepts ....................................................................................................... 70 5.2 Export promotion . ............................................................................................... 71 5.3 Import substitution. ............................................................................................. 72 5.4 Protection . ........................................................................................................... 73 5.5 Free trade..............................................................................................................74 5.6 A desirable mix of protection and free trade...................................................... 75 5.7 Evaluation of South Africa’s trade policies. ....................................................... 76 Chapter 6: The dynamics of perfect markets................................................ 78 6.1 Key concepts ....................................................................................................... 81 6.2 Review of production, costs and revenue . ........................................................ 82 6.3 Perfect competition . ........................................................................................... 83 6.4 The individual business and the industry . ........................................................ 85 6.5 Market structures. ............................................................................................... 89 6.6 Output, profit, losses and supply. ....................................................................... 90 6.7 How to draw graphs to show various equilibrium positions.............................. 95 6.8 Competition policies. ........................................................................................... 96 Chapter 7: Dynamics of imperfect markets .................................................. 99 7.1 Key concepts ..................................................................................................... 101 © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CONTENTS v

© Department of Basic Education 2014 7.2 Monopolies......................................................................................................... 102 7.3 Output profit and loss. ....................................................................................... 104 7.4 Oligopolies.......................................................................................................... 107 7.5 Monopolistic competition ................................................................................. 110 7.6 Summary of market structures......................................................................... 111 Chapter 8: The reasons for and consequences of market failures .......... 115 8.1 Key concepts .....................................................................................................118 8.2 The reasons for market failures ....................................................................... 119 8.3 Consequences/effects of market failures .......................................................122 8.4 Cost-benefit analysis (CBA) . .............................................................................129 Chapter 9: Economic growth and development . ....................................... 133 9.1 Key concepts .....................................................................................................135 9.2 Economic growth and economic development ...............................................136 9.3 Demand-side approach . ...................................................................................136 9.4 The supply-side approach . ...............................................................................138 9.5 Evaluation of the South African approaches used in South Africa................139 9.6 The North/South divide.....................................................................................141 Chapter 10: South Africa’s industrial policies and their suitability in terms of international best practice............................................................. 145 10.1 Key concepts ..................................................................................................... 147 10.2 Industrial development policies in South Africa . ............................................ 148 10.3 Regional development....................................................................................... 149 10.4 South Africa’s endeavours . ..............................................................................150 10.5 Incentives to encourage industrial development............................................ 152 10.6 Appropriateness of South Africa’s industrial policies......................................155 10.7 Appropriateness of South Africa’s regional development policies. ................156 10.8 Small business development policies. .............................................................156 10.9 The appropriateness of black economic empowerment in the South African economy.................................................................................................156 Chapter 11: South African economic and social indicators . .................... 159 11.1 Key concepts ..................................................................................................... 161 11.2 The performance of an economy...................................................................... 162 11.3 Economic indicators . ........................................................................................ 162 11.4 Social indicators ................................................................................................164 11.5 International comparisons . .............................................................................. 166 Chapter 12: Inflation . .................................................................................... 170 12.1 Key concepts ..................................................................................................... 172 12.2 Measuring inflation (define, explain, examine)................................................ 173 12.3 Types and characteristics of inflation .............................................................. 173 12.4 The causes of inflation. ......................................................................................174 12.5 The consequences of inflation.......................................................................... 176 12.6 Measures to combat inflation . ......................................................................... 176 Chapter 13: Tourism....................................................................................... 180 13.1 Key concepts .....................................................................................................182 13.2 Definition of tourism . ........................................................................................183 13.3 The purposes of tourism....................................................................................183 13.4 Measuring tourism.............................................................................................183 13.5 Reasons for growth............................................................................................183 13.6 The effects of tourism .......................................................................................184 13.7 The benefits of tourism .....................................................................................186 13.8 A South African tourism profile. ........................................................................ 187 13.9 Tourism policy suggestions . ............................................................................. 187 Chapter 14: Environmental sustainability.................................................... 191 14.1 Key concepts .....................................................................................................193 14.2 The state of the environment ...........................................................................194 14.3 Measures to ensure sustainability ...................................................................196 Appendix: Exemplar exam paper ................................................................ 201 © Department of Basic Education 2014 vi CONTENTS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Dear Grade 12 learner This Mind the Gap study guide helps you to prepare for the end-of-year Education is the passport to the CAPS Economics Grade 12 exam. future, for tomorrow belongs to those The study guide does NOT cover the entire CAPS curriculum, but it does who prepare for it today. focus on core content of each knowledge area and points out where you can earn easy marks. You must work your way through this study guide to improve your understanding, identify your areas of weakness and correct your own mistakes. To ensure a good pass, you should also cover the remaining parts of the curriculum using other textbooks and your class notes. We are confident that this Mind the Gap study guide can help you to prepare well so that you pass the end-of-year exams. The importance of your success cannot be over-emphasised. You form part of the future generation, and we all hope for a better future, a future where all our young South Africans can enjoy a high standard of living. Overview of the exam for CAPS Economics Grade 12 The Economics exam consists of TWO × 1½ hour papers of 150 marks each. The paper consists of SIX questions divided into three sections. Question ONE is COMPULSORY. There are FIVE other questions from which THREE must be answered. The detailed requirements for each section are shown below: FORMAT OF THE GRADE 12 ECONOMICS QUESTION PAPERS Economics 1. CLASSIFICATION OF TOPICS FOR GRADE 12 ECONOMICS QUESTION is a life journey… PAPERS Use it daily MIDYEAR EXAMINATION PAPERS The two question papers are structured as follows: ECONOMICS GRADE 12 PAPER 1 PAPER 2 150 MARKS – 1½ HOURS 150 MARKS – 1½ HOURS MAIN TOPIC: MACROECONOMICS MAIN TOPIC: MICROECONOMICS TOPICS: TOPICS: • Circular flow • Perfect markets • Business cycles • Imperfect markets • Public sector • Market failures • Foreign exchange markets • Protectionism and Free Trade © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics INTRODUCTION vii

© Department of Basic Education 2014 TRIAL AND FINAL EXAMINATION PAPERS ECONOMICS GRADE 12 PAPER 1 PAPER 2 150 MARKS – 1½ HOURS 150 MARKS – 1½ HOURS MAIN TOPIC: MAIN TOPIC: MACROECONOMICS MICROECONOMICS TOPICS: TOPICS: • Circular flow • Perfect markets • Business cycles • Imperfect markets • Public sector • Market failures • Foreign exchange markets • Protectionism and Free Trade MAIN TOPIC: MAIN TOPIC: ECONOMIC PURSUITS ECONOMIC ISSUES • Growth and Development • Inflation • Industrial development policies • Tourism PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION NB• Economic and social NBEnvironmental sustainability • performance indicators • Each paper carries 150 MARKS HINT! hint • The duration of each paper is 1½ HOURS • Each paper comprises of SIX QUESTIONS divided into three sections. • From the six questions only FOUR must be answered as follows: e.g. –– SECTION A: Question 1 is COMPULSORY EG - worked examples –– SECTION B: Consists out of THREE questions: Questions 2–4 from which the candidate must choose only TWO –– SECTION C: Consists out of TWO questions: Questions 5–6 from which the examscandidate must choose only ONE • The above papers must not be written on the same day. • The detailed requirements for each section are indicated on the following pages: activity ACTIVITIES boy and girl-left and right of page activity Step by step comment comment © Department of Basic Education 2014 viii INTRODUCTION Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

© Department of Basic Education 2014 1. DETAIL OF GRADE 12 ECONOMICS QUESTION PAPERS SECTION A (COMPULSORY) TOTAL: 30 QUESTION 1 (TO BE ANSWERED IN THE ANSWER BOOK – NO LOOSE ANSWER SHEETS ARE ALLOWED) 1.1 Multiple-choice items (lower order) FOUR per main topic = 8 items (2 marks per item) (8 × 2) (16) 1.2 Matching column A and B (lower order) FOUR items per main topic = 8 items (1 mark per item) (8 × 1) (8) 1.3 Identify the concept (middle/lower order) THREE items per main topic (6 × 1) (6) SECTION B (Answer TWO QUESTIONS FROM THIS SECTION) TOTAL: 80 QUESTIONS 2 – 4 (THREE QUESTIONS) ONE question per MAIN TOPIC and ONE combination question (not necessarily equally distributed) of the 2 MAIN TOPICS 2.1 Short items 2.1.1 Lower order (2 × 1) (2) 2.1.2 Middle order (1 × 2) (2) (4) 2.2 Data response (middle order): Study the following graph/cartoon/ table/text, etc. and answer the questions that follow: (10) 2.3 Data response (middle order): Study the following graph/cartoon/ table/ text, etc. and answer the questions that follow: (10) 2.4 ONE short question (middle order): (2 × 4) OR (4 × 2) (8) 2.5 ONE short question (higher order): (2 × 4) OR (4 × 2) (8) [40] SECTION C (ANSWER ONE QUESTION FROM THIS SECTION) TOTAL: 40 QUESTIONS 5-6 (TWO ESSAY QUESTIONS) – ONE question per MAIN TOPIC STRUCTURE OF ESSAY MARK ALLOCATION Introduction Max. 2 Body: • Main part: Discuss in detail/Indepth discussion/Examine/ Max. 26 Critically discuss/Analyse/Compare/Evaluate/Distinguish/ Differentiate/Explain/Assess Max. 10 • Additional part: Give own opinion/Critically discuss/ Evaluate/Critically evaluate/Draw a graph and explain/Use the graph given and explain/Complete the graph/Calculate/ Deduce/Compare/Explain/Distinguish/Interpret Conclusion Max. 2 TOTAL 40 © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics INTRODUCTION ix

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Essays play a very big role in your success in Economics, because you must choose ONE essay to answer in each question paper, counting 40 marks out of the grand total of 150 marks. Each essay counts 40 marks. This study guide includes essay topics that have been asked in past question papers. Make sure that you study each of these topics in detail in your preparation for your preparatory and final papers. Never leave a question unanswered if you are asked to offer your own opinion. Remember: each section includes questions that are easy and almost-easy, so make sure you get these marks too. Good luck for your NSC exams, your doorway to a better future. Dream big, set your goals and go for it! © Department of Basic Education 2014 x INTRODUCTION Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Look out for How to use this study guide these icons in the study guide. PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION NB NB • The study guide includes a table of key NBconcepts with definitions NB PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION which need to be learnt off by heart. You can gain easy marks for the recall of definitions in the single mark questions. PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION NB NB HINT! HINT! hint hint Hints to help you remember a concept NB PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION Pay special attention NBhint HINT! orEGguide you in e.g. EG - worked examples Worked examples e.g. - worked examples solving problems exams HINT! e.g. exams EG - worked examples Activities with Step-by-step Refers you to exam hint instructions questions questions for you to answer exams e.g. EG - worked examples activity • A checklist from the exam guidelines foractivity Economics has been ACTIVITIES boy provided on page xvi for you to keep track of your progress. Once ACTIVITIES boy and girl-left and right of page exams you have mastered the core concepts and have confidence right of in page your and girl-left and activity activity answers to the questions provided, tick the last column of the activity checklist. ACTIVITIES boy and girl-left and right of page • The activities are based on exam-type questions. activity Cover the answers Step by step comment comment activity comment and do the activity on your own. Then check your ACTIVITIES boy answers.comment Step by step Reward yourself for the things you get right. If you get any incorrect answers, and girl-left and right of page make sure you understand where you went wrong before moving on comment activity Step by step comment to the next section. Use this study guide as a workbook. • Each topic is briefly covered according to the exam guidelines. Make notes, draw pictures Valuable guidelines are provided comment to help you answer questions and highlight important Step by step comment on graphs. concepts. • Exemplar Exam papers are included in the study guide for you to do. Check your answers by looking back at your notes and the exam memoranda. An example of a paper goes a long way in preparing you for what to expect and helps reduce exam anxiety. Go to www.education.gov.za to download more past exam papers. True individual freedom cannot exist without economic security and independence. Franklin D Roosevelt © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics INTRODUCTION xi

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Top 10 study tips The golden rule of effective study is the ABC – Apply 1. Have all your materials ready before you begin studying – pencils, pens, highlighters, paper, etc. Bottom to Chair! 2. Be positive. Make sure your brain holds onto the information you are learning by reminding yourself how important it is to remember the work and get the marks. 3. Take a walk outside. A change of scenery will stimulate your learning. You’ll be surprised at how much more you take in outside in the fresh air. 4. Break-up your learning sections into manageable parts. Trying to learn too much at one time will only result in a tired, unfocused and anxious brain. 5. Keep your study sessions short but effective and reward yourself with short, constructive breaks. 6. Teach your concepts to anyone who will listen. It might feel strange at first, but it is definitely worth reading your revision notes aloud. 7. Your brain learns well with colours and pictures. Try to use them whenever you can. 8. Be confident with the learning areas you know well and focus your brain energy on the sections that you find more difficult to take in. 9. Repetition is the key to retaining information you have to learn. Keep going, don’t give up. 10. Sleeping at least 8 hours every night, eating properly and drinking plenty of water are all important things you need to do for your brain. Studying for exams is like tough exercise, so you must be prepared physically. © Department of Basic Education 2014 xii INTRODUCTION Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Study skills to boost your learning This guide makes use of three study techniques you can use to help you learn the material: 1. Mobile notes 2. Mnemonics 3. Mind maps Mobile notes These mobile notes will Mobile notes are excellent help you study tools for learning all the key smarter… concepts in the study guide. Mobile notes are easy to make and you can take them with you wherever you go: 1. Fold a blank piece of paper in half. Fold it in half again. Fold it again. 2. Open the paper. It will now be divided into 8 parts. 3. Cut or tear neatly along the folded lines. 1. Fold an A4 paper into 4. On one side, write the 8 squares. Cut or tear basic concept. neatly along the folded lines. 5. On the other side, write the meaning or the explanation of the basic Y OLIGOPOL concept. 6. Use different colours and add pictures to help you remember. 7. Take these mobile notes with you 2. Write the basic concept wherever you go and on one side of a bit of look at them whenever paper. you can. 8. As you learn, place the Market stru cards in three different controlled bctyure group of busia small piles: nesses. • I know well • Getting there • I need more practice 3. Write the definition of 9. The more you learn the basic concept on them, the better you the back of the piece of will remember them. paper. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics INTRODUCTION xiii

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Mnemonics A mnemonic code is a useful technique for learning information that is difficult to remember. Here is a made-up word to help you remember the 6 reasons for market Look at pages failure – EMILII – each letter of the word stands for a reason: 42, 56, 184 and 196 for some more examples of mnemonics. E – Externalities M – Missing markets I – Imperfect competition L – Lack of information I – Immobility of factors of production I – Imperfect distribution of income & wealth Here is a sentence to help you remember the 5 demand reasons for international trade – each word in the sentence begins with the same letter as one of the reasons: People In Witbank Prefer Coffee Population Income Wealth Preferences Consumption Mnemonics code information and make it easier to remember. The more creative you are and the more you link your ‘codes’ to familiar things, the more helpful your mnemonics will be. This guide provides several ideas for using mnemonics. Be sure to make up your own. © Department of Basic Education 2014 xiv INTRODUCTION Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind maps There are several mind maps included in this study guide, which summarise some of the sections. Have a look at the following pictures of a brain cell (neuron) and a mind map: Figure 1: Brain cell or neuron Figure 2: Mind map rules Mind maps work because they show information that we have to learn in the same way that our brains ‘see’ information. As you study the mind maps in the guide, add pictures to each of the branches to help you remember the content. You can make your own mind maps as you finish each section. How to make your own mind maps 1. Turn your paper sideways so your brain has space to spread out in all Mind directions. mapping your notes makes 2. Decide on a name for your mind map that summarises the them more interesting information you are going to put on it. and easier to 3. Write the name in the middle and draw a circle or bubble or picture remember. around it. 4. Only write key words on your branches, not whole sentences. Keep it short and simple. 5. Each branch should show a different idea. Use a different colour for each idea. Connect the information that belongs together. This will help build your understanding of the learning areas. 6. Have fun adding pictures wherever you can. It does not matter if you can’t draw well. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics INTRODUCTION xv

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Remember to take your calculator to your mapwork On the day of the exam … exam! 1. Make sure you have all the necessary stationery for your exam, i.e. pens, pencils, eraser, calculator (with new batteries), as well as your ID document and exam admission letter. 2. Arrive on time, at least one hour before the start of the exam. 3. Go to the toilet before entering the exam room. You don’t want to waste valuable time going to the toilet during the exam. 4. Use the 10 minutes reading time to read the instructions carefully. This helps to ‘open’ the information in your brain. Start with the question you think is the easiest to get the flow going. 5. Break the questions down to make sure you understand what is being asked. If you don’t answer the question properly you won’t get any marks for it. Look for the key words in the question to know how to answer it. A list of these words is on page xvii of this study guide. 6. Try all questions. Each question has some easy marks in it so make sure that you do all the questions in the exam. 7. Never panic, even if the question seems difficult at first. It will be linked with something you have covered. Find the connection. 8. Manage your time properly. Don’t waste time on questions you are unsure of. Move on and come back if time allows. GOOD LUCK! 9. Check weighting – how many marks have been allocated for your answer? Take note of the ticks in this study guide as examples of marks allocated. Do not give more or less information than is required. 10. Write big and bold and clearly. You will get more marks if the marker can read your answer clearly. © Department of Basic Education 2014 xvi INTRODUCTION Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Question words to help you answer questions It is important to look for the question words (the words that tell you what to do) to correctly understand what the examiner is asking. Use the words in the following table as a guide when answering questions. Question word What is required of you Account for Explain the cause of; explain why; give reasons for Analyse Separate; examine and interpret critically; positives and negatives; pros and cons Argue Put forward reasons in support of or against a statement Assess Estimating the nature, quality or value of something Calculate Use maths to work out an answer Classify Place things with similar characteristics in the same group; arrange according to type or sort Comment Give your opinion, based on facts Compare To list both similarities and differences Contrast Stress the differences between things, events or problems Critically Analyse something, expressing agreement or disagreement with it Define Give a short and clear meaning Demonstrate Show or make clear; illustrate or explain; prove by reasoning and evidence (note that you can give examples) Describe List the main characteristics of something; give an account of (note that a diagram or map may be part of a description) Discuss Give the reasons for your statement; present both sides and reach a conclusion Evaluate Express an opinion, using evidence, of how good/bad, negative/positive, successful/ unsuccessful something is Examine Look at something carefully and in detail Explain Make clear, interpret, and spell out the material you present. Give reasons for differences of opinion or of results Give To state facts without discussions or explanations (note that you may be asked to ‘Give a reason’) Identify Single out one particular piece of information PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION NB Illustrate Explain or make something clear NB by using examples, charts, pictures and drawings Interpret To give an explanation of; to give the meaning of List Writing a list of the facts in their simplest form State Write down information without discussion Suggest Give possible reasons or ideas HINT! Summarise Reduce a lot of information to its main points hint In every exam question, put a CIRCLE e.g. Examples of question words EG - worked examples around the question word and underline any other important key words. These words tell Refer to Table 1.2.2 (income method) and answer the following questions: you exactly what is being asked. exams 1. Which organisation is responsible for the recording and publishing of GDP figures in South Africa? (2) 2. Explain the concept ‘subsidies on products’.(3) 3. Give TWO examples of taxes on products. (4) 4. Calculate the consumption of fixed capital in 2009 as a percentage of GDP at market price. Show all calculations.(4) activity ACTIVITIES boy and girl-left and right of page activity © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics INTRODUCTION xvii

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Learner’s Checklist Use this checklist to monitor your progress when preparing for the exam. The ticks (3) tell you which aspects of the curriculum are covered in the study guide. The stars (*) tell you to go to textbooks and class notes. Covered in I do not I Topic Aspects of the curriculum Study guide understand understand Main Topic: Macroeconomics Topic 1 Concepts 3 Open economy Four sector diagram 3 circular flow model Participants 3 National account aggregates and conversions 3 Multiplier 3 Topic 2 Concepts 3 Business cycles and Composition and features of business cycles: 3 forecasting Causes of business cycles 3 Types of business cycles 3 Government policy 3 The new economic paradigm (smoothing of 3 cycles) Features underpinning forecasting with regard to 3 business cycles Topic 3 The composition and necessity of the public 3 Public sector Sector Problems of public sector provisioning 3 Objectives of the public sector and its budget 3 Fiscal policy (including the Laffer curve) 3 Reasons for public sector failure 3 Topic 4 The main reasons for international trade 3 Foreign exchange The balance of payments 3 market The establishment of foreign exchange rates 3 Foreign exchange markets 3 Corrections of BOP surplus and deficit 3 (disequilibria) © Department of Basic Education 2014 xviii INTRODUCTION Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Covered in I do not Topic Aspects of the curriculum I understand Study guide understand Main Topic: Macroeconomics Topic 5 Export promotion 3 Protection and free trade Import substitution 3 (Globalisation) Protectionism (the arguments) 3 Free trade (the arguments) 3 A desirable mix 3 Evaluation of South Africa’s trade policies 3 Main Topic: Microeconomics Topic 6 Perfect competition 3 Dynamics of Perfect Individual business and industry 3 Markets Market structure 3 Output, Profits, Losses and Supply 3 Competition policy 3 Topic 7 Monopoly 3 Dynamics of imperfect Oligopoly 3 markets Monopolistic competition 3 Topic 8 The causes of market failures 3 Dynamics of markets: Consequences of market failures 3 Market failures Main Topic: Economic Pursuits Topic 9 Background/A comparison between 3 Economic Growth & The demand-side approach 3 Development The supply-side approach 3 Evaluation of the approaches used in South 3 Africa The North/South divide 3 © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics INTRODUCTION xix

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Covered in I do not I Topic Aspects of the curriculum Study guide understand understand Main Topic: Economic Pursuits Topic 10 Industrial development in South Africa 3 Economic growth and Regional development 3 development: industrial South Africa’s endeavours 3 development policies Incentives to encourage industrial development 3 Appropriateness of South Africa’s industrial 3 policies Appropriateness of South Africa’s regional 3 development policies Small business development 3 The appropriateness of Black Economic 3 Empowerment in the SA economy Best practice for regional development 3 Topic 11 The performance of an economy 3 Economic and social Economic indicators 3 performance indicators Social indicators 3 International comparisons 3 Main Topic: Contemporary Economic Issues Topic 12 Definition 3 Economic issues of the Measuring inflation 3 day: Inflation Types and characteristics of inflation 3 Causes of inflation 3 Consequences of inflation, on 3 The inflation problem in South Africa 3 Measures to combat inflation 3 © Department of Basic Education 2014 xx INTRODUCTION Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

© Department of Basic Education 2014 Covered in I do not Topic Aspects of the curriculum I understand Study guide understand Main Topic: Contemporary Economic Issues Topic 13 Definition 3 Economic issues of the Purposes/types of tourism 3 day: Tourism Measuring tourism 3 Reasons for its growth 3 The effects of tourism on 3 The benefits of tourism on 3 South Africa’s profile (indigenous knowledge systems) 3 Policy suggestions – Department of 3 Tourism Topic 14 The state of the environment 3 Economic issues of Measures to ensure sustainability 3 the day: Environmental Major international agreements 3 sustainability © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics INTRODUCTION xxi

Chapter 1 The circular flow model, national account aggregates and the multiplier The circular flow model, national account aggregates and the multiplier CONSUMER BUSINESS are three key terms in Economics. According to the circular flow model, the three key sectors of the economy (consumer, business and government) all work together to ensure that society’s needs are provided for through the creation of goods and services. The national account aggregates are an important means of analysing the performance of a country. The most important of these aggregates is GOVERNMENT the Gross Domestic Product (GDP). The marginal propensity to consume is what shows the amount of each rand that people will use for consumption within a country at a particular time. The multiplier is derived from the marginal propensity to consume. It is a 1 ratio which shows that the increase in income in a country will be greater Formula: M = (1 − mpc) than the initial increase in spending. 1 1 The formula can also be written as K = or α = (1 – mpc) (1 – mpc) © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER 1

1 Chapter Overview TOPIC CONTENT CONTENT DETAILS FOR TEACHING, LEARNING AND ASSESSMENT PURPOSES 1. Present the circular flow as a Circular flow macroeconomic model • The open economy circular flow model • Definitions and explanations –– Concepts • Identification of participants, flows, injections –– The complete four sector diagram and leakages from a diagram –– Participants • In-depth discussion of the inter-relationships –– Households between participants –– Business sector • Draw and interpret a circular flow diagram –– Government • Discussion of an economy in equilibrium –– Foreign sector • Justify the equality: L = J and illustrate its component elements –– Real and money flows –– Injections (J = I + G + X) –– Leakages (L = S + T + M) –– Equations e.g. Y = C + I + G + (X – M) • Explain the relationship between markets –– Markets within the FOUR SECTOR model –– Factor market • Link the operation of financial and foreign –– Market for goods and services/ exchange markets to the other participants products of the circular flow –– Financial Market – Money and Capital –– Foreign market/foreign exchange –– Flows through different markets (production, income and spending) • Definitions and explanations Deduce and analyse the national account aggregates and conversions • Identify from table • Briefly discuss the THREE methods • National account aggregates and • Explain the concepts used in national conversions accounts Measuring National Account Aggregates: • Analyse, interpret and derive aggregates –– Production GDP(P) – GDP • Analyse the national account conversions –– Income GDP(I) – GDI –– Expenditure GDP(E) – GDE HOT QUESTION: How is expenditure related to National Account Conversions: income and production? –– System of National Accounts (SNA) –– (Nominal and Real prices, Basic prices, Factor cost, Market prices, Net Figures, Domestic and National figures and disposable national income) CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL © Department of Basic Education 2014 2 ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 1 Derive and apply the multiplier • Define the concept • The multiplier HOT QUESTION: Explain the multiplier process –– Definition of multiplier effect by using the graph and the following formula: ∆Y/∆E –– Explanation of the multiplier process –– Aided with a circular flow and examples (using a graph and illustration) HOT QUESTION: What is the effect of the marginal propensity to consume (mpc) and –– Application of basic formulae marginal propensity to save (mps) on the multiplier (1/1-mpc or 1/mps)? • Link the multiplier to the circular flow model HOT QUESTION: Why is the value of the multiplier in reality a small figure? © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER 3

1 Chapter Make mobile notes (see instructions on page xiv) to learn the meanings of these basic concepts. 1.1 Key concepts These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key Economics concepts that are used in this study guide. Understand these concepts well. Term Definition Base year A year with very small price changes or price fluctuations. The current base year used by the Reserve Bank is 2005 Basic prices (bp) Used when GDP is calculated according to the production method and represents the production costs of firms Capital market Market for long-term financial instruments, for example, bonds, shares Circular flow model Continuous flow of spending, production and income between different sectors Closed economy An economy that has no foreign sector as a participator Consumption (C) Consumption spending by the population Domestic figures Value of all final goods and services produced within the borders of a country for a (GDP) specific period Economic The economy is in equilibrium if leakages are equal to injections: equilibrium L = J or S + T + M = I + G + X Expenditure method When the national accountants add together the spending of the four major sectors of the economy: C + G + I + (X – M) Exports (X) Goods and services produced locally and then sold for consumption outside the borders of the country Factor market Market where factors of production are traded, e.g. labour market Factor cost/Factor These terms can be used interchangeably and refer to the cost of or price paid for the prices factors of production (land, labour, capital and entrepreneurship) used by firms. [Note that the term factor income may also be used] Financial market The market where both short- and long-term financial assets are traded Financial sector Those financial institutions that are not directly involved in the production of goods and services, e.g. banks, insurance companies, pension funds and the JSE Foreign exchange The market in which one currency can be traded for another, e.g. rands for dollars market Goods market Market where goods and services are traded, e.g. cars, milk (also known as Product market) Government (G) The expenditure of the government sector Imports (M) Goods and services produced in other countries and purchased by local firms or households. Imports can also be represented by “Z” CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL © Department of Basic Education 2014 4 ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 1 Term Definition Income method Gross Domestic Income is derived by adding all income earned by the owners of the factors of production – GDP(I) Injections (J) The introduction of additional money into the economy by investment (I), government (G), and payments for exports (X) Investments (I) Spending by firms on capital goods Leakages (L) Money withdrawn from the circular flow, e.g through savings (S), taxes (T) and import expenditure (M) Marginal propensity The marginal propensity to consume (mpc) indicates that, as disposable income to consume (mpc) increases, an increase in personal consumer spending (consumption) occurs. For example, a marginal propensity to consume of 0.65 indicates that for every extra rand earned, the household will spend 65 cents and save 35 cents Market price (mp) Prices actually paid by consumers for goods and services plus all taxes less subsidies. Calculated according to the expenditure method Money flow The flow of income and expenditure between the participants in the circular flow Money market The short-term and very short-term market for savings and loans Multiplier A small initial increase in spending produces a proportionately larger increase in aggregate national income National figures Value of all final goods and services produced by the permanent citizens of the country (GNP) for a specific period Net figures Net indicates that some amount has been taken away, e.g. net exports reflects the value of exports less imports Open economy An economy that trades with the foreign sector Production method The adding of final values of all goods and services calculated as gross value added – GDP(P) Real flow The flow of goods and services between the participants in the circular flow Savings (S) Income that is not consumed Subsidies on Refers to subsidies that are not linked to specific goods or services, e.g. subsidy made production on employment Subsidies on Financial incentives to help struggling industries produce, as well as direct subsidies products payable per unit exported to encourage exports (e.g. government subsidy on bread) Taxes (T) Compulsory payments made by private individuals or business enterprises to the government sector with no direct benefit Taxes on production Refer to taxes on production not linked to a specific good or service (e.g. tax on land and buildings) Taxes on products Taxes that are payable per unit of some good or service (e.g. VAT, import duties) © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER 5

1 Chapter Learn these well. 1.2 The open economy circular flow model Description • The circular-flow model of the economy is a simplification showing how the economy works and the relationship between income, production and spending in the economy as a whole. • The circular-flow model of an open economy shows the workings of an economy that is open to foreign trade. • It is different to a closed economy because it includes the foreign sector. 1.2.1 Four sector diagram PRODUCTION FACTORS GOODS AND SERVICES BUSINESS SECTOR Expenditure on production factors Income (I) (T) Payment for X Public services FOREIGN SECTOR Expenditure (G) (G) X FACTOR GOODS MARKET STATE MARKET Production (G) M factors (S) Public services (T) FINANCIAL MARKET Payment for M Income (T) (wages/interest/rent/profit) (S) Private consumption expenditure (C) NOTE Leakages = T, S and M PRODUCTION FACTORS PRIVATE GOODS AND SERVICES Injections = I, G and X HOUSEHOLDS Figure 1.1 An open economy circular flow model 1.2.2 Participants Household sector • Households are the major consumers of economic goods and AL ATTENTION services – they use their income to buy from firms. NB • Households are the primary economic participants because they are the owners of the four factors of production. You must be able to draw a • Households sell factors of production in the factor market to firms. detailed diagram of a circular • Households receive a remuneration from the firms in the form of flow model. Figure 1.1 is a wages, rent, interest and profit. typical example of an open economy circular flow model. ed examples CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL © Department of Basic Education 2014 6 ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 1 Firms/business sector • Firms purchase the factors of production from the household in the factor market. Households = consumers • Firms use the factors of production to produce goods and services. Firms = suppliers • Businesses sell goods and services to households, government and the foreign sector. • Businesses receive an income from the other three participants (households, government and the foreign sector). The state/public sector • This refers to local, regional and national government. • The state provides the households and businesses with public goods Do you and services. know the difference • The state receives taxes from households, e.g. income tax. between an open economy and a closed • The state receives taxes from the business sector, e.g. company tax. economy? • The state spends money in the economy. (G) Foreign sector • There is a flow of goods or imports that flow from the foreign sector and are paid for by the individual households, businesses and the public sector. • These imports can be seen as expenditure by individual households, businesses and public sector. (A monetary outflow.) • There is also a flow of goods and services to the foreign sector from businesses (exports). • These exports will result in an income for individual households, businesses and public sector. (A monetary inflow.) Interaction between participants • Households provide production factors to producers (firms). • Households receive an income (Y) in return – rent, wages, interest and profits. • Households purchase goods and services from firms. • Firms receive income from sales revenue. • Households and firms purchase goods and services from the foreign sector as imports (M). • The foreign businesses receive money from firms and households. • Firms sell goods and services to the foreign sectors, and this is called exports (X). • Households and firms pay taxes to the government. (T) • The government provides public goods and services to households and firms. • The unexhausted (unspent) part of the household and firms’ income earned is saved in the financial sector of the economy. (S) • The money invested by firms and households is known as savings (S). • The funds received by the financial sector are used by firms/ businesses to purchase infrastructure for the production of goods and services. • This flow of money from the financial sector for use by firms is known as investment (I). © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER 7

1 Chapter 1.2.3 Real and money flow • Real flow: Factors of production flow from the owners (households) to producers via the factor markets. Goods and services flow from the producers via the goods markets to households and other users of goods and services. Factors of production and goods and services flow from foreign countries to South Africa (imports). Factors of production and goods and services flow from South Africa to foreign countries (exports). • Money flow: Factor remuneration represents the expenditure of producers and the income of households (wages, rent, interest and profit). On the other hand, consumption expenditure represents the expenditure of households and the income of producers. Leakages is 1.2.4 Leakages and injections when the economy Leakages refer to the outflow of money from the economy. gets weaker. Injection is when the economy The following are leakages or withdrawals from the circular flow: gets stronger. • Savings (S) • Taxation (T) • Payment for Imports (M) In other words: L = S + T + M Leakages = Savings + Taxes + Import expenditure Injections refer to an inflow of money into the economy. The following are injections (additions to) the circular flow: • Investment (I) • Government expenditure (G) • Payments for exports (X) In other words: J = I + G + X Injections = Investments + Government expenditure + Export Income 1.2.5 Equations Equilibrium • The economy is in equilibrium when leakages are equal to injections. • In other words L J = S+T+M = G+I+X CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL © Department of Basic Education 2014 8 ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 1 Disequilibrium The economy is in disequilibrium when: • Leakages are more than Injections. • Injections are more than Leakages. Restoring the equilibrium causes changes to national income National Income increases when Injections are more than Leakages J>L G+I+X>S+T+M • The amounts of injections which exceed leakages contribute to additional demand. • This additional demand must be satisfied. • This causes an increase in the production of goods and services. National Income decreases when Injections are less than Leakages J<L I+G+X<S+T+M • The amount by which leakages exceed the injections contributes to a decreased demand. J<L Demand for goods and services drop. • Less goods and services are produced. • Less income in an economy. Mathematical and Graph Presentation • Income (Y) is equal to Expenditure (E) In other words: Y=E Y = C + G + I + (X – M) = E = C + G + I + (X – M) Mathematical Calculation Imports R40 million Investment Spending R180 million Consumption Spending R 110 million Exports R 25 million Government Spending R110 million © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER 9

1 Chapter The Formula to calculate the Aggregate Income in the economy: Y = C + I + G + (X – M) Calculation of the Aggregate Income in the economy. Y = C + I + G + (X – M) Y = R110 million + R180 million + R110 million + (R25 million – R40 million) Y = R385 million Graphical Presentation Y=E C + I + G + (X – M)1 Expenditure E1 C + I + G + (X – M) E 45° Y Y1 Income Figure 1.2: Expenditure and income • Expenditure is (E) and it is shown on the Vertical axis. • Income is (Y) and it is shown on the Horizontal axis. • E = Y and it is represented by a 45° line. • It halves the 90° angle into two equal portions of 45°. • Aggregate Expenditure (AE) = C + I + G + (X – M) When E increases it means • This curve shows the amount which consumers, producers, more goods and government and the foreign sector plan to spend at every level of services are being income. bought. This is good • It also equals aggregate demand. for the economy. • The curve slopes upwards and to the right. • At an income of Y the AE intersects the vertical axis at E. • Assume planned AE increases to E1. • This means more money is injected into the economy. • This causes an increase in Y to Y1. CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL © Department of Basic Education 2014 10 ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 1 1.2.6 Markets MARKETS Goods/Product Factor markets Money markets Capital markets Foreign Exchange markets • Factors of • Short term • Long term markets • These are production are loans and very funds are • Businesses buy markets for traded on these short term borrowed foreign currency consumer goods markets. funds are saved and saved by to pay for and services. • Natural and borrowed consumers imported goods • Buying and resources, by consumers and business and services. selling of Labour, and business enterprises. • In S.A these goods that are Capital, and enterprises. • E.g. Mortgage transactions produced in Entrepreneurship • Banks, bond. occur in banks. markets. are traded in this Insurance • The • The most • E.g. Durable market. companies are Johannesburg important consumer examples. Stock exchange foreign exchange goods. • Bank is a key markets are in • Semi-durable debentures, institution in London, New consumer treasury bills, the capital York and Tokyo. goods. government market. • The S.A Rand is bonds are • Shares are traded freely in • Non-Durable traded. traded. these markets. consumer goods. • E.g. It is when • Services a person buys travelers FINANCIAL MARKETS cheques to travel abroad. Activity 1 Study the diagram below and answer the questions that follow: A B C Households State Business Sector E G F D Savings Foreign Sector © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER 11

1 Chapter 1.1 Use the information below and calculate the values A – G: (7) Total production R25 000 Income Taxation R 5 000 Savings R4 000 Imports R 3 700 1.2 Explain the impact of an increase in income taxes on the level of production. (3) 1.3 Calculate the total leakages (L) in the above diagram. (4) 1.4 Give the identity (equation) used to represent GDP in an open economy.(2) 1.5 If a country has a marginal propensity to consume of 0.1, calculate the value of the multiplier. (4) [20] Answers to activity 1 1.1 A – R20 0003 B – R25 0003 C – R5 0003 D – R4 0003 E – R16 0003 F – R3 7003 G – R12 3003(7) 1.2 Leads to a decline in production333(3) 1.3 S + T + M3 R4 000 + R5 000 + R3 7003 R12 70033(4) 1.4 C + G + I + (X – M)33(2) 1.5 M = 1/(1 – mpc)3 = 1/(1 – 0,1)3 = 1/0.93 = 1.13(4) [20] 1.3 National account aggregates 1.3.1 Deriving national account aggregates The national account aggregates are methods that are used to determine the value of economic activity. The production method, income method and expenditure method are three different ways the economic activity is measured. They are all used at different times and for different purposes. Be sure you learn how to use these methods. CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL © Department of Basic Education 2014 12 ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 1 PRODUCTION METHOD INCOME METHOD EXPENDITURE METHOD GDP GDP GDP Adds final values of all goods and Adds all income earned by owners Adds spending of four main services produced of factors of production economy sectors – consumption, government, investments and exports (minus imports) The production (output value added) method The production method is a method whereby we determine the Gross Domestic Product at basic prices by adding the final values of all goods and services produced in the primary, secondary and tertiary sectors. In the national accounts Gross Domestic Product at basic prices is usually referred to as Gross Value Added (GVA) at basic prices. Table 1.3.1 shows the GDP in the different sectors of the economy for 2005–2012 in (R millions). Value added (GVA) 2005 2007 2009 2011 2012 1. Primary sector 143 394 210 803 260 176 321 229 335 409 2. Secondary sector 330 669 403 129 478 627 508 953 542 821 3. Tertiary sector 927 004 1 178 144 1 439 517 1 791 197 1 956 857 4. Gross value added at basic prices 1 401 067 1 792 076 2 178 320 2 621 379 2 835 087 4.1 Plus – taxes on products 175 667 230 000 237 117 311 033 338 792 4.2 Less – subsidies on products 5 652 5 891 9 036 14 873 18 684 5. Gross domestic product at market 1 571 082 2 016 185 2 406 401 2 917 539 3 155 195 prices Table 1.3.1: GDP by economic sector for 2005–2012 Source: SARB Quarterly bulletin (September 2013) PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION NB NB If we merely add up the market values of all outputs, we obtain a total greatly in excess of the value of the economy’s actual output. Such a calculation would lead to double counting or multiple counting. So, to solve the problem we use ‘value added’. HINT! hint e.g. EG - worked examples © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER 13 exams

1 Chapter Activity 2 Study the following data and answer the question that follows: Compensation of employees R1 086 907; Final consumption expenditure by households R1 472 824; Net operating surplus R728 426; Final consumption expenditure by government R504 169; Taxes on products R245 198; Subsidies on products R3 113; Taxes on production R38 173; Subsidies on production R 5 092; Gross capital formation R467 878; Exports of goods and services R657 113; Imports of goods and services R667 740; Consumption of fixed capital R332 824; Primary sector R278 518; Secondary sector R466 749; Tertiary sector R1 435 971. 1. Determine the gross domestic product at market prices according to the production method. [10] Answer to activity 2 1. Primary sector R 278 5183 Secondary sector R 466 7493 Tertiary sector R1 435 9713 Gross value added at basic prices 3 2 181 23833 Plus taxes on products R 245 198 3 Less subsidies on products R 3 113 3 Gross domestic product @ market price R2 423 32333 [10] The income method The income method is a method whereby we determine the gross domestic product – GDP at factor prices (factor cost) by adding all the income earned by the owners of the factors of production (gross domestic income). In the national accounts this is referred to as Gross Value Added at factor cost. Table 1.3.2 Indicates the gross domestic income for the South African economy for 2005–2011 in (R millions). National income or Gross Value added at 2005 2007 2009 2011 2012 factor cost (rbn) 1. Compensation of employees 699 018 882 379 1 081 640 1 330 315 1 447 429 2. Net operating surplus 485 761 629 116 736 427 874 877 942 903 3. Consumption of fixed capital 187 790 252 595 332 333 375 982 404 947 4. Gross value added @ factor cost 1 372 569 1 764 090 2 150 400 2 581 174 2 795 279 5. Other taxes on production 32 927 35 374 40 898 51 525 54 166 6. LESS other subsidies on production 4 421 7 388 12 978 11 320 14 358 7. Gross value added @ basic prices 1 401 067 1 792 076 2 178 320 2 621 379 2 835 087 8. Taxes on products 175 667 230 000 237 117 311 033 338 792 9. LESS subsidies on products 5 652 5 891 9 036 14 873 18 684 10. Gross domestic product @ market 1 571 082 2 016 185 2 406 401 2 917 539 31 155 195 prices (GDI) Table 1.3.2: South African GDP (I) for 2005–2012Source: SARB Quarterly Bulletin (September 2013) CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL © Department of Basic Education 2014 14 ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 1 Activity 3 Refer to Table 1.3.2 (income method) and answer the following questions: 1. Which financial institution is responsible for the recording and publishing of GDP figures in South Africa? (2) 2. Explain the concept ‘subsidies on products’. (3) 3. Give TWO examples of taxes on products. (4) 4. Calculate the consumption of fixed capital in 2009 as a percentage of GDP at market price. Show all calculations. (4) 5. What is the difference between 2007 and 2011 concerning the GVA @ factor cost? (2) Answers to activity 3 1. SARB 33 2. Direct payments by government3 to the producer3 to decrease price of a product, e.g. government subsidy on bread.3 3. VAT33 Import duties33 4. 332 584/2 398 152 × 100% 33 = 13.9%33 5. 2 631 227 – 1 764 090 = 1 258 65833 PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION The expenditure method NB NB The expenditure method is a method whereby we determine the gross domestic product – GDP – at market prices by adding the spending of Table 1.3.3 shows that South the four main sectors of the economy – households (C), government (G), Africa imported more goods HINT! businesses (I) and foreign sector (X – M). and services than it exported hint in 2005. This caused a Differentiate between GDE and Expenditure on GDP: GDE = C + I + G leakage from the circular flow Expenditure on GDP = C + I + G + (X – M) to the value of about –R7 390 billion in 2005. e.g. EG - worked examples Table 1.3.3 shows total spending on GDP at market prices for 2005–2012 (in R millions). Gross domestic expenditure and GDP at 2005 2007 2009 2011 2012 market prices (Rbn) exams 1. Final consumption expenditure by 990 773 1 264 726 1 460 764 1 743 989 1 907 247 households 2. Final consumption expenditure by 305 733 380 004 507 330 635 019 707 031 government 3. Gross capital formation 282 130activity 428 231 470 298 568 875 612 551 4. Residual items –164 –1 618 –10 857 ACTIVITIES boy –12 329 24 585 and girl-left and right of page 5. Gross domestic expenditure 1 578 472 2 071 343 2 427 517 2 935 554 3 251 414 6. Exports of goods and services 430 169activity 634 626 657 192 854 343 891 562 7. Imports of goods and services 437 559 689 784 678 308 872 358 987 781 8. Expenditure on gross Domestic product 1 571 082 2 016 185 2 406 401 2 917 539 3 155 195 @ market prices Step by step comment comment Source: SARB quarterly bulletin (September 2013) Table 1.3.3: Total spending on GDP at market prices for 2005-2012 © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER 15

1 Chapter 1.3.2 National Account Conversions • All countries use national account figures • South Africa uses the SYSTEM OF NATIONAL ACCOUNTS (SNA) prescribed by the United Nations. • GDP, GDE, and GDI have a great deal to do with the prices we use such as nominal and real prices, prices before or after taxes. • Indirect taxes and subsidies are the most important determinants of the end values of the circular flow aggregates. Factor Cost • Factor cost is used with the income method of measuring economic activity. • GDP at factor cost – other taxes on production – other subsidies on production = GDP at basic prices. Basic Prices • Used with the production method. • Includes taxes on production and excludes subsidies on production. • Taxes on production are payroll taxes (SITE and PAYE), recurring taxes on land & buildings, business licenses. • Subsidies on production include employment subsidies and subsidies paid to prevent pollution. Market prices • Used with the expenditure method. • Conversion of values from: –– Basic prices to market prices: GDP at basic prices + taxes on products – subsidies on products = GDP at market prices. –– Factor cost to market prices: GDP at factor cost + other taxes on production – subsidies on production = GDP at basic prices + taxes on products – subsidies on products = GDP at market prices. • Taxes on products are payable per unit, e.g. VAT. • Subsidies on products include direct subsidies paid per unit. Net figures Net operating surplus = surplus after taxes Net income = income after taxes Net fixed capital formation = After consumption of fixed capital (depreciation) Net exports = exports – imports GDP: Domestic production Conversion of Domestic to National figures includes foreigners Domestic figures (GDP) relate to the income and production happening operating in South Africa. within the borders of the country. GNP: Only includes the National figures (GNP) relate to the income or production by the citizens production/income of of the country. South Africans. CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL © Department of Basic Education 2014 16 ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 1 E.g. R Billions GDP at market prices 1 523 Plus: Factor income earned abroad by South Africans 29 Less: Factor income earned in South Africa by foreigners 60 GNI at market prices 1 492 Nominal figures vs Real figures Nominal figures • It is also known as market or money value. • It is also known as national product at current prices. • Nominal value of production is calculated by multiplying the volume of the final goods and services by their prices. • Inflation has not yet been taken into consideration. Real figures • It is also known as national product at constant prices. • The rate of inflation as expressed by the consumer price index (CPI) has been taken into account. • Real values of production are the nominal values of national product adjusted for price increase. • Real national product is the national product expressed in prices which applied in a certain base year. Activity 4 Two key national accounts conversions A. How to convert domestic totals to national totals: 2005 2007 2009 2011 PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION GDP @ MARKET PRICES 1 571 082 2 016 185 2 398 155 2 964 261 NB PLUS: Primary income 29 550 48 448 34 075 38 118 from the rest of the world PLEASE NOTE! Table 1.3.4 shows you how to applyHINT! MINUS: Primary income 60 975 117 266 87 593 104 689 to the rest of the world hint the conversion of domestic figures to national figures and vice versa. You must learn GNP @ MARKET PRICES 1 539 657 1 947 367 2 344 637 2 897 690 these conversions. Source: SARB Quarterly Bulletin (December 2011) e.g. EG - worked examples Table 1.3.4: How to convert domestic totals to national totals exams © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics activity ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER 17 ACTIVITIE

1 Chapter Study Table 1.3.5 below and answer the questions that follow. NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGGREGATES R MILLIONS Final consumption expenditure by households 1 473 490 Final consumption expenditure by government 505 040 Gross capital formation 467 878 Residual item –18 092 Gross Domestic Expenditure (GDE) 2 428 316 Export of goods and services 657 113 Import of goods and services 677 740 Expenditure on GDP at market prices A Source: Quarterly Bulletin, SARB (June 2010) Table 1.3.5: National account aggregates 1. Explain the concept gross capital formation. (2) 2. Calculate the value of A. Show all calculations. (4) 3. Differentiate between GVA at basic prices and Expenditure on GDP at market price. (3) [9] Answers to activity 4 1. Expenditure on assets used repeatedly in the process of production 3/Increase in the stock of capital 3(2) 2. GDE = 2 428 316 3 + Exports = 657 113 3 – Imports = 677 740 3 R2 407 689m 3(4) 3. GVA at basic prices is calculated using the production method and is usually less than Expenditure on GDP at market prices.33 To convert GVA at basic prices to Expenditure on GDP at market prices; subtract subsidies on products; add indirect taxes on products.3(3) [9] B. How to convert GDP at factor cost to GDP at basic prices or market prices: GDP @ factor cost to GDP at basic prices, or GDP at market prices: GDP at basic price = GDP @ factor cost + tax on production – subsidies on production GDP at market price = GDP at basic price + tax on products – subsidies on products CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL © Department of Basic Education 2014 18 ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 1 1.4 The Multiplier • The multiplier effect is the process whereby an initial change in spending changes the level of output and income by more than the initial change in spending. • The formulae to calculate the value of the multiplier (M) is: 1 1 M= OR 1 – mpc mps The multiplier in a two sector model The multiplier is derived from the marginal propensity to consume (mpc) • The size of the multiplier depends on the proportion of any increase in income that is spent. • The larger the mpc the bigger the multiplier and the smaller the mpc the smaller the multiplier. • It is the money that stays in the economy. E.g. Y = R100 000 S = R40 000 = 40% 0.4 E = R60 000 = 60% 0.6 • Marginal Propensity to consume = 0.6 (mpc) • Marginal propensity to save = 0.4 (mps) The total of the mpc + mps is always = 1 (one) FORMULA to calculate the Multiplier: 1 α= 1 – mpc 1 1 1 α= = = 1 – mpc 1 – 0.6 0.4 = 2½ (Multiplier) The multiplier in a four sector circular flow model • The following leakages are found –– mps = marginal propensity to save –– mrt = marginal rate of taxation –– mpm = marginal propensity to import © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER 19

1 Chapter The multiplier in a graph AD1 AE1 = C + I1 + G E1 Aggregate spending AD AE = C + I + G AD1 E ΔE ΔI Δ income AD 45° 0 Y Y1 Total incme Figure 1.4.1: An increase in aggregate expenditure Use the following formula to calculate the multiplier ΔY M= ΔI • I = R40 000 m and it increases to R50 000 m • ∆ I = R10 000 m : in other word investment in infrastructure and development and building of houses • Y = R100 000 m increases to R125 000 m • ∆Y = R25 000 m ΔY M= ΔI R25 000 = 2.5 = 2½ R10 000 • In the above sketch: –– E = Original equilibrium. –– Y = Original income. –– Change in investment spending is added. –– The AE curve (Aggregate expenditure) shifts upwards to AE1. –– Total spending at each level of income (Y) increases to Y1. –– Planned spending determines aggregate expenditure. Aggregate Demand increases to AD1. –– The new equilibrium position is at E1. –– The multiplier effect shows that the increase in Y (∆Y) is greater than the change in I (∆I). CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL © Department of Basic Education 2014 20 ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 1 • National Income changes when: –– Total spending ≠ to Production –– Total Demand ≠ to Total supply –– Planned leakages ≠ to planned Injections Explain the multiplier effect • The multiplier relates to how much national income changes as a result of an injection or withdrawal. • Assume an increase in injections into the economy (investment, government spending or exports), which would lead to a proportionate increase in national income. • The extra spending would have a knock-on effect and create even more spending. • The size of the multiplier will depend on the level of leakages. • (E.g.) assume firms increase investment spending by R1000. This is done by ordering capital goods from domestic firms to the value of R1000. • Initially total spending has increased by R1000. Total production has increased by R1000, which also leads to an increase in R1000 in income. The increase in spending = the increase in production which = an increase in income. • But when households earn income (R1000) leakages can occur, through income tax, savings and spending on imports. • If this amounts to R300, then spending on domestic goods will increase by R700. At this stage the multiplier starts to kick in. Application Keynesian approach 1. Keynes argues that if the government wants the economy to grow, John Keynes was they can increase (G). Increase (G) and finance it with loans. a famous economist who 2. They can decrease taxation, put more money in the pockets of the believed that an economy needs to spend in order consumer. to grow. 3. The consumer spends this extra money, aggregate demand will increase, production will increase and employment will increase. 4. Government can decrease company taxes and this can lead to greater investment by businesses (I). © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER 21

1 Chapter Activity 5 Study the graph below of the Keynesian model in a two-sector economy where the consumption function is given by C = c0 + c(Y) and answer the questions that follow. 80 70 60 e1 Expenditure (R billion) 50 40 e 30 20 10 0 Y1 Y2 Income (Y) 1. Define the term multiplier. (3) 2. With reference to the graph, name the TWO sectors involved in PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION deriving the macro-economic multiplier. (4) NB NB 3. Indicate what is represented by the dotted line. (2) 4. What is the value of autonomous consumption for the original consumption function? (2) 5. Suppose the marginal propensity to save (MPS) = 0.4. Use the Determine HINT!the size multiplier formula to calculate the eventual change in aggregate hint of the multiplier first. income, if there was an injection of R10 billion into the economy. Show ALL the calculations. (6) 6. Describe the relationship between the mpc and the multiplier. (3) [20] e.g. EG - worked examples Answers to activity 5 exams 1. The multiplier shows how an increase in spending (injection) produces a more than proportional increase in national income 333(3) 2. Household 33 Business 33(4) 3. Indicates all points where income = expenditure / 45º line / Keynesian equilibrium 33(2) 4. 20 bn 33(2) activity 5. M = 1 3 = 1 3 = 2.5 3 ACTIVITIES boy and girl-left and mps 0.4 2.5 x 10 bn P = 25 bn. 333 right of page (6) 6. The larger the marginal propensity to consume (mpc) the bigger activity the multiplier and vice versa 333(3) Keep going! [20] Step by step comment comment CHAPTER 1 THE CIRCULAR FLOW MODEL, NATIONAL © Department of Basic Education 2014 22 ACCOUNT AGGREGATES AND THE MULTIPLIER Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 2 Business cycles and forecasting Business cycles refer to fluctuations in economic activity or production over several months or years. They seem to indicate a long-term trend, typically involving shifts over time between periods of rapid economic growth (expansion or boom), and periods of stagnation or decline (contraction or recession). Forecasting relates to the economic indicators used to forecast the trends in the business cycle. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING 23

2 Chapter Overview TOPIC CONTENT CONTENT DETAILS FOR TEACHING, LEARNING AND ASSESSMENT PURPOSES 2. Analyse and explain business cycles, show Business how they are used in forecasting cycles • An in-depth discussion is required • The composition and features of business • Define the concept cycles • Explain the nature of business cycles –– Definition • Draw/illustrate a typical business cycle –– The nature of business cycles • Use a diagram and discuss the different phases –– Demonstration/diagram in a business cycle –– The real (actual) business cycle • Only a broad outline of the real business cycle is required • Explanations –– Exogenous explanation • Discuss the Exogenous explanation –– Endogenous explanation • Discuss the Endogenous explanation –– Types of business cycles • Only a broad outline of the types of business cycles is required • Government policy –– Monetary policy (expansionary and contractionary policies) HOT QUESTION: Compare and contrast endogenous and exogenous explanations of –– Fiscal policy (expansionary and business cycles contractionary policies) –– Combination of monetary and fiscal policy Explain the monetary and fiscal policies used by government to smooth out business cycles • The new economic paradigm (smoothing of cycles) HOT QUESTION: Explain how fiscal and monetary –– Definition policy might be used to stimulate economic activity during a recession –– Demand side policy –– Inflation and Unemployment • Define ‘The new economic paradigm’ –– Supply side policy • Explain the meaning of ‘The smoothing of –– Reduction in costs cycles’ –– Improvement in the efficiency of inputs • Discuss demand and supply side policies with –– Improvement in the efficiency of the aid of graphs markets HOT QUESTION: Explain how supply side and • Features underpinning forecasting with demand side policies would be used to stimulate regard to business cycles economic activity in the smoothing of cycles –– Indicators –– Leading • Explain the relevant concepts –– Coincidence • Discuss in detail the features underpinning –– Lagging forecasting –– Composite • Make use of a diagram and discuss the cycle –– Length of a cycle length, amplitude and the trend line as features –– Amplitude underpinning forecasting –– The trend line –– Extrapolation HOT QUESTION: Make use of a given real business cycle diagram and explain why it serves –– Moving averages as a forecasting model © Department of Basic Education 2014 24 CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 2 2.1 Key concepts These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key Economics concepts that are used in this study guide. Make mobile notes (see instructions on page xiv) to learn Term Definition the meanings of these basic concepts. Business cycle Successive periods of growth and decline in economic activities Depression Economic activity is at its lowest. Deepening of the recession Economic indicator Used to measure trends in the economy, e.g. GDP Peak Point where the economic expansion is at its highest Phillips-curve Illustrates the relationship between unemployment and inflation Recession A negative economic growth for at least two successive quarters Trough Point where the economic contraction is at its lowest 2.2 The composition and features of business cycles 2.2.1 Nature of business cycles • Changes in economic activity are recurring but never exactly the same or of the same magnitude. • Different circumstances and expectations cause consumers and producers to respond differently to initiating forces. • The duration and amplitude of every business cycle will be different. • Business cycles are recognised by the following: –– Two periods namely contraction and expansion; –– Two turning points namely trough and peak; –– Four phases, namely recovery, prosperity, recession and depression. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING 25

2 Chapter 2.2.2 Demonstration/diagram of a business cycle Figure 2.1 below shows economic activity over an extended period of time as the economy moves between periods of expansion and periods of contraction. Figure 2.1 Business cycles (trend line) As shown in Figure 2.1, economic activity clearly shows periods of contraction (recession/depression) and periods of expansion (recover/prosperity) in the economy. • Economic activity is shown by the upward and downward movements of the curve. • A period where there is a general increase in economic activity is known as an upswing. • A period of general decline in economic activity is called a downswing. • The business cycle oscillates between the upper (peak) and lower (trough) turning points along a trend line. • The length of the business cycle is measured from peak to peak or from trough to trough. • The entire period from the peak to the trough is known as the downswing. • The entire period from the trough to the peak is known as the upswing. • The period immediately before and through the upper turning point of the cycle is called the boom. • The period immediately before and through the lower turning point is known as the slump. • The trend line is the long-term average position or pattern. 2.2.3 Real (actual) business cycle • An actual business cycle is obtained when the effects of irregular events, seasons and long-term growth trend are removed from the time series data. • Figure 2.2 shows the real GDP of South Africa over a 12 year period displayed in a jagged diagram. © Department of Basic Education 2014 26 CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 2 • The length or duration of the cycle is measured from trough to trough or peak to peak. • The distance of the peaks and troughs from the trend line is known as the amplitude and shows the severity of cyclical fluctuations. P1 105 104 103 b P2 102 101 d Index 100 99 c e a T2 98 T3 97 T1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6Time7 8 9 10 11 12 Figure 2.2 The real business cycle Exogenous includes, amongst many • The percentage point difference of successive peaks and others, the monetarist view. troughs can be calculated e.g. a + b (3 + 5 = 8) compared to b + c Endogenous focuses mainly, but not only, on (5 + 1.5 = 6.5). the Keynesian approach 2.3 Explanations There are numerous theories as to the causes of business cycles. Among these are the monetarist approach and the Keynesian approach. The government uses monetary instruments such as interest rates to mediate these business cycles. 2.3.1 The exogenous explanation Exogenous variables are those independent factors that can influence business cycles and originate outside the economy. Some economists believe that business cycles are caused by exogenous factors such as those described below: • The monetarists believe markets are inherently stable and disequilibrium is caused by incorrect use of policies, e.g monetary policy. • Weather conditions and market shocks cause upswings and downswings. • Governments should not intervene in the market. • Sunspot theory based on the belief that increased solar radiation causes changes in weather conditions. • Technological changes. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING 27

2 Chapter Figure 2.3 is based on the view that economics are generally stable. This is illustrated by the thick trend line representing the normal progress of a growing economy. Movements away from the trend are caused by exogenous factors, for example, inappropriate monetary policy. Real output 0 Time Figure 2.3 Monetarist approach 2.3.2 The endogenous explanation Endogenous variables are dependent variables. This follows the belief that economic growth is primarily the result of endogenous and not external forces. • This is often called the Keynesian view. • The Keynesian approach holds the view that markets are inherently unstable and therefore government intervention may be required. • The price mechanism fails to co-ordinate demand and supply in markets and this gives rise to upswings and downswings. • Prices are not flexible enough (e.g. wages). • A business cycle is an inherent feature of a market economy. • Indirect links or mismatches between demand and supply are normal features of the economy. Figure 2.4 helps to illustrate the Keynesian view of the business cycle. The thick cycle line indicates the endogenous nature of the business cycle, while the thinner trend line shows that the economy is inherently unstable. The argument is that business cycles are a natural part of market economies and can have a major impact on the overall performance of an economy. Real output 0 Time Figure 2.4 Keynesian approach © Department of Basic Education 2014 28 CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 2 2.3.3 Types The business cycle is one kind of cycle found in market economies. Other less obvious kinds occur less regularly: • Kitchen cycles: last between 3 to 5 years caused by adapting inventory levels in businesses. • Jugler cycles: last from 7 to 11 years and are caused by changes in net investments by government and businesses. • Kuznets cycles: last between 15 to 20 years, caused by changes in activity in the building and construction industry. • Kondratieff cycles: last longer than 50 years, caused by technological innovations, wars and discoveries of new deposits of resources e.g. gold. 2.4 Government policy Government can use monetary and/or fiscal instruments to help stabilise business cycles, also called “fine tuning” the economy. 2.4.1 Policy instruments MONETARY POLICY – can be defined as policies used by monetary authorities (SARB and MPC) to change the quantity of money in circulation as well as the interest rates, with the aim to stabilise prices, reach full employment and achieve high economic growth. The size of the M3-money stock is an important determinant of the quantity of money. The following TWO theories explain changes in the quantity of money and its impact on the economy: • The quantity theory of money shows how an increase in the stock of money can lead to an increase in the inflation rate and a decrease in the buying power of money. Quantity theory-equation: MV = PT Where: M = Total stock of money V = Velocity of money P = Prices of goods and services T = Quantity goods and services When the stock of money (M) increases, prices (P) will rise and because production (T) cannot be increased immediately it will lead to INFLATION, assuming velocity (v) remains constant. • The second theory links the change in deposits and the cash reserve requirement. If the amount of new deposits increase, the money multiplier kicks in: Tm = ΔD × 1/rd Where: Tm = Total stock of money at the end of the process ΔD = The initial inflow of new money to the banks/new deposits Rd = Minimum cash reserve percentage kept by banks. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING 29

2 Chapter It can be seen that a relatively small deposit of R1 000 with a relatively small cash reserve requirement of 5% (0,05) may lead to a relatively large increase in the total stock of money. Tm = 1 000 × 1/0,05 = 1 000 × 20 = R20 000 • Keeping the TWO theories in mind, the central bank can use the following instruments separately or jointly from its arsenal of monetary and related policy instruments in a selective or discretionary manner: 1. Open market transactions The SARB can directly increase/decrease the supply of money by buying/selling government securities in the open market. 2. Interest rates If banks experience a shortage of funds in the money market, they are accommodated by the SARB, when they are allowed to borrow money through the Repo system (Repurchase tender system) at a rate known as the repo rate. By increasing this rate, money becomes SARB buys more expensive for commercial banks, who pass on the increase bonds from ABSA to their clients by increasing interest rates on loans. Loans become → more money flows into the more expensive to the consumer and so the demand for money will economy so money supply decrease. increases. 3. Cash reserve requirements SARB sells bonds to ABSA → The SARB is permitted by the Banks Act to occasionally change the money flows out of the economy and money minimum cash balances the banks are required to maintain in order supply decreases. to manipulate the money creation activities of the banks. See the money multiplier equation. Change the 5% to 10% and see what the effect would be on the creation of credit/money in the economy. FISCAL POLICY – Fiscal policy = Is the process of using taxation and public expenditure to even out the swings of the business cycle. Governments, through their fiscal policy have a powerful weapon for stabilising/ironing out/smoothing of cycles, to stop peaks from ending in high inflation and troughs in too high levels of unemployment. While the monetary policy focuses on managing the total money supply, the fiscal policy tries to stimulate or curb the economy, by increasing or decreasing total consumption expenditure. Fiscal policy is dependent on the multiplier effect where a relatively small change in spending will cause a large change in income (GDP). The original equilibrium situation: Accepts that all economic activities are stable and all markets in equilibrium. Assumes the beginning of the following undesired conditions/problems: 1. Total demand is low and unemployment is high. The State can increase total demand by increasing expenditure, the multiplier will kick in. The state has THREE options: • Raising government spending (G) with borrowed money (Budget Deficit). Aggregate expenditure increases and so does demand. The economy is stimulated and employment is likely to increase. • Decreasing taxes. Consumers and producers have a larger part of their incomes available to spend on goods and services. Aggregate expenditure increases. The economy is stimulated © Department of Basic Education 2014 30 CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 2 and employment is likely to increase. • Raising government spending and simultaneously decreasing taxes. This will have a double effect. Government spending increases and consumers and producers also have more to spend. Demand increases substantially. Employment increases. 2. Aggregate demand is too high and leads to demand pull-inflation. The state can decrease spending, decrease aggregate demand, the multiplier will kick in negatively and total spending will decrease. To achieve this, the government has THREE options: • Cut down on government spending (G). The unspent money is preserved. Aggregate expenditure is less and demand drops. Inflation is likely to decrease. • Increasing taxes (T). Workers pay more tax and this results in consumers having less income to spend and demand dropping. Inflation is likely to decrease. • Reducing government spending (G) and simultaneously increasing taxes (T). This will have a double effect. Government spending decreases and consumers and producers also have less to spend. Demand drops substantially. Inflation decreases. A COMBINATION OF MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICY: The strongest effects are obtained when a government uses these policies in combination with one another to manipulate aggregate demand. Restrictive 1. Where demand is too high, restrictive policies can be combined as policies make the follows: economy slow down. Expansionary policies Monetary policy: make the economy go SARB can increase interest rates, increase reserve requirements of faster (grow). banks. plus Fiscal policy: Reduce government spending and increase taxes – budget for a surplus. Doing these things simultaneously triggers negative money multiplier and a negative income multiplier, which doubles the effect of the measures. 2. If aggregate demand is too low, expansionary policies can be combined as follows: Monetary policy: SARB lowers interest rates and cash reserve requirement of banks. plus Fiscal policy: Government decreases taxes and increases spending by budgeting for a deficit. A combination of the above policies will lead to a positive money multiplier and activate a positive income multiplier, which will double the effect of measures. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING 31

2 Chapter • Interest rates I 2.5 The new economic paradigm • Cash reserve The “new economic paradigm” discourages policy makers from using requirements Catch monetary and fiscal policies to fine-tune the economy, but rather • Open market encourages achieving stability through sound long-term policy decisions transactions One relating to demand and supply in an economy. • Moral persuasion More • Exchange rate Elephant 2.5.1 Demand-side policies policy Demand-side policies focus on aggregate demand in the economy. When households, firms and government spend more, demand in the economy increases. This makes the economy grow but can lead to inflation. • Inflation: –– Aggregate demand increases more quickly than aggregate supply and this causes prices to increase. –– If the supply does not react to the increase in demand, prices will increase. –– This will lead to inflation (a sustained and considerable increase in the general price level). • Unemployment: –– Demand-side policies are effective in stimulating economic growth. –– Economic growth can lead to an increase in the demand for labour. As a result more people will be employed and unemployment will decrease. –– As unemployment decreases inflation is likely to increase. This relationship between unemployment and inflation is illustrated using the Phillips curve. 2.5.2 Supply-side policies Supply-side policies include: • Reduction of costs of production –– Infrastructural services –– Administrative costs –– Cash incentives • Improving the efficiency of inputs –– Tax rates –– Capital consumption –– Human resources development –– Free advisory services • Improving the efficiency of markets –– Deregulation –– Competition –– Levelling the playing field © Department of Basic Education 2014 32 CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 2 2.6 Features underpinning forecasting with regard to business cycles There are many economic indicators that can be used to forecast business cycles. Some of these are: 2.6.1 Leading indicators • Leading indicators give consumers, businesses and the state a glimpse of the direction in which the economy might be heading. • When these indicators rise, the level of economic activities will also rise a few months later. • Examples of leading indicators are job advertising space; inventory; and sales. 2.6.2 Co-incident indicators • Co-incident indicators move at the same time as the economy. • They indicate the actual state of the economy. • Examples of these indicators are value of retail sales and real GDP. 2.6.3 Lagging indicators • Lagging indicators won’t change direction until after the business cycle has changed its direction. • Examples of these indicators are hours worked in construction and total of commercial vehicles sold. 2.6.4 Composite indicators • It is a grouping of various indicators of the same type into a single value. • The single figure forms the norm for a country’s economic performance. 2.6.5 Trend • The trend is the general direction of the economy. • The trend line that rises gradually will be positively sloped in the long run. This rising line indicates a growing economy. 2.6.6 Length • Length is measured from peak to peak or from trough to trough. • Longer cycles show strength and shorter cycles show weakness with regard to economic activities. 2.6.7 Amplitude • Amplitude refers to the vertical (height) difference between a trough and the next peak of a cycle. • The larger the amplitude, the more extreme the changes that occur. 2.6.8 Extrapolation • Extrapolation means to estimate something unknown from facts that are known. For example, extrapolations from known facts are used to predict future share prices. 2.6.9 Moving averages • Moving avarages are used to analyse the changes in a series of data over a certain period of time. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING 33

2 Chapter ♫ Leading indicators show us where we’re heading Create Lagging indicators won’t change direction a song to help you Co-incident indicators, moving together remember these seven forecasting features. What’s the trend? Show me the way ♪ Singing the words to a What’s the length? Weak or strong today catchy tune over and over again will help Pump up the amplitude to see the difference you. ♫ I need to extrapolate to make my predictions ♪ Activity 1 Study Figure 2.5 below and answer the questions that follow: K G T Economic activities C L J TC H D F M B I E A 0 Time Figure 2.5 Business cycles 1. Define the term business cycle. (3) 2. Indicate which indicator is represented by T. (2) 3. What is measured by the horizontal axis? (2) 4. At which point did the economy reach a peak and a trough? (4) 5. Identify the four phases into which the business cycle is divided in the above illustration. (8) 6. How is the length measured in the above business cycle? (2) 7. Explain lagging and coincident indicators used in the forecasting of business cycles. (2 × 4) (8) [29] Answers to activity 1 1. Successive periods of growth and decline in economic activities333(3) 2. Trend line33(2) 3. Time33(2) 4. Peak – C33 Trough – E33(4) © Department of Basic Education 2014 34 CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 2 Answers to activity 1 (continued) 5. BC – Prosperity33 CD – Recession33 DE – Depression33 EF – Recovery33(8) 6. From C to G 33 or E to I 33(2) 7. Lagging indicators These do not change direction until after the business cycle has changed its direction. 33 E.g. hours worked in construction; total number of commercial vehicles sold.33 Co-incident indicators These move at the same time as the economy 33 They indicate the actual state of the economy.33 E.g. value of retail sales; real GDP (8) [29] Activity 2 Study the cartoon below and answer the questions that follow: Source: Mail & Guardian, 2010 1. What is the message behind the cartoon? (2) 2. Why do you think that unemployment will not lead to an economic lift off? (2) 3. To which forecasting indicator does unemployment refer? (2) 4. How would you describe the recovery phase of a typical business cycle?(2) [8] © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING 35

2 Chapter Answers to activity 2 1. Illustrate the business cycle struggling to recover due to the burden of unemployment33(2) 2. Due to a high percentage of unemployed people in South Africa33(2) 3. Co-incident33(2) 4. Economic activities start to increase33 OR Exports will start to increase, resulting in an increase in production33(2) [8] Activity 3 Discuss the monetarist approach as a cause of business cycles. [8] Answers to activity 3 • Exogenous approach 33 • Believe markets are inherently stable.33 • Departures from the equilibrium state are caused by factors outside of the market system.3 • Market forces (supply and demand) kick in and bring the economy back to its natural state or equilibrium route.33 • These interferences are not part of the normal forces operating in the market. 33 • Governments should not interfere in the markets. 33 • Major cause of economic fluctuations are inappropriate government policies 3 undesirable increases and decreases in money supply 3 (maximum 4 marks for examples) [8] Activity 4 Discuss the trend line in the forecasting of business cycles. [8] Answers to activity 4 • The trend line represents the average position of a cycle. 33 • It indicates the general direction in which the economy is moving. 33 • An upward trend suggests that the economy is growing. 33 • The trend line usually has a positive slope, because production capacity increases over time. 33 • Diagram showing trend line (see Figure 2.1 on page 26 for an example) .33 • Accept any other relevant facts 33 (any 4 × 2) [8] Keep going! © Department of Basic Education 2014 36 CHAPTER 2 BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 3 The role of the public sector The public sector, also known as the state or government, is responsible for providing certain goods and services to citizens. It also determines the policy regarding these goods and services at national, regional and local levels. The public sector is also involved in the delivery of social security, public facilities and policing. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR 37

3 Chapter Overview TOPIC CONTENT CONTENT DETAILS FOR TEACHING, LEARNING AND ASSESSMENT PURPOSES 3. Evaluate the role of the public sector in the Public economy with special reference to its socio- sector economic responsibility in the South African context • Briefly describe the composition of the • The composition and necessity of the public public sector sector –– Composition HOT QUESTION: Illustrate the composition –– Necessity of the public sector by means of a –– To supply public goods diagram –– To conserve resources –– To manage the economy • Briefly discuss the necessity for the public sector • Problems of public sector provisioning –– Accountability HOT QUESTION: Assess the effectiveness of the public sector in supplying public –– Efficiency goods –– Assessing needs –– Pricing policy • Discuss in detail the problems of public –– Parastatals sector provisioning (clearly show why –– Privatisation/Nationalisation each of these factors contributes to poor public sector provisioning) • Objectives of the public sector and its budgets • Discuss in detail the main objectives of the public sector in the economy –– Objectives –– Economic growth –– Full employment –– Exchange rate stability –– Price stability –– Economic equity –– Budgets • Supply a broad outline of the various –– Medium Term Expenditure Framework budgets (MTEF and MTBPS) • Evaluate each budget within a South –– The national (main), provincial and municipal African context budgets • Analyse budget data • Fiscal policy (including the Laffer curve) HOT QUESTION: Identify and explain –– Features of Fiscal Policy how social rights are embedded in the –– Goal bound budgets of the South African government –– Demand based –– Cyclical • Briefly discuss the features of fiscal –– Composition of Fiscal Policy Policy –– Government expenditure • Propose five major purposes of Fiscal –– Taxation Policy –– Borrowing (State’s debt) • Briefly discuss the composition of the Fiscal Policy © Department of Basic Education 2014 38 CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 3 –– Effects of Fiscal Policy • Discuss in detail the effects of Fiscal –– Income distribution Policy –– Consumption • Analyse/evaluate the effects within a South-African context –– Price level • Draw and interpret the Laffer-Curve –– Incentives/Disincentives : –– The Laffer Curve –– Discretion • Reasons for Public Sector failure • Briefly discuss the characteristics/ –– Characteristics/features features of Public Sector failure –– Ineffective –– Inefficiency –– Reasons for Public Sector failure • Discuss the reasons for public sector –– Management failure failure in detail –– Apathy • Write a proposal as to how the South –– Lack of motivation African Government can avoid Public –– Bureaucracy Sector failure –– Politicians –– Structural weaknesses –– Special interest groups –– Effects of Public Sector failure • Give a broad outline of the effects of Public Sector failure –– Allocation of resources –– Economic instability –– Distribution of income –– Social instability Infuse where appropriate: national macro-economic policy and service delivery with regard to socio- economic rights, education, health, and the environment, and social security, convention of the rights of the child, taxation, and compensation for human rights abuses. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR 39

3 Chapter 3.1 Key concepts These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key Economics Make mobile concepts that are used in this study guide. notes to learn these terms and definitions. Term Definition Instructions for how to make mobile notes The budget A document that details expected revenue and are on page xiv. projected expenditure Bureaucrat An official in a government department Central national Concerned with national issues, e.g. safety and government security Collective goods Goods provided for society as a whole. E.g. parks and public utilities. Provision of these goods gives rise to the free rider problem Community goods E.g. police stations. Everyone can use these whether they are prepared to pay for them or not Demerit goods Harmful goods, e.g. cigarettes Deregulation Removal of unnecessary restrictions by law Direct taxes Taxes that are not shifted to the end user, e.g. PAYE Indirect taxes Taxes levied on the sale of goods and services Local government Deals with local issues within a town or municipal area Merit goods Goods and services whose provision has benefits for the user (private) and for society, e.g. education Monetary Policy Decides on the country’s monetary policy Committee (of the Reserve Bank) (MPC) Medium Term Budget Government’s statement setting out its three-year Policy Statement budget (MTBPS) Medium Term Estimates income and expenditure for a three-year Expenditure Framework period (MTEF) Nationalisation Transfer of functions and ownership of entities from the private sector to the public sector Public goods and Provided by the state for use by all the members of services a society, e.g. public libraries Regional government Deals with economic and other issues specific to a region/province Regulation Putting laws in place to regulate activities State Owned Enterprises A business owned wholly or partly by the state and (SOE) run by a public authority, e.g Eskom and SAA Value Added Tax (VAT) An indirect tax on goods and services consumed in the economy © Department of Basic Education 2014 40 CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 3 3.2 Composition and neccessity 3.2.1 Composition • National/central government Concerned with national issues e.g. health, defence, education safety and security. Also includes non-profit organisations, e.g. SABS and CSIR. • Provincial/regional government Concerned with the administration of the nine provinces and economic issues specific to the region. • Local government Concerned with local issues within a town for municipal area. E.g. electricity delivery, libraries, traffic control and refuse removal. • Public corporations State-owned enterprises (SOEs) that provide public goods and services, such as Eskom, Transnet and SABS. 3.2.2 Necessity of the public sector • To provide public goods Goods and services provided by the state for use by all the members of society. Three groups can be distinguished: –– Community goods Goods of which there is a complete supply or none, e.g. defence, police. –– Collective goods Differ from community goods as fees, charges or tolls can be levied to exclude free-riders, e.g. beaches, drainage, parks. –– Merit goods Goods provided by the state, because it is believed that they would be under-supplied if their provision was left entirely to market forces. E.g. education, health care, research. • To conserve resources –– Government has to intervene to protect the environment if the environment is exposed to insensitive and even carless use it may be damaged. –– E.g. the oceans for fishing, the air we breathe; natural scenery. • To intervene in the economy –– Ensures a social and legislative environment. –– Apply suitable and credible economic and development policies. –– Promote policies that ensure equal opportunity for all members of society. –– Limit anti-competitive behaviour. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR 41

3 Chapter A mnemonic can 3.3 Problems of public sector help you remember these problems: provisioning Learn these six problems of public sector provisioning: 3.3.1 Accountability • Government is required to make and implement policies. Accountability is underpinned by ministerial responsibilities, parliamentary questioning, treasury control and the Auditor-general. • Public servants are required to give an explanation of their decisions and actions. • The public holds government accountable for the effective delivery of services and the implementation of policies. 3.3.2 Efficiency • Efficient provisioning: Public servants provide the public with goods and services promptly and in the desired quantity and quality. • Inefficient provisioning: Public servants fail to deliver services to the public because of bureaucracy, incompetence and corruption. 3.3.3 Assessing of needs • Government provides goods and services according to the needs of people. Assessing these needs is difficult. • Market forces determine the price of goods and services in the private sector. • State enterprises are not subjected to the forces of demand and supply. Accountability Always 3.3.4 Pricing policy Efficiency Eat • Free of charge: Certain services are provided free of charge from taxes, Assessing of needs Apples e.g. public health services. (Tax revenue is used to cover the costs.) Pricing policy Pears • Price value: It is difficult for government to establish the correct pricing. Parastatals Peaches • Paid services: People pay for some services, e.g. TV licences. Privatisation Pineapples • Subsidised products: The public pay less for goods because government subsidises (pays towards) the cost, e.g. the price of bread is subsidised by government. 3.3.5 Parastatals • State Owned Enterprises (SOEs) can be created as a result of nationalisation. • Service provisioning: SOEs support service delivery, e.g. Eskom, SABC and Transnet. Can lead to monopolies, high prices and inefficiency. • Infrastructure provisioning: SOEs provide essential infrastructure, especially when there are insufficient funds in the private sector, e.g. the road network. • Limited liability: SOEs have limited liability in South Africa because they are financially supported by government. © Department of Basic Education 2014 42 CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 3 3.3.6 Privatisation/Nationalisation • Privatisation refers to the transfer of functions and ownership from the public to the private sector. • The aim of privatisation is to reduce the relative size of the public sector. • Advantages of privatisation: –– Privatisation stimulates growth and improves the overall efficiency and performance of the economy. –– Privatisation provides additional funds to the government. –– Privatisation attracts foreign investment. • Nationalisation is the opposite of privatisation. –– It is the process whereby the state takes control and ownership of privately-owned assets and private enterprises. –– Some argue that the state-owned enterprises e.g. ESKOM should be privatised. 3.4 Objectives of the public sector and its budgets 3.4.1 Objectives Economic growth • Refers to an increase in the production of goods and services. • Measured in terms of Real GDP. • For economic growth to occur, the Economic growth rate must be higher than Population growth. • Growth and development in a country benefits its citizens because it often leads to a higher standard of living. Full employment • It is when all the people who want to work, who are looking for work must be able to get work. • A high level of employment is the most important economic objective of the government. • The unemployment rate increased over the past few years. • Informal sector activities must be promoted because it is an area where employment increases. • GEAR as a strategy was implemented to create a positive climate that was conducive to employment creation by the private sector. Exchange rate stability • Effective Fiscal and Monetary policy can be used to keep the exchange rate relatively stable. • Depreciation and appreciation of the currency creates uncertainties for producers and traders and should be limited. • The SARB changed the Exchange rate from a Managed floating to a Free floating exchange rate. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR 43

3 Chapter Price stability • Stable prices lead to better results in terms of job creation and economic growth. • The SARB inflation target is 3% – 6% and have been successful in keeping inflation within this target. • Interest Rates, based on the Repo Rate are the main instruments used to achieve price stability. • A stable budget deficit also has a stabilizing effect on the inflation rate. Economic equity • Redistribution of income and wealth is essential. • South Africa uses a progressive income tax system – taxation on profits, taxation on wealth, capital gains tax and taxation on spending, are used to finance free services. • Free social services are basic education; primary health and to finance basic economic services. E.g. Cash Grant to the poor, e.g. child grants and cash grants to vulnerable people, e.g. disability grants. • Progressive taxation means that the higher income earners pay higher/more tax. 3.4.2 Budgets Definition • It is a document with expected income and projected expenditure. • The budget is the most important item on the economic calendar. • The main budget is read in Parliament during February by the Minister of Finance. • It is authorised in Parliament and signed by the President, and it becomes law. • The financial year of the government runs from 1 April to 31 March the following year. • The main source of income for the State is Revenue Tax. Different types of budgets • Medium Term Expenditure Framework (MTEF) • The Minister of Finance delivers it in the last week of October. • The Medium Term Budget Policy Statement (MTBPS) – the Minister of Finance informs Parliament of any changes that have occurred since February. • The Medium Term Expenditure framework (MTEF) requires that the state sets budgets over a three-year period, consisting of rolling expenditure and revenue projections. • This is set against the backdrop of economic and fiscal goals and prospects for the economy. © Department of Basic Education 2014 44 CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 3 The Main (national) Budget • Is the statement of government’s planned expenditure and anticipated income for the fiscal year. • Minister of Finance finalises the budget. • There are three considerations when setting up the budget: –– Financial – Cabinet decides whether taxes have to be increased or decreased. –– Economic – Cabinet must know the needs or requirements in the economy. –– Political – Political parties use the budget to implement their policy. The Provincial Budget • They are the main beneficiaries from tax income collected by the government. • Money paid to Provinces is based on equitable share and conditional grants. • Each province set up its own budget and presents it to the provincial legislator. • Financial year of provinces runs from 1 April – 31 March the following year. • Equitable share formula is used to distribute revenue to the provinces: –– Education (51%) – based on size of the school age population and the number of learners enrolled for the last 3 years. –– Health (19%) – based on the portion of population who do not have access to basic medical services. –– Basic Share (15%) based on each province’s share of total population of the country. –– Institutional component (5%) – divided equally amongst provinces. –– Poverty component (3%) – based on the number of people who are poor in the province. –– Economic output component (1%) – determined by the Province’s contribution to GDP of the country. • Provinces may levy taxes, duties, grants, fines and surcharges. • Conditional grants: these are given to the provinces to promote national priority spending and to assist them in complying with national norms and standards. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR 45

3 Chapter 3.5 Fiscal policy Fiscal policy can be defined as the action taken by government in respect of taxation, government spending and borrowing in order to influence economic activity. 3.5.1 Features • Goal bound –– Central government determines economic and social goals during the budgetary process. –– The budget is used to realise these economic and social goals. • Demand biased –– Fiscal policy is the main demand-side policy. –– The government improves infrastructure to support fiscal policy. • Cyclical –– Business cycles have an effect on fiscal policy decisions. –– During an upswing profits increase, and as a result government income increases. 3.5.2 Composition • Instruments of fiscal policy are taxation and government spending • When Income and expenditure are equal = a balanced budget • When Income is more than expenditure there will be a budget surplus • When expenditure is more than income there will be a budget deficit Expenditure Government spending is classified in 2 main ways: • Functional classification: Social; Protection; Economic; Interest; General. • Economic classification: Current payments; Transfers and subsidies; Payment for capital assets. Government spends money to provide public and merit goods and services free of charge or at a subsidised price. • To pay interest on government debt. • To redistribute income. • To influence aggregate demand and supply. Taxation Government imposes tax for the following reasons: • To raise income to cover expenditure • To discourage the use of demerit goods • To convert external cost into private cost • To discourage imports • To redistribute income • To influence the level of aggregate demand and aggregate supply Borrowing (State debt) • The main budget must always balance. If there is a deficit, loans are made to balance it. • If there is a surplus, the money is used to pay off state debt. • Loans add to loan debt, also known as public debt. © Department of Basic Education 2014 46 CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 3 3.5.3 Effects • Income distribution –– Progressive tax system: Fiscal policy aims to achieve a more even distribution of income. –– Regressive tax system: Fiscal policy causes an uneven distribution of income. –– Proportional tax system: Fiscal policy uses this when it does not wish to disturb the existing distribution of income. • Consumption –– Direct and indirect taxes influence people’s disposable income and spending patterns. –– An increase in taxes will cause spending to decrease especially when savings are low. • Price level –– Direct tax reduces inflationary pressure. –– A rise in indirect taxes will raise the general price level. • Disincentives/incentives –– High and progressive income tax rates discourage people from entering the labour market, from accepting promotions, and from working longer hours. Laffer Curve Figure 3.1 shows the relationship between tax rates and income tax in what is called the Laffer Curve. Tax revenue R B R1 A C 0 T2 T T1 100% Tax rate Figure 3.1 The Laffer Curve The Laffer Curve shows the relationship between (income) tax rates and tax revenue. • At point 0, average tax rate is 0 and tax revenue is 0. • As the tax rate increases, the tax revenue will also increase up to a certain point. The curve will slope upward then peak at T. • Maximum tax revenue is at point R (the peak) and the best tax rate is at point T. • The state earns maximum revenue at point B. • If the tax rate increases from T to T1 then the tax revenue will decrease from R to R1. • People work less as a result of the higher tax rate. • If taxation decreases to T2, the government may receive less revenue, but people may have more money to save and spend. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR 47

3 Chapter Discretion The Minister of Finance use his discretion on fiscal decisions e.g. how much to reduce income tax. Rules are: • deficit rule: not to exceed 3% of GDP • borrowing rule: only for capital expenditure • debt rule: not to exceed 60% of nominal GDP. 3.6 Public sector failure 3.6.1 Characteristics/features Ineffectiveness • Public sector is failing when the following are prevalent: –– Missing targets, example regarding inflation, growth and employment. –– Incompetence in using monetary and fiscal policy and harmonising them. Inefficiencies • Wasting resources, such as taxpayers’ money. • These may occur in relation to protection and social, economic and administrative services for which money is voted in the budget. 3.6.2 Reasons Public sector failure occurs when the public sector fails to provide goods and services to the people. There are many reasons for public sector failure. Some of these are: Management failure Ignorance, e.g. lack of leadership, experience and training, might result in the improvement of the welfare of someone at the expense of someone else. Apathy Government officials show little or no interest in delivering an efficient service to the public. There is no accountability. Corruption and poor service delivery are some of the symptoms of apathy. Lack of motivation Workers rarely receive incentives for successful service delivery, but are only monitored on inputs and correctly following procedures and processes. This might lead to limited services, high cost and low quality. Bureaucracy Bureaucrats tend to obey rules and regulations without judgement. They tend to be more interested in obeying the rules than the efficient delivery of goods and services to the people. Structural weaknesses Objectives are not met. Some objectives may work against each other, e.g. government redistributes income and wealth too aggressively. © Department of Basic Education 2014 48 CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 3 Special interest groups Attempts by interest groups such as farmers or organised labour to influence government to their own advantage. 3.6.3 Effects Allocation of resources When the government fails an optimal allocation of resources is not achieved and consequently resources are wasted. Economic instability Government failure can lead to macroeconomic instability. Government is unable to use fiscal policy effectively. Distribution of income If government fails to use the tax system effectively then there will be an unfair distribution of income in the economy. Social instability When the public sector fails to deliver the required social services to the poor, the economy can be destabilised. Activity 1 Figure 3.2 below is a news article on the National Budget 2012. Study the information and answer the questions that follow. HOW MUCH IS GOING TO BE SPENT? Housing and community amenities 250,000 200,000 Public order and safety 150,000 Economic affairs Social protection 100,000 R41.6 BN R145.0 BN R121.9 BN R207.3 BN R98.0 BN R120.1 BN R157.9 BN R166.6 BN 50,000 Defence Health Education Other IMPROVING THE QUALITY OF LIFE FOR ALL SOUTH AFRICANS Over the long term, government aims to grow 16.1 million in 2012/13 and is set to rise the economy so that all South Africans who to 16.8 million in 2014/15. wish to work can work. But given our history, The Isibindi project will benefit 858 000 it will take some time before we can reach children and adolescents, with a focus this goal. and we urgently need to assist on rural communities, orphans and millions of South Africans who do not have child-headed households. About 10 000 access to an income, or who are otherwise youth workers will be employed in this vulnerable. programme. Poverty alleviation is at the heart of The Department of Social Development government’s agenda. The social assistance receives an additional R1.4 billion over the programme is South Africa’s most direct next three years, mainly to increase access means of combating poverty. In 2012/13, to early child development from 50 000 to R104.9 billion is allocated to social 580 000 and to roll out an in-house and assistance, rising to R122.0 billion in community-based childcare and protection 2014/15. The number of grant recipients will programme (Isibindi). rise from about 15.6 million in 2011/12 to Figure 3.2: A news article on the National Budget 2012 © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR 49

3 Chapter 1. To which economic concept does “Improving the quality of life…” refer to? (2) 2. From the extract, name TWO macroeconomic aims (objectives) reflected in the 2011/12 Budget. (2 × 2) (4) 3. Which THREE departments received the largest allocation according to the graph? (3 × 2) (6) 4. Give TWO reasons why government spent more on education in 2012 than last year. (4) 5. Name TWO priorities that are included in the money allocated for social protection. (2 × 2) (4) [20] Answers to activity 1 1. Economic development33 2. Job creation33 and economic growth33 3. Education33 Social protection33 Administration33 4. Infrastructure development33 and increase in educators’ salaries33 5. Poverty relief33 and skills development for orphans33 [20] Activity 2 Classify each of the following activities according to CENTRAL/NATIONAL; PROVINCIAL; LOCAL GOVERNMENT and PUBLIC CORPORATIONS. 1. Traffic control (1) 2. Denel(1) 3. SABS(1) 4. Inflation target (1) 5. Telkom(1) 6. RDP housing (1) 7. Education(1) [7] Answers to activity 2 1. Traffic control – Local3 2. Denel – Public corporation3 3. SABS – Public corporation3 4. Inflation target – Central/National3 5. Telkom – Public3 6. RDP housing – Provincial3 7. Education – Central/National33 [7] Keep going! © Department of Basic Education 2014 50 CHAPTER 3 THE ROLE OF THE PUBLIC SECTOR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 4 The foreign exchange market and the balance of payments accounts The foreign exchange market (currency market) is an exchange market which determines the relative values of different currencies, and enables the conversion of currency to facilitate international trade. The balance of payments (BoP) accounts record all financial transactions between a country and the rest of the world over a period of a year. They include export and import transactions, financial transfers and financial capital transactions. © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics AND THE BALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS 51

4 Chapter Overview TOPIC CONTENT CONTENT DETAILS FOR TEACHING, LEARNING AND ASSESSMENT PURPOSES 4. Examine the foreign exchange market Economic and the establishment of exchange rates growth and and show how the balance of payments develop- account is affected ment: Foreign • The main reasons for international trade • Give a brief discussion on the main reasons for exchange –– Demand reasons international trade market • Distinguish between the demand and supply –– Size of population (Globali- reasons sation) –– Income levels –– Change in the wealth of the population • Briefly discuss the effects of international –– Preferences and taste trade –– The difference in consumption • Give your opinion on the effects of patterns international trade –– Supply reasons –– Natural resources –– Climatic conditions –– Labour resources –– Technological resources –– Specialisation –– Capital –– The effects of international trade • Define the BoP –– Specialisation • Explain the purpose/value of the BoP –– Mass production • Analyse and interpret the BoP –– Efficiency • Give a brief overview of the subaccounts of the –– Globalisation BoP • The balance of payments HOT QUESTION: ‘It is often said that a BoP shows –– Description/definition if a country is living within its means’. Evaluate this statement with regard to each section in the –– The value of the BoP BoP –– Composition of the BoP –– The current account –– The capital transfer account –– The financial account –– The reserve account • Foreign exchange markets • Define/Explain/Compare the relevant concepts –– Description/definition • Draw/interpret graphs –– Supply and demand/Price formation • Briefly discuss the demand and supply factors –– Appreciation and depreciation • Briefly discuss market intervention –– Revaluation and devaluation –– Interventions in the market HOT QUESTION: Draw a fully labelled graph that illustrates equilibrium in the foreign exchange market and predict the effects that changes in the underlying forces of supply and demand will have on the value of a currency CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET © Department of Basic Education 2014 52 AND THE B ALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 4 • The establishment of foreign exchange • Define and explain the relevant concepts rates • Briefly discuss each exchange rate system –– Exchange rate systems • Briefly explain the concept terms of trade –– Free floating exchange rate system • Broadly outline the concepts free trade and –– Managed floating exchange rate protectionism system • Broadly outline, analyse and interpret data –– Fixed exchange rate system on the composition of SA trade and trading –– Terms of trade partners –– Free trade and protection • Evaluate South Africa’s exchange rate system –– South Africa’s foreign trade • Assess South Africa’s foreign trade in relation to its terms of trade, free trade and protection • Corrections of BOP surplus and deficit (disequilibria) • Explain the concepts: corrections and deficit/ disequilibria –– Description/definition • Briefly discuss the different measures –– Interest rates –– Import controls HOT QUESTION: ‘South Africa’s BoP shows an –– Borrowing and lending overall deficit of R10 billion rand over three –– Change in demand successive quarters this year.’ Assume the –– Export promotion biggest problem appears to be the current –– Import substitution account. How would you advice the Governor of the Reserve Bank to reduce the deficit on the –– Change in exchange rates BoP? © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics AND THE BALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS 53

4 Chapter Make mobile 4.1 Key concepts notes to learn these terms and definitions. Instructions These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key Economics on how to make mobile notes concepts that are used in this study guide. Understand these concepts are on page xiv in the well. introduction. Term Definition Absolute Where one country can produce goods or services advantage cheaper than another Balance of A systematic record of all transactions between one payments country and other countries, e.g. between South Africa and all other countries in the world Comparative A situation where one country has a relative advantage advantage in the production of goods or services Direct investment Includes transactions relating to investment, e.g. investments in businesses Exchange rate The rate at which one currency is exchanged for another. It is also considered the value of one country’s currency in terms of another country’s currency Free trade When consumers and producers are free to buy goods and services anywhere in the world without any restrictions International An international organisation that lends money to Monetary Fund countries with ongoing balance of payment problems (IMF) International trade The exchange of goods or services across international borders Net balance Money that enters the country is offset against money that leaves the country Portfolio Buying and selling equities and debt securities, investment e.g. shares and bonds Special Drawing A financing instrument distributed among member Rights (SDR) countries of the IMF Terms of trade Compares a country’s export prices with its import prices by means of indexes. The formula used to determine the terms of trade is: Index of export prices × 100 Index of import prices The terms of trade will improve when export prices increase of import prices decrease Trade balance The value of exports minus imports Transfer payment Money received without any productive service rendered, e.g. gifts CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET © Department of Basic Education 2014 54 AND THE B ALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 4 4.2 The reasons for international trade There are many reasons for international trade. Countries may have a PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION surplus of some goods and a shortage of other goods, and they will trade NB in order to correct these imbalances. For example, South Africa has more minerals than it can use, but less oil than it needs. Certain goods are only produced in specific countries (e.g. French champagne) and the citizens of Learn these five demand other countries may desire access to those goods. Droughts can severely reasons for international HINT! damage the production of staple crops in a country resulting in the need trade. to import crops to feed the population. hint Use the following word mnemonic to 4.2.1 Demand reasons help you remember the 5 demand reasons: • The size of the population impacts demand. If there is an increase e.g. P = Population EG - worked examples → People in population growth, it causes an increase in demand, as more I = Income → In people’s needs must be satisfied. Local suppliers may not be able to W = Wealth → Witbank satisfy this demand. P = Preferences → Prefer exams → Coffee C = Consumption • The population’s income levels effect demand. Changes in income cause a change in the demand for goods and services. An increase in the per capita income of people results in more disposable income that can be spent on local goods and services, some of which may then have to be imported. • An increase in the wealth of the population leads to greater demand for goods. People have access to loans and can spend more on activity luxury goods, many of which are produced in other countries. ACTIVITIE and girl-l • Preferences and tastes can play a part in the determining of prices, right of p e.g. customers in Australia have a preference for a specific product which they do not produce and need to import, and it will have a activity higher value than in other countries. • The difference in consumption patterns is determined by the level of economic development in the country, e.g. a poorly developed country will have a high demand for basic goods and services but a Step by step com lower demand for luxury goods. 4.2.2 Supply reasons NB PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION NB • Natural resources are not evenly distributed across all countries of the world. They vary from country to country and can only be Learn these six supply exploited in places where these resources exist. reasons for international • Climatic conditions make it possible for some countriesHINT!to produce trade. certain goods at a lower price than otherhint countries, e.g. Brazil is the biggest producer of coffee. • Labour resources differ in quality, quantity and cost between Use this word mnemonic to help you countries. Some countries have highly skilled, well-paid workers with remember the 6 supply reasons: high productivity levels, e.g. Switzerland. e.g. EG - worked examples R = Resources → Rich • Technological resources are available in some countries that C = Climate → Countries enable them to produce certain goods and services at a low unit L = Labour → Like cost, e.g. Japan. T = Technology → To • exams Specialisation in the production of certain goods and services S = Specialisation → Send allows some countries to produce them at a lower cost than C = Capital → Chocolate others, e.g. Japan produces electronic goods and sells these at a lower price. activity © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN ACTIVITIES boy EXCHANGE MARKET Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics AND THE BALANCEand girl-left and OF PAYMENTS right of page ACCOUNTS 55

4 Chapter • Capital allows developed countries to enjoy an advantage over under- developed countries. Due to a lack of capital, some countries cannot produce all the goods they require themselves. 4.2.3 The effects of international trade Specialisation increases the standard of living, especially when • the area of specialisation is in great demand due to a shortage of supply, e.g. Angola has oil so it can specialise in oil products. Mozambique has no oil resources and cannot specialise in these resources. • Mass production becomes possible if the domestic demand is added PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION NB to foreign demand, NB e.g. manufacturing of cell phones. • Efficiency increases when there is competition. Lower prices means that the same income can buy more goods and services. Learn these four effects of • Globalisation is driven by international trade, e.g. trade in IT international trade. products and vehicles (cars and trucks). HINT! hint Use this word mnemonic to help you remember the 4.3 The balance of payments 4 effects of international trade: e.g. S = Specialisation → Selling accounts EG - worked examples P = Production → Products E = Efficiency → Equals 4.3.1 Definition G = Globalisation → Growth A systematic record of all transactions between one country and other exams countries, e.g. between South Africa and all other countries in the world. 4.3.2 The value of the balance of payments Each country keeps a record of all its international transactions with the rest of the world. A country is said to have a BoP surplus when inflows are greater than outflows. An example of a BoP surplus on the current account NB activity AL ATTENTION would be when exports are greater than imports. A BoP deficit occurs when outflows are ACTIVITIES boy greater than inflows (imports are greater than exports). and girl-left and right of page Learn these four balance of 4.3.3 Composition activity payments accounts. The current account The current account is the account in the BoP that records international transactions relating to production, income and expenditure. Step by step In calculating comment comment the balance on the current account, 5 groups of items are ed examples taken into account. They are merchandise (goods), gold, services, income and current transfers. The capital transfer account The balance shown reflects the net amount of the capital transfer, either negative or positive. The balance is a net amount and includes firstly transactions and grants relating to the ownership of fixed assets, for example a grant by a foreign NGO for a housing project in South Africa, secondly, debt forgiveness, thirdly, the value of households and personal effects, and financial claims and liabilities of migrants. ACTIVITIES boy and girl-left and right of page CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET © Department of Basic Education 2014 56 AND THE B ALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 4 The financial account The financial account shows records of investments by South Africans in other countries and by foreigners in South Africa. These investments will include: • Direct investments: Foreign direct investment (FDI) refers to investment in real estate (fixed property) and obtaining a meaningful share (10%+) or control of such business. E.g. USA Walmart’s takeover of the local chain Massmart was a foreign direct investment of US$2.2 billion. • Portfolio investments: Refers to the buying of financial assets such as shares in companies on the stock exchange of another country. These investments are highly liquid and their flows can be reversed at any time. Portfolio investment money is also known as ‘hot money’. • Other investments: Other investments are a residual category. Transactions that cannot be classified as direct investments, portfolio investments or reserve assets and liabilities are classified as other investments. Refers to other financial transactions not covered by FDI. Short term investment that flows in and out of a country, trade credits and short term loans. The reserve account The reserve account records changes to the amount of gold and foreign exchange reserves (Dollars, Pounds, Euros) held by the country. These changes are a reflection of the international transactions recorded in all the other accounts on the BoP. South Africa’s total gold and foreign exchange reserves are a stock item and are not shown in the reserve account. Only the changes to the gold and foreign reserves are shown. Table 4.1 shows the latest available balance of payments from the Quarterly Bulletin from the South African Reserve Bank. You should be able to make certain assumptions from the data given, for example: • Determine whether there was a surplus or deficit in one of the accounts. • Identify possible reasons for funds flowing out of or into the country. © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics AND THE BALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS 57

4 Chapter South African Reserve bank: Balance of payment, annual figures in R millions 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 Current account Merchandise exports, free on board2..................... (5000J) 281 827 331 338 412 220 497 618 655 759 503 656 565 860 671 220 696 180 3 Net gold exports ................................................. (5001J) 28 698 27 023 35 470 39 898 48 534 52 776 59 499 75 298 71 050 Service receipts .................................................... (5002J) 63 425 71 808 82 643 97 110 105 351 100 760 102 362 107 825 124 332 Income receipts ..................................................... (5680J) 20 973 29 550 41 207 48 448 48 254 34 075 34 099 38 118 48 501 Less: Merchandise imports, free on board ........... (5003J) 311 759 360 362 476 966 2 573 850 739 852 554 161 598 151 730 128 842 775 Less: Payments for services .................................. (5004J) 66 420 77 197 96 623 115 934 138 885 124 147 134 843 142 230 145 006 Less: Income payments ........................................ (5681J) 48 823 60 975 75 982 117 266 122 129 87 593 87 022 104 689 118 508 Current transfers (net receipts +) .......................... (5006J) –10 869 –15 680 –15 768 –16 575 –18 906 –22 428 –16 762 –14 199 –31 369 Balance on current account........................................(5007J) –42 948 –54 495 –93 799 –140 551 –161 874 –97 062 –74 958 –98 785 –197 595 Capital transfer account (net receipts +) . .............. (5682J) 338 193 205 197 208 216 225 241 239 Financial account4 Direct investment Liabilities5............................................................... (5640J) 5 155 42 270 –3 567 40 120 74 403 45 465 8 993 30 808 37 540 Assets .................................................................... (5656J) 6 –8 721 –5 916 –41 058 –20 896 25 888 –9 757 554 1 865 –35 867 Net direct investment ............................................ (5683J) –3 566 36 354 –44 625 19 224 100 291 35 708 9 547 32 673 1 673 Portfolio investment Liabilities ................................................................(5644J) 46 262 36 188 144 501 97 485 –71 540 107 234 107 876 45 878 94 655 Assets ..................................................................... (5660J) –5 946 –6 123 –15 044 –24 026 –63 325 –13 470 –33 374 –62 223 –40 002 Net portfolio investment ........................................ (5684J) 40 316 30 065 129 457 73 459 –134 865 93 764 74 502 –16 345 54 653 Other investment Liabilities ...................................................................... (5650J) 10 944 32 735 60 750 58 711 47 730 –39 956 65 736 43 005 65 736 Assets ........................................................................... (5666J) –3 555 –22 895 –38 823 2 119 82 983 23 703 –22 138 –13 444 40 368 Net other investment . .................................................. (5685J) 7 389 9 840 21 927 60 830 130 713 –16 253 –14 239 29 561 106 104 Balance on financial account . ................................. (5688J) 44 139 76 259 106 759 153 513 96 139 113 219 69 810 45 889 162 430 Unrecorded transactions7............................................ (5686J) 35 999 12 306 16 627 34 657 91 593 664 36 229 85 359 43 881 Change in net gold and other foreign reserves owing to balance-of-payments transactions............ (5020J) 37 528 34 263 29 792 47 816 26 066 17 037 31 306 32 704 8 955 Change in liabilities related to reserves8...................... (5021J) 2 949 2 577 –5 453 –7 631 –7 761 –2 724 –2 683 7 16 SDR allocations and valuation adjustments. ................ (5022J) –10 617 11 003 23 350 5 642 74 214 –38 647 –30 712 74 441 24 141 Net monetisation(+)/demonetisation(–) of gold .......... (5283J) 84 –226 163 169 158 45 13 42 11 Change in gross gold and other foreign reserves .. (5023J) 29 944 47 617 47 852 45 996 92 677 –24 289 –2 076 107 194 33 123 Memo item: Change in capital transfer and financial accounts including unrecorded transactions ............. (5687J) 80 476 88 758 123 591 188 367 187 940 114 099 106 264 131 489 206 550 Table 4.1 Balance of payments Quarterly Bulletin September 2013 CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET © Department of Basic Education 2014 58 AND THE B ALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 4 4.4 Foreign exchange markets A foreign exchange rate is the price of one country’s currency in terms of another. It is expressed (quoted) as the domestic price of one unit of a foreign currency, for example, $1=R10.00. In South Africa, the forex market is known as the interbank foreign exchange market. It does not have a physical location or corporate form, such as the Johannesburg Stock Exchange (JSE). It is a worldwide practice, transactions are done electronically by computers, in writing by e-mail, fax or letter or by phone. 4.4.1 Definition: Foreign exchange markets A foreign exchange market is a market engaged in the buying and selling of foreign exchange. The leading markets are in London, New York and Tokyo. 4.4.2 Supply and demand D S Rand per Dollar Excess supply P Excess demand 0 Q Quantity of dollars Figure 4.1: The interaction of demand and supply in establishing the rate of exchange A demand for dollars exists when, for example, South African importers wish to exchange rands for dollars to pay for goods/services to be imported from the United States of America. On the other hand, the holders of dollars seek to exchange dollars for rands when, for example, the American importer wants to pay for goods/services to be imported from South Africa.There might be an excess supply or excess demand for dollars when the price rises above or falls below the market price of QP (see Figure 4.1). © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics AND THE BALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS 59

4 Chapter FACTORS THAT WILL INFLUENCE DEMAND AND SUPPLY Demand factors for foreign exchange Supply factors of foreign exchange • Importing goods • Exporting goods • Payment for services from foreign • Providing services to foreign countries countries • Buying shares in another country • Receiving dividends on shares • Tourists spending money overseas invested in foreign countries • Repayment of debt borrowed from • Inflow of foreign capital foreign countries • Expenditure of money by foreign tourists • Raising new loans in foreign countries Table 4.2 Factors that will influence demand and supply of foreign exchange 4.4.3 Appreciation and depreciation Appreciation of a country’s currency is an increase in the price of the currency in terms of another currency due to market forces. For example Up when the dollar goes from $1 = R9 to $1 = R10, then the dollar has appreciated. Depreciation of a currency is a decrease in the price of the currency in Down terms of another country’s currency due to market forces. For example if the dollar goes from $1 = R9 to $1 = R8, then the dollar has depreciated against the rand. 4.4.4 Revaluation and devaluation Revaluation of a currency refers to the deliberate increase in the value of the currency in terms of another currency. (As a result of central bank intervention.) This occurs under a fixed exchange system. Devaluation of a currency refers to the deliberate decrease in the value of the currency in terms of another currency. (As a result of central bank intervention). 4.4.5 Intervention in the market A symbiotic (mutually dependent) relationship exists between the exchange rate of a country and its balance of payments. This relationship invites continuous attention from the central bank. Central banks often intervene when the currency is either overvalued or undervalued. Overvalued: When a country’s currency is valued too high, for example, the South African rand is R7 rather than R8 for a US dollar. This can lead to continuous deficits on the current account of the balance of payments. Undervalued: When a country’s currency is not valued high enough, for example, the South African rand is R9 rather than R8 to a US dollar. Such undervaluation can be demonstrated by continuous surpluses on the current account of the balance of payments. CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET © Department of Basic Education 2014 60 AND THE B ALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 4 Two methods of intervention are traditionally used: Direct intervention: The Central bank buys foreign exchange when the currency is overvalued, and sells foreign exchange when the currency is undervalued. Indirect intervention: The most important instrument used by the central bank for indirect intervention is interest rate changes. When a currency is overvalued an increase in interest rates invites an inflow of investments. A surplus is created on the financial account that balances out the deficit on the current account. When the currency is undervalued interest rates can be decreased to cause an outflow of foreign currency and drain excess liquidity from the economy and release inflation pressure. The surplus on the current account will then decrease. 4.5 Establishment of foreign exchange rates 4.5.1 Exchange rate systems Every country manages the value of its currency by determining the exchange rate system that will apply to its currency. There are numerous exchange rate systems. Among these are: Free floating exchange rates The value of the currency is determined purely by the forces of the market, i.e. demand for rand and supply of rand. Managed exchange rates These are exchange rates which are allowed to respond to market forces within certain limits. Fixed exchange rates Currencies are devaluated and revaluated. The gold standard backed the value of the currency to a certain amount of gold. South Africa stepped off the gold standard in 1932. 4.5.2 Terms of trade • The terms of trade compare a country’s export prices with its import prices by means of indexes. The formula is: Index of export prices/Index of import prices × 100 Item 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 Index 105,3 113,7 122,0 124,7 123 121.4 % Change 0,0 8,0 7,3 2,2 –1,7 –1,6 Table 4.3 South Africa’s terms of trade (excluding gold) (SARB QB) © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics AND THE BALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS 61

4 Chapter • South Africa’s terms of trade index increased at high rates in 2009 and 2010. If the numerical value indexes increase, it is said that the terms of trade have improved. If the numerical value decreases, it is said that the terms of trade have deteriorated. • An improvement in the terms of trade may be the result of the following: –– An increase in export prices –– A decrease in import prices • A deterioration in the terms of trade may be the result of the following: –– A decrease in export prices –– An increase in import prices 4.5.3 Free trade and protection • Free trade – Happens when producers and consumers are free to buy goods and services anywhere in the world without interference from a government. • Protection – Limits the extent of trade between countries. For example limiting imports. 4.5.4 South Africa’s foreign trade • South Africa has a relatively open economy. Foreign trade is approximately 30% of the GDP, which means that the economy at large is sensitive to changes in the terms of trade. • The composition of our exports and imports in Table 4.4 shows that mining and manufacturing will be more sensitive in terms of trade than, for instance agriculture. Trade Agriculture Manufacturing Mining Exports 4,02% 50,29% 45,69% Imports 1,54% 82,53% 15,92% Table 4.4 Composition of South Africa’s’ foreign trade (2010) (SAIRR SAS) • Table 4.5 shows that South Africa’s trade is almost equally divided between countries of the East and West or countries from the North and South. Africa Europe NAFTA Asia Other Imports % 7,9 33,9 8,5 44,2 6,5 Exports % 14,7 27,4 9,7 45,3 2,9 Total R billion 130,8 352,7 104,6 448,4 113,7 Table 4.5 South Africa’s trade with the world (2010) (SAIRR SAS) CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET © Department of Basic Education 2014 62 AND THE B ALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 4 4.6. Corrections of the balance of payments Balance of payments disequilibria exist when the outflow of foreign currency continuously exceeds or is less than the inflow of foreign currency. You will remember that a deficit on the balance of payments implies that the outflow of foreign currency exceeds the inflow of foreign currency while a surplus exists when the outflow is less than the inflow. A way to correct balance of payments disequilibrium lies in earning more foreign exchange through more exports and reducing imports. The following are methods that can be used to correct the deficit or surpluses on the balance of payments. 4.6.1 Lending and Borrowing Countries with surpluses often lend money to countries with deficits. Countries with deficits often borrow. This is why some developing countries have so much foreign debt. In the event of a fundamental disequilibrium, member countries may borrow from the International Monetary Fund (IMF). Borrowing is nevertheless not a long-term solution for fundamental balance of payments disequilibrium. 4.6.2 Change in exchange rate Currency depreciation or devaluation makes imports more expensive for domestic consumers and exports cheaper for foreign buyers. For example, when the rand depreciates, South African goods (exports) become cheaper for foreign buyers. Imports become more expensive for South Africans. 4.6.3 Change in demand The following four instruments are used in various countries to restore the equilibrium: Long-term policies – Export promotion, such as government incentives, is applied to encourage the production of goods that can be exported. For example, European countries pay subsidies to farmers. Import substitution, for example, government incentives to produce goods domestically rather than to import them. The South African government favours export promotion. Interest rates – Domestic demand can be changed by changing interest rates. If interest rates are increased spending, including on imports, decreases. Foreign traders will try to take advantage by increasing their investment in the country with the higher interest rate. The opposite happens when interest rates are decreased. Import control – They include import tariffs, other duties and quotas. The WTO is trying to phase them out for the sake of trade liberalisation. © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics AND THE BALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS 63

4 Chapter Exchange control – There are domestic regulations that allow central banks to ration foreign exchange. Earners of foreign exchange are compelled by law to hand it over to the central bank. Those who require foreign exchange have to apply to the central bank. Activity 1 Study Figure 4.2 concerning international trade and answer the questions that follow. Graph 1 Exports and imports Exports Imports ZAR 800,000 Rand amount (millions) ZAR 700,000 ZAR 600,000 ZAR 500,000 ZAR 400,000 ZAR 300,000 ZAR 200,000 ZAR 100,000 ZAR 0 92 93 94 995 996 97 998 999 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 011 19 19 19 1 1 19 1 1 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 2 Year Graph 2 Balance of trade ZAR 40,000 ZAR 20,000 Rand amount (millions) ZAR 0 –ZAR 20,000 –ZAR 40,000 –ZAR 60,000 –ZAR 80,000 –ZAR 100,000 –ZAR 120,000 9 2 93 94 995 996 997 998 999 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 19 19 19 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Year Figure 4.2 International trade 1. What does graph 1 depict? Supply a reason for your answer. (2) 2. Define the term balance of trade. (3) 3. Does the balance of trade in 2008 indicate a positive or a negative balance? (2) 4. Estimate the balance of trade for 2008. (4) 5. What effect did the closing of textile factories in South Africa have on the balance of trade? (3) 6. Which economic trend in 2009 contributed to the decline in imports and exports? (2) [16] CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET © Department of Basic Education 2014 64 AND THE B ALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 4 Answers to activity 1 1. It depicts the difference between the imports and exports.33(2) 2. It is the value of exports minus the value of imports.333(3) 3. Negative balance33(2) 4. Approximately 600 000 – 700 00033 = –100 00033(2) 5. A negative effect3 because there was an increase in imports33(3) 6. Global recession33(2) [16] Activity 2 Study Table 4.2 which shows the balance of payments extract and answer the questions that follow: BALANCE OF PAYMENT – ANNUAL FIGURES 2009 2011 – R millions Balance of current account –97 062 –98 785 Capital transfer account (net receipts) 216 241 Financial Account: Direct investment (net) 35 708 B Portfolio investment (net) 93 764 –16 345 Other investment (net) –16 253 29 561 Balance on financial account A 45 889 Unrecorded transactions 664 85 359 Change in gross gold and other foreign reserves –24 289 107 194 Source: Quarterly Bulletin, SARB. March 2012. Table 4.2 Balance of payments for 2009–2011 1. Define the concept balance of payments. (2) 2. Calculate the missing figures in A and B. (4) 3. What does ‘net figures’ indicate in the financial account? (2) 4. Give TWO examples of income receipts earned by South African residents. (4) 5. Briefly explain how balance of payments disequilibria can be corrected. (6) [18] © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics AND THE BALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS 65

4 Chapter Answers to activity 2 1. This is a systematic record of all transactions between one country, e.g. South Africa and all other countries in the world.33 (2) 2. A = R113 219 million33 B = R32 673 million33(4) 3. Money that enters the country is offset against money that leaves the country. 33(2) 4. Income earned by South Africans working in other countries, e.g. a South African teaching in Dubai.33 33 When South Africans receive dividends on the shares they hold in foreign companies.33(4) 5. l Borrowing money from the IMF33 • Policies of export promotion and import substitution33 • Increase in aggregate supply will reduce prices. Exports are promoted through cheaper prices.33 • Higher interest rates help to decrease spending on imports.33 (any 3 × 2) (6) [18] Keep going! CHAPTER 4 THE FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET © Department of Basic Education 2014 66 AND THE B ALANCE OF PAYMENTS ACCOUNTS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 5 Protectionism and free trade Protectionism refers to government policies and regulations (such as restrictive quotas and tariffs on imported goods), which are designed to benefit local producers of goods and services in their competition with imported goods, thus helping them to survive. Free trade occurs where government creates very few barriers to international trade. This allows the free flow of goods and services into the country from any other country that can produce these goods cheaper, better, or in the required volumes. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIONISM AND FREE TRADE 67

5 Chapter Overview TOPIC CONTENT CONTENT DETAILS FOR TEACHING, LEARNING AND ASSESSMENT PURPOSES 5. Discuss protectionism and free trade and Economic evaluate the South African international trade systems: policies and major protocols in terms of the Protection following: and free trade (Globalisation) • Export promotion • Define/explain the concept –– Definition • Discuss export promotion in detail –– Reasons –– Methods –– Advantages –– Disadvantages • Import substitution • Define/explain the concept –– Definition • Discuss import substitution in detail –– Reasons –– Methods HOT QUESTION: Evaluate the effectiveness of the application of the policies of export –– Advantages promotion and import substitution –– Disadvantages • Protectionism (the arguments) • Define/explain the concept –– Definition • Discuss arguments in favour of protectionism in detail –– Arguments in favour of protectionism • Broadly outline the concept free trade –– Industrial development and protectionism –– Infant industries –– Stable wage levels and high standard of living –– Increased employment –– Self-sufficiency and strategic industries –– Prevention of dumping –– Stable exchange rates and BoP –– Protection of natural resources • Free Trade (the arguments) • Define/explain the concept –– Arguments in favour of free trade • Discuss free trade in detail –– Specialisation –– Economy of scale HOT QUESTION: Argue a case in favour –– Choices/increased welfare of protectionism and against free trade, OR in favour of free trade and against –– Innovations/best practice protectionism –– Improved international relations • Explain in your own words the meaning of • A desirable mix a desirable mix –– Import substitution and export promotion • Briefly outline economic integration as –– Protection of free trade part of trade protocols –– Globalisation –– Economic integration HOT QUESTION: How does globalisation impact on the desirable mix of South Africa? © Department of Basic Education 2014 68 CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIONISM AND FREE TRADE Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 5 • Evaluate South Africa’s trade policies • Explain the meaning of the concept –– Import substitution and export promotion protocol –– Protection and free trade • Briefly evaluate the South African policies in terms of protectionism and free trade –– Southern African Custom Union (SACU) • Briefly evaluate South Africa’s trade –– Multilateral Monetary Area (MMA) protocols in terms of their benefits –– Southern African Development Community (SADC) –– African Union (AU) –– European Union ( EU) –– Mercusor –– AGOA –– The partnership between South Africa and China –– Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa (BRICS) –– Trade Liberalisation • Explain the concept –– World Trade Organisation (WTO) • Broadly outline the role of the World Trade Organisation in trade liberalisation © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIONISM AND FREE TRADE 69

5 Chapter 5.1 Key concepts These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key Economics concepts that are used in this study guide. Term Definition BRICS An association of emerging economies consisting of Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa set up to promote co-operation, policy coordination and political dialogue in international, economic and financial matters disinvestment Withdrawal of capital investment from a company or country embargo An official state ban on trade or other activities with a particular country export promotion Incentives to encourage the production of goods that can be exported. It is part of South Africa’s international trade policy Free trade When producers and consumers are free to buy goods and services from anywhere in the world without the interference of government import substitution Goods that were previously imported are replaced with locally produced goods. It is part of South Africa’s international trade policy Mercosur An organisation to promote free trade amongst Argentina, Brazil, Paraguay and Uruguay New Partnership for Provides for regional cooperation and integration among African states African development (NePad) Protection A trade policy whereby the state discourages the importing of certain goods and services in order to protect local industries against unequal competition from abroad Southern African An economic and monetary union comprising Angola, Botswana, the Democratic Development Community Republic of the Congo, Lesotho, Malawi, Mauritius, Mozambique, Namibia, (SADC) Seychelles, SA, Swaziland, Tanzania, Zambia and Zimbabwe, which allows imports from member states to qualify for duty-free access to other member states Sanctions A penalty applied by one or more countries on another country trade liberalisation The abolition of government intervention in trade flows on both the import and the export side World trade The international organisation that was created to monitor and liberalise Organisation (WTO) international trade Protocol The established code of procedure or behaviour in any group or organisation. The official procedure governing affairs of state, e.g. cultural activities and international affairs © Department of Basic Education 2014 70 CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIONISM AND FREE TRADE Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 5 5.2 Export promotion 5.2.1 Definition Export promotion involves providing incentives to encourage local businesses to produce goods for export. 5.2.2 Reasons for export promotion Some of the reasons for export promotion are: • The country achieves significant export-led economic growth. • Export promotion enlarges the production capacity of the country. • Export markets are much bigger than local markets. • More workers will be employed. • Prices will be reduced. 5.2.3 Methods of export promotion Methods used to support export promotion include: • Incentives: The government supplies information on export markets, research on new markets, concessions on transport charges, export credit, etc. in order to stimulate exports. • Subsidies: These include direct and indirect subsidies: –– Direct subsidies: Cash payments to exporters. –– Indirect subsidies: Refunds on import tariffs and general tax rebates. • Trade neutrality: Subsidies equal in size to import duties, are paid. Neutrality can be achieved through trade liberalisation. 5.2.4 Advantages of export promotion The advantages of export promotion include: • There are no limitations to size and scale of market. • Production is based on cost and efficiency. • There is increased domestic production. • Exchange rates would be realistic. 5.2.5 Disadvantages of export promotion The disadvantages of export promotion include: • The real cost of production is reduced by subsidies and incentives. • Incentives and subsidies reduce prices and force competitors out of the market. This leads to a lack of competition. • Export promotion results in increased tariffs and quotas by powerful overseas competitors. • Export promotion results in the protection of labour-intensive industries by developed countries. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIONISM AND FREE TRADE 71

5 Chapter 5.3 Import Substitution 5.3.1 Definition Import substitution is part of South Africa’s international trade policy. It occurs when locally produced goods replace goods that had previously been imported. This has a positive impact on the balance of trade. 5.3.2 Reasons for import substitution Reasons for import substitution include the following: • Diversification: when goods that were previously imported are produced locally domestic manufacturing expands and an economy becomes less reliant on foreign countries. • Industrialisation is promoted: the development of new industries to produce previously imported goods can increase tax revenues and create jobs. • Balance of payment problems: if the deficit on the BoP is too high, a decrease in imports can help to rectify this. • Trade: developing countries’ reliance on natural resources as a basis for growth and development limits their ability to grow. If these resources are used to produce goods and services which can be used domestically or exported, economic growth might be increased. These are 5.3.3 Methods of import substitution commonly called ‘barriers to trade’ The government imposes certain measures to restrict the amount of or ‘methods of imports into the country and to support local industries. Restrictive protection’. measures used to reserve the domestic market for local manufacturers are: • Tariffs: Customs duties or import duties are taxes on imported goods. They can be ad valorem (based on the value) or specific to certain goods. Prices of imported goods increase for domestic consumers, and they tend to shift demand from imports to domestic products (goods). • Quotas: Limits are put on the supply of goods and services. Supply is reduced and prices rise. Foreign enterprises benefit if demand for their products remains high. • Subsidies: They enable relatively high cost domestic enterprises to undercut more efficient foreign enterprises in the domestic market. • Exchange control: Government reduces imports by limiting the amount of foreign exchange made available to those who wish to import. • Physical control: A complete ban or embargo is imposed on the import of certain goods from a particular country. • Diverting trade: Monetary deposits, time-consuming customs procedures and high-quality standards are imposed to make the importing of goods more difficult. © Department of Basic Education 2014 72 CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIONISM AND FREE TRADE Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 5 5.3.4 Advantages of import substitution Some of the advantages of import substitution are: • Increased employment: More local workers are employed. This stimulates the economy and GDP increases. • More choice: Available foreign exchange can be used for other imports, thus increasing choices. • Diversification: By producing more goods locally, the range of available goods increases, and the country becomes less vulnerable to foreign actions and conditions. 5.3.5 Disadvantages of import substitution Some of the disadvantages of import substitution for the local economy are: • Capital and entrepreneurial talent: This is drawn away from comparative advantage. • Technology borrowed from abroad: This may be unsuitable for local production. • Competitiveness of certain sectors decreases: Where comparative advantages exist. • Import substitution leads to demand for protection: This demand comes from industries that provide inputs to local industries. 5.4 Protection Many economists argue for protection, especially for developing countries. Many other economists insist that free trade is the best way to regulate markets. Governments often choose a mix of selected protectionist and free trade policies that suit the particular conditions of their country. 5.4.1 Definition of protection A trade policy whereby the state discourages the importing of certain goods and services in order to protect local industries against unequal competition from abroad 5.4.2 Arguments in favour of protection • Industrial development: Some developing countries are well suited to establishing certain kinds of industries. Free trade makes it difficult for these countries to compete with countries with well- established industries. • Infant industries: Newly established industries find it difficult to survive because of high average costs of production which are higher than those of well-established foreign competitors. • Stable wage levels and higher standards of living: A country with high wages has a view that the standard of living will be undermined if cheaper goods are imported from countries with low wages. • The protection of job opportunities: If local industries cannot find profitable markets because of cheaper imports, production may decrease and this will lead to more unemployment. • Economic self-sufficiency and strategic key industries: In times of conflict, cut-off or friction between countries occurs. Protection © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIONISM AND FREE TRADE 73

5 Chapter should be granted, especially to key industries to ensure the availability of these key products. • Dangers of dumping: Some countries sell their surplus goods in a foreign country at lower prices than it cost them to produce the goods. Local producers cannot compete, and their factories may close. • Stabilise exchange rates and balance of payments: Traders buy in the cheapest markets and sell in the most expensive ones. Countries export primary products and import manufactured goods, causing disrupted balance of payments and exchange rates. • Protection of natural resources: Free trade can easily exhaust natural resources, therefore protection is needed to protect local industries and indigenous knowledge systems so that they can survive. The South African government has taken steps to protect Rooibos tea as natural resource and safeguard indigenous knowledge that allows the hoodia plant to be used for medicinal purposes. 5.5 Free trade 5.5.1 Definition of free trade When producers and consumers are free to buy goods and services from anywhere in the world without the interference of government. 5.5.2 Arguments in favour of free trade • Specialisation: The theory of comparative advantage shows that world output can be increased if countries specialise in what they are relatively best at producing. If each nation does what it does best, everyone will enjoy lower prices and higher levels of output. • Economies of scale: Free trade allows economies of scale to be maximised and thus unit cost are reduced. Economies of scale are a source of comparative advantage. • Choice: Free trade allows consumers the choice of what to buy from the whole world, and not just what is produced domestically. Consumers’ welfare is thus increased because some consumers at least will prefer to buy foreign goods rather than domestic goods. • Innovations: Free trade increases competition and this encourages innovation in goods and processes. • Improves global efficiency: Under free trade, resources are allocated more efficiently as markets expand, because each country specialises in its most effective production. • Free trade leads to greater world production of traded goods, leading to an increase in economic welfare. • Free trade leads to mutual gains from international trade to all countries. © Department of Basic Education 2014 74 CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIONISM AND FREE TRADE Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 5 5.6 A desirable mix of protection and free trade 5.6.1 Import substitution and export promotion The strategies of Import substitution and export promotion should not be regarded as unavoidable opposites. Many countries started out by protecting their domestic industries and then applied export-orientated policies only after a considerable length of time. Import substitution almost inevitably leads to export promotion. 5.6.2 Protection and free trade Regionalisation, in the form of trade blocks, makes use of free trade and protection. Member countries pursue free trade with one another but apply trade restrictions outside their block. (Free trade area, e.g. NAFTA and Custom unions, e.g. Mercusor) 5.6.3 Globalisation Restrictive practices, whether they relate to imports or to exports have the same effect – they reduce the potential volume of world production that would be possible if there was complete free trade and only those goods for which countries had comparative advantage were produced. To pursue this objective of free trade, an independent facilitator was required. The WTO is such a facilitator. 5.6.4 Economic integration Some of these trade protocols that focus on economic integration are: • Free trade areas (FTAs) – Member countries agree to the removal of all tariffs. Each member country is still permitted to maintain its own level of trade protection against non-member countries. • Customs unions – Member countries agree to the removal of all tariffs. However, in a custom union, member countries all set and maintain the same external restrictions on non-member countries. • Common markets – Are a form of economic integration that satisfies all the requirements of a customs union but also allows for the free movement of factors of production between member countries. • Economic unions – Meet all the requirements of a common market, but go further which results in member countries establishing a single authority responsible for joint economic policy making, a single monetary system, one central bank, a unified fiscal system and a common foreign economic policy. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIONISM AND FREE TRADE 75

5 Chapter 5.7 Evaluation of South Africa’s trade policies 5.7.1 Export promotion and import substitution South Africa’s export promotion policy unfolds as follows: Export promotion • 1970’s – measures such as cash grants, tax concessions on export turnover and profits and rail freight concessions were introduced in order to reduce costs for manufacturers of goods with export potential. • 1980’s – some quotas were removed and replaced with tariffs. Export subsidies were introduced. A list of importers that needed approval replaced a list of imports that did not need approval. • 1985 – When the US banks refused to roll over import guarantees, South Africa declared a debt standstill and unilaterally restructured the payment of its foreign loans. The rand depreciated substantially and surcharge of 10% on imports was introduced. This led to the effective protection rate increase from 30% to 70%. • 1990’s – the General Export Incentive Scheme (GEIS) was introduced for the purpose of encouraging the production of value- added exports. For the first time the official policy stance was one of export-orientated industrialisation. South Africa’s Import substitution policy unfolds as follows: Import substitution • Tariff protection – in 1910 the Cullinan Commission was appointed to investigate the feasibility of establishing a domestic manufacturing industry in South Africa. Tariffs were introduced by the Customs Tariff Act of 1914 and provided protection for local manufacturing industries. In 1925 a new act was implemented and the ‘South Africa first campaign’ was introduced. South Africa thereby introduced an official inward-looking policy. • The Second World War – Iscor (now Arcelor Mittal) was established as a strategic industry in 1928, in time to take advantage of the opportunities brought about by the Second World War. The SWW stimulated manufacturing and industrial development in general. This was because SA was isolated from many imports and had to produce many products itself. • Export ready – After the SWW it was accepted that import substitution was the best policy to enhance economic growth. Sasol was established in 1955 to produce oil from coal. From the mid-1960’s, import substitution reached a mature phase when manufacturing increasingly focused on intermediate and capital production. Domestic demand was the main stimulus. However large markets were essential for these goods and necessitated exports. South Africa was ready for an export promotion policy. SA manufacturing sector’s contribution to GDP increased from 5,8 in 1912 to 31,1% in 1981. Import substitution had indeed been successful. © Department of Basic Education 2014 76 CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIONISM AND FREE TRADE Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 5 5.7.2 Protection and free trade The Customs Union Agreement of 1910 was the origin of the Southern African Customs Union (SACU). This is one of the world’s oldest customs unions. The members of the SACU are: South Africa, Lesotho, Namibia, Botswana and Swaziland. The Common Monetary Area (CMA) – made up of South Africa, Lesotho and Swaziland – was replaced with the Multilateral Monetary Area (MMA) in 1992 and was joined by Namibia. Various protocols have been signed with the African Union (AU) and Southern African Countries, including the Southern Africa Development Community (SADC) and the Africa Free Trade Zone (AFTZ). Since 1994 South Africa also made significant progress towards strengthening bilateral ties with its main trading partners and free trade areas (FTAs). They include the EU, Asian Free Trade Area (AFTA), Asian countries – in various combinations and BRICS. 5.7.3 Trade liberalisation South Africa’s economic policy bias towards exports as a major stimulant of economic growth was further entrenched after 1994. An agreement was reached with GATT (WTO) in terms of what trade had to be liberalised as from January 1995. South Africa’s offer to the WTO consisted of a five- year tariff reduction period. More than 100 tariff categories were reduced to six categories. South Africa’s average tariff declined from 11,7% in 1994 to 5% in 2011. Keep going! © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 5 PROTECTIONISM AND FREE TRADE 77

6 Chapter The dynamics of perfect markets A perfect market is characterised by perfect competition. The conditions that result in perfect competition include: • Equal access to the technology required for production • No barriers to entry or exit from the marketplace • Accurate and available market information • No participant with the power to set the market price • According to equilibrium theory, a perfect market will reach an equilibrium where the quantity supplied equals the quantity demanded at the market price © Department of Basic Education 2014 78 CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 6 Overview MAIN TOPIC: MICROECONOMICS TOPIC CONTENT PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION CONTENT DETAILS FOR TEACHING, NB NB LEARNING AND ASSESSMENT PURPOSES 6. Examine the dynamics of perfect markets with HOT QUESTION: Examine in detail how Dynamics the aid of cost and revenue curves cost and revenue curves can be used of markets: to illustrate and explain the dynamics Perfect 1. Review HINT! cost and revenue tables and (working) of markets markets hint curves done in Grade 11. 2. Differentiate between the short and long run. e.g. EG - worked examples • Perfect competition • Explain the concept –– Description • Examine the characteristics of a –– Characteristics/conditions perfect market in detail • Compare the individual businesses to exams the industry in detail • Individual business and industry –– The demand curve for: • The examination of individual business and industry should be accompanied –– Individual business by an analysis of tables and graphs –– The industry –– Profit maximization HOT QUESTION: Explain why the –– Derivation of supply curve from cost curves activity individual maize, wheat or milk farmer does not have an influence on the price • Market structure ACTIVITIES boy of their products in the market and girl-left and –– Definition right of page –– Characteristics • Define the concept PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION activity –– Number of businesses NB • Compare and contrast the FOUR broad NB types of market structures –– Nature of product –– Entrance –– Control over prices Step by step comment comment As the HINT! various market structures –– Information –– Examples hint are discussed in detail, all characteristics will feature. –– Demand curve –– Economic profit –– Collusion e.g. EG - worked examples –– Allocative efficiency –– Technical efficiency • Output, Profits, Losses and Supply • exams Examine in detail the THREE equilibrium positions with the aid of PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION –– Individual business NB graphs NB –– Short run (economic profit, economic loss, • Explain shut-down/closing down point normal profit) with the aid of a graph –– Long run (normal profit) –– Shut-down/closing down –– The industry activity When HINT! teaching the various –– Short-run (economic profit, economic loss, hint equilibrium positions a link must ACTIVITIES boy be made between individual and girl-left and normal profit) businesses and the industry. right of page –– Long run (normal profit) activity e.g. EG - worked examples © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS 79 exams commen

6 Chapter • Competition policies HOT QUESTION: Draw three fully labelled –– Description graphs showing the possible equilibrium positions of a business operating under –– Goals with the competition policy perfect market conditions –– Anti-monopoly policy –– Competition Policy, Act 89 of 1998 • Define/explain the policy –– Competition Commission • Briefly discuss/analyse the goals of the –– Competition Tribunal SA competition policy –– Competition Appeal Court • Briefly analyse the SA Anti-monopoly policy • Briefly discuss the Competition policy Act and its implications highlighting the roles of the key institutions • Give your opinion about the successes/ failures of the Competition policy Act HOT QUESTION: In your opinion is the competition policy in South Africa destroying or saving businesses? © Department of Basic Education 2014 80 CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 6 6.1 Key concepts Use mobile notes to help you These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key Economics learn these concepts. concepts that are used in this study guide. Understand these concepts Instructions for making well. them are on page xiv in the introduction. Term Definition Economic loss When total costs are greater than total revenue. When average revenue is lower than average cost the firm makes an economic loss Economic profit Profit that is made in addition to normal profit. When average revenue is greater than average cost the firm makes an economic profit Explicit cost Actual expenditure of business, e.g. wages and interest Implicit cost Value of inputs owned by entrepreneur and used in the production process (forfeited rental, interest + salary) Long run The period of production where all factors can change. The time is long enough for variable and fixed factors to change Market An institution or mechanism that brings together buyers and sellers of goods or services Market structure How a market is organised Monopolistic A market structure in which businesses have many competition competitors, but each one sells a slightly different product (e.g. CD’s and books) Monopoly Exclusive control of a commodity or service in a particular market Normal profit The minimum earnings required to prevent an entrepreneur from leaving the industry. When average revenue equals average cost the firm makes a normal profit Oligopoly A market structure controlled by a small group of businesses Perfect competition A market structure with large numbers of producers and buyers Price taker Has no influence on price. Takes price that is determined by the market Short run The period of production where only the variable factors of production can change while at least one factor is fixed Shut-down point Business will close where MC = AVC The Competition An institution whose main functions is to review orders Appeal Court made by the Competition Tribunal and amend or confirm these orders The Competition An institute that investigates restrictive business Commission practices, abuse of dominant positions and mergers in order to achieve equity in the South African economy The Competition An institution whose main function is to approve Tribunal large mergers, adjudicate in the case of misconduct and issue orders on matters presented to it by the Competition Commission © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS 81

6 Chapter 6.2 Review of production, costs PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION NB NB and revenue It is important to review Production takes place in the short run and the long run production, cost and revenue concepts covered in Grade HINT! • Short run hint 11. This is vitally important The short run is the period of production where only the variable for the understanding of cost factors of production can change. The time period is too short to and revenue curves for the permit the number of firms in the industry to change. different market structures • Long run e.g. EG - worked examples which you will study in this The long run is the period of production where all factors can change. section. The time is long enough for variable and fixed factors to change. It allows enough time for new firms to enter the industry and/or existing firms to exit. exams Total Product/Output Total product is the maximum output that the firm can produce with the given number of fixed and variable inputs at its disposal Marginal Product/Output Marginal product is the additional unit of output which is MP = Δ TP activity produced as one more unit of the variable input (labour) is ΔQ combined with the ACTIVITIES boy fixed input and girl-left and right of page Average Product/Output Average product of a variable input shows the contribution AP = P Q activity that each labourer makes towards production Fixed Costs Costs that remain the same even if the output changes. (indirect costs/overhead Examples are rent, depreciation, insurance costs) Variable Costs Step by stepCosts that change comment comment according to changes in output. E.g. (direct costs/prime wages the cost of raw materials, electricity etc. costs) Total cost The cost/remuneration for all the factors of production used TC = FC + VC in the production process Marginal costs Marginal cost is the amount by which total cost increases MC = Δ TC when one extra product is produced ΔQ Average cost Average cost is the cost per unit of production AC = AFC + AVC or TC Q Average fixed cost To calculate average fixed costs, we divide fixed costs by the AFC = FC amount of goods produced Q Average varible cost To calculate average variable costs, we divide variable costs AVC = VC by the amount of goods produced Q Total Revenue Total revenue is the total income received from the sale of TR = P × Q goods or services Marginal revenue Marginal revenue refers to the extra amount of income MR = Δ TR gained by selling one more unit of production ΔQ Average revenue Average revenue refers to the amount a firm earns for every AR = TR unit sold Q Table 6.1: Review of production, costs and revenue © Department of Basic Education 2014 82 CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 6 Summary of costs Cost schedule for Kael’s Pie shop MC = ΔTC Q TFC TVC TOTAL AFC = TFC AVC = TVC (ATC = AFC + AVC) or TC COSTS Q Q Q ΔQ 0 120 0 120 – – – 10 120 100 220 12 10 22 10 20 120 160 280 6 8 14 6 30 120 210 330 4 7 11 5 40 120 280 400 3 7 10 7 50 120 400 520 2,4 8 10,4 12 60 120 600 720 2 10 12 20 70 120 910 1 030 1,7 13 14,7 31 Table 6.2: Summary of costs The following sketches should resemble the shape for the above cost curves. TC MC AC VC AVC Cost Cost FC 0 Quantity 0 Quantity Figure 6.1 a): Total and variable cost Figure 6.1 b): Marginal and average variable cost Important observations • The difference between the total cost and variable cost is the fixed cost • TVC curve starts from 0 and TC starts from the fixed cost curve on the Y- axis. • The gap between the AC curve and the AVC curve gets smaller as output increases. • The MC Curve will always cut the AC and AVC curves at their minimum points. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS 83

6 Chapter 6.3 Perfect competition Perfect competition occurs in a market structure with a large number of participants who have access to all required information about the market place and are all price-takers. Prices are determined by demand and supply. Examples of market structures demonstrating most conditions of a perfect competition include the stock exchange, the foreign exchange market, the central grain exchange, and agricultural produce markets. A perfect market is a market where no single buyer or seller has a noticeable influence on the price of a good. This gives a true reflection of the scarcity value of goods and services. 6.3.1 Characteristics/conditions of a perfect market Products must be homogenous (i.e. identical) • Products must be identical. There should be no differences in style, design and quality. • In this way products compete solely on the basis of price and can be purchased anywhere. There should be a large number of buyers and sellers • It should not be possible for one buyer or seller to influence the price. • When there are many sellers the share of each seller in the market is so small that the seller cannot influence the price. • Sellers are price takers, they accept the prevailing market price. If they increase prices above the market price, they will lose customers. No preferential treatment/discrimination • Collusion occurs when buyers and sellers make an agreement to limit competition. In a perfect market no collusion takes place. • Buyers and sellers base their actions solely on price, homogenous products fetch the same price and therefore no preference is shown for buying from or selling to any particular person. Free competition • Buyers must be free to buy whatever they want from any firm and in any quantity. • Sellers must be free to sell what, how much and where they wish. • There should be no State interference and no price control. • Buyers should not form groups to obtain lower prices, nor should sellers combine to enforce higher prices. Efficient transport and communication • Efficient transport ensures that products are made available everywhere. • In this way changes in demand and supply in one part of the market will influence the price in the entire market. • Efficient communication keeps buyers and sellers informed about market conditions. © Department of Basic Education 2014 84 CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 6 All participants must have perfect knowledge of market conditions • All buyers and sellers must be fully aware of what is happening in any part of the market. • Technology has increased competition as information is easily obtained via the internet. Free access to and from markets • Producers may enter and leave a market with little interference. • Entering and leaving a perfect market is easy as less capital is required and there are fewer legal restrictions. The factors of production are completely mobile • They can move freely between markets. In reality there are few perfect markets, however there are some sectors such as mining (e.g. gold) and agriculture (e.g. maize) where many of the conditions are met. These sectors illustrate the way in which the market mechanism works. 6.4 The individual business and the Read industry this section on graphs through five times, and redraw each graph each time. 6.4.1 Determining the market price To determine the market price for a firm under perfect competition you need to draw two graphs next to each other. On the left is the graph for the industry and on the right is the graph for the firm (individual producer). • Figure 6.2 a) (the industry) shows the interaction of demand and supply (market forces). • The market forces are in equilibrium at the point of intersection of the demand and supply curves, at “e”. • At equilibrium the quantity demanded is equal to the quantity supplied. This determines the market price. • Now look at Figure 6.2 b) (firm or individual producer). One producer will not be able to influence the market price and has to accept the market price (P1), he is a price taker. • Because this is the only price the producer can charge, the demand curve for the producer is a straight line drawn at price P1. • This horizontal line at the market price (P1) is the demand curve (DD), the average revenue (AR) curve and the marginal revenue (MR) curve. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS 85

6 Chapter The Industry The individual producer D S P2 P1 e P1 D = AR = MR P3 S D Q Q 0 0 Figure 6.2 a): Industry Figure 6.2 b): Individual producer 6.4.2 Demand curve for an individual producer The individual producer is a price taker and sells goods at the market price. At this price, demand remains constant. A higher price such as P2 cannot be charged as customers will be lost to other producers. Remember A lower price such as P3 cannot be charged as a small profit or a loss will that demand be made. = AR = MR =P Quantity Price (P) Total Marginal Average Revenue Revenue Revenue MR = ΔTR AR = TR ΔQ Q 0 5 0 5 5 1 5 5 5 5 2 5 10 5 5 3 5 15 5 5 4 5 20 5 5 5 5 25 5 5 6 5 30 5 5 Table 6.3: depicting the DEMAND, MARGINAL REVENUE and AVERAGE REVENUE for an individual producer in a perfect market. © Department of Basic Education 2014 86 CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 6 P Price R5 D = MR = AR Q 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Quality Figure 6.3: The demad curve for the individual producer 6.4.3 Profit maximisation Profit Occurs in 2 ways: maximisation occurs where 1. MR = MC Quantity Price Marginal Marginal Contribution Revenue Cost to profits 1 5 5 2 3 2 5 5 3 2 3 5 5 4 1 4 5 5 5 0 5 5 5 6 -1 6 5 5 7 -2 Table 6.4: Depicting profit maximisation MC MC R7 Profit maximisation MR = MC R6 Profits decrease MR < MC R5 D = MR Profits increase R4 MR > MC R3 R2 R1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Quantity Figure 6.4: The marginal cost curve for the individual producer © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS 87

6 Chapter • At all pionts where MR is above MC, the firm is adding to profit. From unit 1-3, the firm is increasing its profit. • At all points where MC is above MR, the firm is decreasing profit. From unit 5-7, the firm’s profit will decrease. • The firm maximises profit where MR = MC. The firm maximises its profits at unit 4. 2. Quantity Price Total Total Cost Profit PROFIT Revenue (Difference MAXIMISATION between occurs where the revenue and difference between cost) TR and TC is at a MAXIMUM 0 5 0 1 –1 (TR – TC) 1 5 5 3 2 2 5 10 6 4 3 5 15 10 5 4 5 20 15 5 5 5 25 21 4 6 5 30 28 2 Table 6.5: Depicting Profit Maximisation • If TC > TR the business makes a loss. If TR > TC it makes a profit. Figure 6.5 • Maximum profit is achieved at units 3 and 4. provides a clearer • Once the maximum profit is achieved, profits start to decrease with picture of Profit the next unit of output. Maximisation. Interpret it! • Therefore the firm will not produce more than 4 units. TC TR 60 50 B 40 Cost/Revenue 30 A 20 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Quantity Figure 6.5: Profit maximisation © Department of Basic Education 2014 88 CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 6 Interpretation of graph: • At all points where TR is above TC, the firm is making a profit. • At all points where TC is above TR, the firm is making a loss. • The gap between TR and TC represents profit. • Profit is maximised when the gap between TR and TC is the greatest. This is occurs at between 3 and 4 units. 6.5 Market structures There are FOUR different market structures: • Perfect competition • Monopolistic competition • Oligopoly • Monopoly Table 6.6 shows the 5 broad characteristics which distinguish the four market structures: As you study each market structure in detail, you will be able to identify more distinguishing characteristics. Characteristic Perfect competition Monopolistic Oligopoly Monopoly competition Number of Enough that a single A very large So few that each business One business businesses business cannot influence number must take the actions of the market price the others into account Nature of Homogenous (same kind) Differentiated, Homogenous or Unique product product e.g. cool drinks differentiated without any close substitutes Market entry Completely free Free From free to restricted Blocked Control over None Few Considerable, but less than Considerable price with a monopoly Information Complete Incomplete Incomplete Complete Examples International commodity Fast-food Petrol and oil markets Eskom markets, e.g. gold and oil outlets Table 6.6: The characteristics of different market structures The illustration below shows the four different market structures: Perfect competition Monopolistic competition Oligopoly Monopoly Figure 6.6: The four different market structures © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS 89

6 Chapter 6.6 Output, profit, losses and supply 6.6.1 The individual business Short term equilibrium position 1. Economic profits AL ATTENTION NB MC MR = MC When Average Revenue is AC Unit revenue and cost above Average cost the firm makes an ECONOMIC PROFIT. E3 P3 AR = MR C1 M ed examples Q3 Quantity Figure 6.7: Economic profits • Given a market price of P3, profit is maximised where MR = MC = P3. • This occurs at a quantity of Q3. • At Q3 the firm’s average revenue (AR) per unit of production is P3, ACTIVITIES boy • The average cost per unit is C1 which is lower than the price of P3. and girl-left and • The firm is making an economic profit per unit of production of right of page P3 – C1. Another explanation • Total revenue equals P3 × Q3, therefore total revenue is represented by the area 0P3E3Q3. • Total cost equals C1 × Q3, this is represented by the area 0C1MQ3. p comment comment • The difference between these two areas is the economic profit which is represented by the light grey shaded area C1P3E3M. © Department of Basic Education 2014 90 CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 6 2. Economic Losses PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION NB MC AC When Average Revenue is Unit revenue and cost below Average Cost the firm HINT! makes an ECONOMIC LOSS. C3 M MR = MC = E3 hint P3 AR = MR e.g. EG - worked examples Q3 Quantity exams Figure 6.8: Economic losses • Given a market price of P3, profit is maximised where MR = MC at point E3. • This occurs at a quantity of Q3. • At Q3 the firm’s average revenue (AR) per unit of production is P3, activity • The average cost per unit is C3 which is higher than the price of P3. ACTIVITIE and girl-l • The firm is making an economic loss per unit of production which is right of p equal to the difference between C3 and P3. activity Another explanation. • Total revenue equals P3 × Q3, therefore total revenue is represented by the area 0P3E3Q3. • Total cost equals C3 × Q3, this is represented by the area 0C3MQ3. • The difference between these two areas is the economic loss which Step by step com is represented by the light grey shaded area C3P3E3M. • Whether the firm should continue production would depend on the level of AR (that is P3) relative to the firm’s average variable cost. PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION NB NB 3. Normal profits • A firm makes normal profits when total revenue (TR) equals total costs or when average revenue (AR) equals average cost (AC). When Average Revenue • Normal profit is the maximum return the owner of a firmHINT! expects to equals Average Cost the firm makes a NORMAL PROFIT. receive to keep on operating in the industry. hint e.g. EG - worked examples exams activity ACTIVITIES boy and girl-left and right of page © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics activity CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS 91

6 Chapter MC AC MR = MC Unit revenue and cost E2 C 2 = P2 AR = MR Q2 Quantity Figure 6.9: Normal profits • Given a market price of P2, profit is maximised where MR = MC = P2. • This occurs at a quantity of Q2. • At Q2 the firm’s average revenue (AR) per unit of production is P2, which is also equal to the average cost per unit C2 (AC). • Since AR = AC, the firm earns a normal profit since all its costs are fully covered. • Point E2 is usually called the break-even point. Another explanation • Total revenue equals P2 x Q2, therefore total revenue is represented by the area 0P2E2Q2. • Total cost equals C2 × Q2, this is represented by the area 0P2E2Q2. • Since Total revenue equals Total Cost the producer makes a normal profit. PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION NB NB The individual business can make an economic profit, economic loss or normal profit in the Short Run. They are referred to as short run equilibrium positions. In the long run the individual business will always make normal profit. HINT! hint 6.6.2 The industry Thee.g. long term equilibrium for the industry EG - worked examples and the individual firm The impact of entry and exit on the equilibrium of exams the firm and industry • Profits are a signal for the entry of new businesses. • Losses are a signal for businesses to leave the market. • The long-term equilibrium in the perfect market will be influenced by the entry or exit of individual businesses. a) Entry intoactivity the apple market ACTIVITIES boy and girl-left and right of page activity © Department of Basic Education 2014 Step by step comment comment 92 CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 6 S1 P MC AC S2 E1 Price per unit Price per unit P1 E1 P1 AR1 = MR1 = P1 P2 E2 P2 AR2 = MR2 = P2 E2 S1 S2 Q 0 Quantity (thousands of units) Quantity (units) Figure 6.10 a): The industry Figure 6.10 b): The firm • If individual farmers are earning an economic profit at P1. • New farmers will enter the market, more apples will be supplied. • The market supply curve will shift to the right from S1 to S2. • The Equilibrium price will drop from P1 to P2. • Individual farmers will then earn normal profits. There will be no further reason for new farmers to enter the market. The industry is in equilibrium. b) Exit from the apple market MC S2 AC D1 S1 Price per unit P2 Price per unit E2 P2 AR2 = MR2 = P2 E2 P1 E1 P1 AR1 = MR1 = P1 E1 S2 S1 D1 0 0 Quantity (thousands of units) Quantity (units) Figure 6.11 a): The industry Figure 6.11 b): The firm • If individual farmers are making economic losses, some farmers may leave the industry. • When a few farmers leave the market, fewer apples will be supplied. The market supply curve will shift to the left from S1S1 to S2S2. • The equilibrium price will increase from P1 to P2. Individual farmers will then earn normal profits. There will be no reason for individual farmers to leave the market. • Therefore in a perfect market the long term equilibrium is achieved when individual firms earn a normal profit. c) Longterm equilibrium – normal profit © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS 93

6 Chapter P P MC AC S D Price per unit Price per unit P2 AR = MR = P2 D S Q Q Q2 Quantity (thousands of units) Quantity (units) Figure 6.12 a): The industry Figure 6.12 b): The firm 6.6.3 The supply curve of an individual firm The short-run supply curve of an individual producer is that part of the marginal cost curve that is above the minimum average variable cost. This starts from shut-down point upwards. Below the shut-down point, the firm will not sell any goods. A firm will sell goods if the price is above the shut- down price level. This is shown in Figure 6.13 below: R MC ATC supply curve AVC Cost and revenue shut-down point 0 Quantity Figure 6.13: The supply curve of an individual firm 6.6.4 Shut-down/closing down point Shut-down point A firm will shut down if it cannot meet its average or total variable costs. Hence we conclude that: ACTUAL SHUT-DOWN should only take place when: • TR < TVC • AR < AVC © Department of Basic Education 2014 94 CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 6 R Note the following: e • To show economic profit P1 the AC curve must cut the demand curve. Cost/Revenue • To show normal profit the minimum MC ATC point on AC curve must be at a d P2 AVC tangent to the demand curve. • To show economic loss the c AC curve must not touch P3 AR = MR demand curve. b P4 P5 a 0 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Quantity Figure 6.14: The shut-down/closing down point • Point a: a firm will not produce here because AR < AVC • Point b: it is the lowest price that the firm will charge (shut-down point). It represents the beginning of the supply curve. • Point c: the firm is making an economic loss. Because AR < AC. The loss is minimised because the firm produces where MR = MC. • Point d: the firm is making normal profit (breaking even) because AR = AC. • Point e: the firm is making economic (supernormal) profits because AR > AC. 6.7 How to draw graphs to show various equilibrium positions First draw your TWO axes: Price (P) on the vertical axis and Quantity (Q) on the horizontal axis. Remember, they meet at the origin (0). Note that the labelling of the axes is not the same for all graphs. In showing the various equilibrium positions the following sequence should be followed. PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION 1. Draw the demand curve followed by the MarginalNB revenue curve, (in a NB perfect market D = MR = AR). 2. Then draw the AC curve. Everything is important – do 3. Then draw the MC curve which must cut the AC curve at its minimum not leave out anything! Each HINT! point. step counts for marks. Label 4. Identify profit maximising point. MC = MRhint all axes, curves and graphs. 5. Determine quantity (drop a line from the profit maximizing point to the x-axis). 6. Determine price (extend line upwards from the profit EG - e.g. maximizing worked examples point to the demand curve) and then extend the line horizontal to the y-axis. 7. Compare AR/price to AC to determine profit or loss. exams © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics activity CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS 95

6 Chapter 6.8 Competition policies 6.8.1 Description Competition refers to the existence of free entry into and exit from markets. This ensures that markets are not dominated by certain businesses. 6.8.2 Goals of competition policy • To prevent monopolies and other powerful businesses from abusing their power. • To regulate the formation of mergers and acquisitions who wish to exercise market power. • To stop firms from using restrictive practices like fixing prices, dividing markets etc. 6.8.3 The Competition Act in South Africa The government introduced the Competition Act 89 of 1998 to promote competition in South Africa in order to achieve the following objectives: • promote the efficiency of the economy (its primary aim) • provide consumers with competitive prices and a variety of products • promote employment • encourage South Africa to participate in world markets and accept foreign competition in South Africa • enable SMMEs to participate in the economy • to allow the previously disadvantaged to increase their ownership of businesses 6.8.4 Institutions The Competition Commission It investigates restrictive business practices, abuse of dominant positions and mergers in order to achieve equity and efficiency in the South African economy. The Competition Tribunal It has jurisdiction throughout the Republic. It is a tribunal of record and independent from the other competition institutions. The Tribunal’s main functions are to: grant exemptions, authorise or prohibit large mergers, adjudicate if any misconduct takes place, issue an order for costs on matters presented to it by the Competition Commission. The Competition Appeal Court Its status is similar to the High court. It has jurisdiction throughout the Republic and is a court of record. Its main functions are to review orders made by the Competition Tribunal and amend or confirm these orders. © Department of Basic Education 2014 96 CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 6 Activity 1 Study the diagram below and answer the questions that follow. MARKET STRUCTURE Perfect Monopolistic Oligopoly Monopoly competition competition 1 15 25 50 50 75 85 9 SELLERS BUYERS 1. Define the concept market structure. (2) 2. How many sellers will one find in a monopoly market? (2) 3. In what market are all participants price-takers? Motivate your answer. (4) 4. Explain the shape of the individual demand curve under perfect competition. (4) 5. Under which market structure will you place the following businesses? • KFC • Eskom • Vodacom (6) 6. Explain in your own words the message behind the pie-charts shown above. (4) [22] Answers to activity 1 1. Market structure refers to how a market is organised33(2) 2. One 33(2) 3. Perfect markets 33 there are too many producers and consumers for one producer to influence the price 33(4) 4. Horizontal to the quantity axis/perfectly elastic 3333(4) 5. KFC: monopolistic competition 33 Eskom: monopoly 33 Vodacom: oligopoly 33 (6) 6. Under perfect competition there are many sellers and buyers.3Under monopolistic competition there are many sellers and a few buyers.3 In the oligopoly there are many buyers but few sellers. 3 In a monopoly there is only one seller but many buyers.3(4) [22] © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS 97

6 Chapter Keep going! © Department of Basic Education 2014 98 CHAPTER 6 THE DYNAMICS OF PERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 7 Dynamics of imperfect markets There are a number of different types of imperfect markets, e.g. monopolies, oligopolies and monopolistic competition. An imperfect market is characterised by imperfect competition. Some participants have earlier or exclusive access to information that benefits them in the marketplace at the expense of their competitors. Certain participants will be able to access the market more easily than other participants, i.e. the supply of and demand for products will not be equal, and the matching of buyers to sellers will not be immediate. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS 99

7 Chapter Overview TOPIC CONTENT SCOPE AND DEPTH OF EXAMINABLE CONTENT 7. Examine the dynamics of imperfect Dynamics markets with the aid of cost and of markets: revenue curves Imperfect markets • The dynamics of imperfect • Briefly discuss the cost and revenue tables and graphs markets with the aid of cost and • Draw and interpret graphs revenue curves –– Income/revenue • Define/explain the concept monopoly –– Revenue schedule • Examine the characteristics in detail –– Average and Marginal • Distinguish between natural and artificial monopolies revenue curves • Emphasise and highlight good practical examples of –– Costs businesses in this market –– Cost schedule • Explain the downward slope of the demand curve of –– Average and Marginal cost the monopolist with the aid of a table/graph curves • Briefly discuss with the aid of graphs short and long run positions • Monopolies –– Description/Definition HOT QUESTION: Compare a monopoly with a perfect –– Characteristics competitor in terms of price, output and profit –– Income –– Average and Marginal • Define/explain the concept revenue curves • Examine the characteristics in detail –– Profit and loss in the short • Emphasise and highlight good practical examples of run businesses in this market –– Long term equilibrium • Briefly discuss non-price competition –– Comparison between a • Briefly discuss collusion monopoly and a perfect • Distinguish between price leadership and cartels as competitor (curves, higher forms of collusion prices, lower production, • Broadly outline prices and production levels economic profit) • Broadly outline the rationale of the Kinked demand curve • Oligopolies • Use the graph and briefly explain the kink in the kinked –– Description/Definition demand curve –– Characteristics –– Non-price competition HOT QUESTION: ‘Collusion is a punishable offence in –– Collusion South Africa’. Analyse this phenomenon –– Cartels • Define/explain the concept –– Price leadership • Examine the characteristics in detail –– Prices and levels of production • Emphasise and highlight good practical examples of –– Kinked demand curve businesses in this market • Compare a monopoly to monopolistic competition • Monopolistic competition • Briefly compare monopolistic competition with –– Description/Definition oligopolistic competition –– General characteristics • Briefly discuss product differentiation in this market –– Non-price competition • Briefly discuss non-price competition in this market –– Collusion –– Prices and levels of production HOT QUESTION: Compare monopolistic competition with perfect competition –– A comparison with perfect competition © Department of Basic Education 2014 100 CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 7 7.1 Key concepts Use These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key Economics mobile notes to help you learn these concepts that are used in this study guide. Understand these concepts key concepts. See page well. xiv in the introduction for more. Term Definition Artificial monopoly The barriers to entry are not economic in nature, but are caused by other factors. For example, a patent – this is the legal right of a holder to exclusively manufacture a product Cartel A group of producers whose goal is to form a collective monopoly in order to fix prices and limit supply and competition Collusion An arrangement between businesses with the aim of limiting competition between them by fixing prices Imperfect market When the market price is not a pure reflection of the scarcity (lack) of that product Legal monopoly Monopoly based on laws preventing other companies from competing Monopolistic A market structure with many buyers and sellers where competition entry is relatively easy but the product is differentiated, e.g. toothpaste Monopoly A market structure where only one seller (producer) operates. Entry is blocked and the product has no close substitutes Natural monopoly High development costs prevent others from entering the market. A single business can serve the whole market at a lower price due to economies of scale, being large e.g. water and electricity Non-homogenous Manufacture different variations of their products in order to make it difficult for other companies to copy that specific product Oligopoly A market structure where only a few sellers operate. Entry is difficult and products can be differentiated or standardised Price leadership A situation where one firm fixes a price and the others accept it as the market price © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS 101

7 Chapter 7.2 Monopolies A monopoly exists when there is one seller of a good or service for which there is no close substitute. 7.2.1 Characterictics of monopolies • There is only one seller of the product • There are barriers to entry. These are caused by patents and other forms of intellectual property rights, control over resources, government regulations and decreasing costs. • The monopolist is regarded as a price maker since it is able to influence the market price through changing the quantity it supplies to the market. • The are no close substitutes. The product cannot be easily replaced. Consumers have no choice in price and quality of the product. • There is no competition. One business in the market will control the supply of goods and services. • Products are differentiated and unique. Monopolies manufacture a variety of products which are difficult for other companies to copy. • Large amounts of starting capital are required. Large industries like Eskom and SASOL require millions of starting capital. • Monopolies have legal considerations. New inventions are protected by patent rights. Services, like the Post Office are protected by law and other businesses are prohibited from entering the market. • It is also possible for the monopolist to make an economic profit in the long run. This is because it faces no competition from new entrants as a result of the barriers to entry. Monopolies can be classified as two main groups due to barriers that exist Natural monopolies: High development costs prevent others from entering the market and therefore the government supplies the product. E.g. Electricity in South Africa is provided by the government enterprise, Eskom. It costs billions of rands to build and maintain power stations and therefore there are no other suppliers. Artificial monopolies: Here the barriers to entry are not economic in nature. An example of a barrier is a patent. A patent is a legal and exclusive right to manufacture a product, e.g. Denel Land Systems manufacturing Casspirs. 7.2.2 The demand curve of the monopolist • Under perfect competition the individual producer faces a horizontal demand curve where D = MR = AR, since it is a price taker. • By contrast, the monopolist faces a normal market demand curve which slopes downwards from left to right. Here D = AR. • It is also the market (or industry’s) demand curve, since the monopolist is responsible for the entire output of the industry. © Department of Basic Education 2014 102 CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 7 7.2.3 The marginal revenue curve of a monopolist • Since a monopolist faces a downward sloping demand curve, its marginal revenue curve and its demand curve are not the same curve as is the case with an individual producer under perfect competition. • Under perfect competition, the individual producer is a price taker and can sell any quantity at the market price and therefore faces a horizontal demand curve, which is also its marginal revenue curve. • The demand curve for a monopolist, which is downward sloping, implies that, if it wishes to increase its sales by an additional unit, it must decrease the price of the product. • The lower price applies to all its customers. Its marginal revenue – that is the amount by which total revenue increases if it sells an additional unit – will therefore be less than the price. • The marginal revenue curve and the demand curve are therefore not the same curve. The Marginal revenue curve will be lower than the demand curve. Activity 1 Use the table below of a typical monopolist and plot the revenue curves on the same set of axes. Notice the position of the Marginal revenue curve in relation to the Demand curve. Price Quantity Total revenue Average revenue Marginal revenue – 0 0 0 0 100 1 100 100 100 90 2 180 90 80 80 3 240 80 60 70 4 280 70 40 60 5 300 60 20 50 6 300 50 0 40 7 280 40 –20 30 8 240 30 –40 Answer to activity 1 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 DD = AR 0 MR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Quantity © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS 103

7 Chapter 7.3 Output profit and loss 7.3.1 Revenue • The demand curve for a monopolist is the market The market demand curve and slopes downwards from left to right price will be (DD/AR). See the top graph in Figure 7.1. determined on • Any point on the curve is an indication of the quantity the upper part of of the product to be sold and the price at which trade the AR-curve takes place. • Any price-quantity combination on the demand curve is also its average revenue (AR) curve. • The average revenue from each product is calculated by dividing the total revenue by the quantity = the price. See the bottom graph in Figure 7.1 (left). • The marginal revenue (MR) curve runs below the demand curve (AR) – it always intersects the horizontal axis at a point halfway between the origin and the point of intersection of the demand curve (AR). • The monopolist will try to fix the price above the centre of the demand curve, because only then will his total revenue increase. See Figure 7.1. Note how at Q1 total revenue is at its highest. Q1 intersects the demand curve of the top graph above the centre of the curve. Figure 7.1 Revenue curves of the individual producer 7.3.2 Economic profit in the short term Step 1: Draw your two axes First, draw your TWO axes: Price (vertical) and Quantity (horizontal) – remember, they meet at the 3Price origin (0). Everything counts for marks – do not leave out anything. Now go to step 2. Step 2: 0 Quantity 3 The two Figure 7.2 PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION revenue NB NB curves start on the price axis Price and move down to meet the quantity axis. Draw these axes now. Then go to step 3. It is easy to draw a HINT! hint graph – YOU MUST JUST KNOW HOW. 3MR 3AR Practise makes perfect. 0 Quantity Figure 7.3 e.g. EG - worked examples © Department of Basic Education 2014 104 CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics exams

Chapter 7 Notice how Step 3: the marginal cost This MC curve intersects the AC curve at the minimum curve is in the point of the AC curve. shape of a tick. 3 Price 3 MC 3 AC e 3 MR 3 AR 30 3 Quantity Figure 7.4 Step 4: The most important point on the graph is where MC = MR (look for the dot ● ). At this point: equilibrium/ maximum profit/profit maximisation is reached (all the same point). Step 5: This dot is extended upwards and downwards. Your cost occurs where it meets the AC curve, and your market Practise drawing price occurs where it meets the AR curve (demand steps 1 to 5. Draw these over and over until curve). Remember, a monopoly company will determine the price. you do not make any mistakes. In this way you will be able to draw the economic profit made by a monopoly. 3 Figure 7.5 © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS 105

7 Chapter The graph below shows the economic profit made by a monopoly: Use these points AR = DD (right) as a description in an exam answer. Figure 7.6: The economic profit made by a monopoly • The cost structure of the monopoly is the same as that of competitive businesses. • Determine the point where MC = MR, the point where the production cost of the last unit is equal to the revenue it earns (point e) – profit- maximising production quantity of Q1 on the horizontal axis. • To determine the price at which Q1 is sold, move vertically upwards from e to L on the demand curve. The market price is therefore determined at P. • Total revenue is greater than the short-term total costs. The monopolist makes a profit (due to demand and cost of production). 7.3.3 Economic loss in the short term When you draw the economic loss for the monopolist, the graph stays the same, EXCEPT the AC curve moves to the right - up, and totally misses the AR (demand) curve (see Figure 7.7). Remember: To draw the economic loss, you find the market price (OP) where the dotted line meets AR. Then extend the line further to meet the AC curve – THAT indicates your cost (OC). The total income = Price (OP) × Quantity (OQ) = the area OPNQ The total cost = Cost (OC) × Quantity (OQ) = the area OCLQ. Economic loss = income – cost Practise drawing the economic loss of the monopoly over and over again until you do not make any mistakes. Figure 7.7: The economic loss of the monopoly © Department of Basic Education 2014 106 CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 7 Learn the following THREE bullets as a description for the economic loss of a monopoly: • The monopoly suffers short-term losses when the AC curve lies above Loss the demand curve (DD). Some people • Equilibrium is reached where MR = MC (a loss-minimising situation). argue that a monopolist always makes an economic • The monopoly will produce a quantity Q and sell at price P. The total profit. This is not the case. costs are the area OCLQ; the total revenue is the area OPNQ. The Profitability of a monopolist loss will be that part that is shaded (the area PCLN). depends on the demand for the product as well as the cost of 7.3.4 Comparison of a monopoly and a production. perfect market Monopoly Perfect market 1. Downward sloping DD curve MR Horizontal DD curve curve lies below the DD curve MR curve same as DD curve 2. Price setter (maker) Price-taker 3. Individual business is the industry Individual businesses add up to make the industry 4. Consumer buys less if the selling Business can’t choose its price and if price is high (and vice versa) it sells at a different price it loses out 5. Monopolist produces a lower Larger output and lower prices. output at higher prices and in so Economically efficient quantities doing produces at sub-efficient produced. quantities. It does not produce at the Produces on the lowest point on the minimum point of the LAC curve AC curve 6. Producer and consumer Surpluses bigger surpluses are smaller 7. Products differentiated – unique Product are homogenous – no close substitutes 8. Long-term: can make economic Only normal profit in the long-term profit 7.4 Oligopolies An oligopoly exists when a small number of large companies are able to influence the supply of a product or service to a market. By controlling the supply of the product or service on the market, oligopolies aim to keep its prices and profits high. Oil companies are one of the best examples of an oligopoly. A special type of this market form is a duopoly – an industry with only two producers. 7.4.1 Characteristics of oligopolies • There is limited competition. Only a few suppliers manufacture the same product. • Products may be homogenous or differentiated. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS 107

7 Chapter • This market is characterised by mutual dependence. The decision of one company will influence and will be influenced by the decisions of the other companies. • Oligopolies can frequently change their prices in order to increase their market share. However this can result in a price war. • Extensive use is made non-price measures to increase market share e.g. advertising, efficient service or product differentiation. • Producers have considerable control over the price of their products although not as much as in a monopoly. • If oligopolies operate as a cartel, firms have an absolute cost advantage over the rest of the competitors in the industry. Abnormal high profits may be a result of joint decisions in an oligopoly. • Entry is not easy in an oligopolistic market. This is due to brand loyalty and it also requires a large capital outlay. 7.4.2 Kinked demand curve for the oligopolist • One theory devised by an American economist, Paul Sweezy, can be used to determine the oligopolist’s demand curve. • An oligopolist faces a kinked demand curve. This demand curve consists of two sections. • The top section, the section that relates to high prices is a very elastic slope (i.e. demand is very sensitive to a price change.) • The bottom section, the section that relates to lower prices is very inelastic (i.e. demand is not sensitive to a price change). • To understand the demand curve of an oligopolist, view the graph below. D R12 R10 E R8 Price D 2 9 10 Quantity Figure 7.8: The kinked demand curve of the oligopolist • Suppose the oligopolist is selling at the original/present price of R10 and 9 units of output are sold. Total revenue is R10 × 9 = R90 • If the firm tries to increase profit by increasing the price by R2 to R12, quantity demanded would fall to 2 units and total revenue would decrease to R24 (R12 × 2). • If the firm tries to increase profit by reducing the price by R2 to R8 © Department of Basic Education 2014 108 CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 7 and increasing its total sales, total revenue would be R80. • The oligopolist is therefore faced with a difficult decision because in both instances it will not benefit. • Increasing the price of goods or reducing the price to increase sales will not lead to greater revenue earned. 7.4.3 Non-price competition • Oligopoly firms are reluctant to change prices because a price war will drive prices down and profits will be eliminated. • They make use of non-price measures to attract customers and increase their market share. • An important aspect of non-price competition is to build brand loyalty, product recognition and product differentiation. • This is done by means of advertising and marketing. As a result, oligopoly firms tend to spend a substantial amount of money on this. Other forms of non-price competition include: • extended shopping and business hours • doing business over the internet • after-sales services • offering additional services • loyalty rewards for customers • door-to-door deliveries Examples of firms that use kinds of non-price strategies are those in petrol retailing such as Shell, BP and Caltex and in the banking sector such as ABSA, FNB etc. 7.4.4 Collusion Collusion takes place when rival firms cooperate by raising prices and by restricting production in order to maximise their profits. When there is a formal agreement between firms to collude it is called a cartel. A cartel is a group of producers whose goal is to form a collective monopoly in order to fix prices and limit supply and competition. In general, cartels are economically unstable because there is a great incentive for members not to stick to the agreement, to cheat by cutting prices illegally and to sell more than the quotas set by the cartel. Although there is an incentive to collude there is also an incentive to compete. This has caused many cartels to be unsuccessful in the long term. Some well known cartels are the Organisation of Petroleum Exporting Countries(OPEC) and De Beers diamonds in South Africa. Overt/Formal collusion e.g. cartels are generally forbidden by law in most countries. However, they continue to exist nationally and internationally. Sometimes in an oligopoly market, a dominant firm will increase the price of a product in the hope that its rivals will see this as a signal to do the same. This is referred to as price leadership and is an example of a tacit collusion. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS 109

7 Chapter 7.5 Monopolistic competition See non- price competition for oligopolies on page 109. 7.5.1 Characteristics of monopolistic Some forms are similar for monopolistic competition. Make competition sure you can draw the graphs for • The products are differentiated. Products are similar but not the monopolistic identical. The are similar in that they satisfy the same need of the competitor. consumer. There may be differences in packaging but the product is the same. e.g. sugar and salt. • Differentiated products create opportunities for non-price competition e.g. advertising. • Monopolistic competition displays a hybrid structure. It is a combination of competition and a monopoly. • There are many sellers.This indicates the element of competition. • Entry into the market is easy. • Businesses have little control over the price of the product. Each business sells at its own price since a single price cannot be determined for the differentiated product because a range of prices could apply. • Information for buyers and sellers is incomplete. • Collusion is not possible under monopolistic competition. • Restaurants, plumbers, lawyers, insurance brokers, hairdressers, funeral parlours and estate agents are all examples of monopolistic competitors. 7.5.2 Non-price competition • Differentiated products create opportunities for non-price competition i.e. competition is not based on prices but rather on factors relating to the product’s uniqueness. • Advertising campaigns and further product differentiation are powerful forms of non-price competition. • The greater the product differentiation the less price elastic the demand for the product will be. • Large sums of money are spent on research, development and advertising to build a loyal consumer group. • Therefore brands play a significant role in determining customer loyalty where a consumer may choose one producer over another. Large chain stores e.g. Checkers, Spar etc. have their own brands for some products. Most of these products are exactly the same as known brands. 7.5.3 Prices and production levels in the short-term and long-term • The demand curve for a monopolistic competitor is similar that of a monopolist. • Short term equilibrium (economic profit and economic loss) corresponds with a monopoly, but the demand curve is more price elastic (flatter) due to good substitutes. © Department of Basic Education 2014 110 CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 7 • Long-term equilibrium is characterised by normal profit, due to the ease of entry and exit into the market (similar to a perfect market). The economic profit made in the short-term attracts more businesses to enter the market. 7.5.4 Comparison of monopolistic competition with perfect competition • Both firms make normal profit in the long run. Therefore there is no difference in the long-run between the perfect market and the monopolistic market as far as profit is concerned. • The equilibrium price is higher than in a perfect market. The consumer therefore pays less in the perfect market and more in the monopolistic market. • The monopolistic competitor does not produce at the minimum of the LAC whereas the perfect competitor does. He is less efficient. • The perfect competitor produces more at a lower price while the monopolistic competitor produces less at a higher price. 7.6 Summary of market structures Firm Perfect Monopolistic Oligopoly Monopoly Competition Competition A Number of firms Many Large numbers Very few One B Entry into market Completely free/ Free/Unrestricted Free but not easy Restricted or unrestricted Varies from free to completely restricted blocked C Nature of product Homogenous/ Diffferentiated Homogenous/ Unique Identical Differentiated (with no substitute) D Demand Curve Horizontal – firm Downward sloping Downward sloping Downward sloping price taker but relatively Kinked (INELASTIC) elastic (relatively inelastic Equals the market and elastic) demand curve E Market information Perfect knowledge Incomplete Incomplete Perfect knowledge (Knowledge of i.e. Complete i.e. Complete market conditions) F Control over market No control Limited/some Substantial control Complete control price Price taker control but not price Price setter/ setters makers G Profit/Loss Short-run = Short-run = Economic profit in Economic profit economic profit/ economic profit/ the long-run in short-run and loss loss long-run Long-run = Normal Long-run = Normal profit profit © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS 111

7 Chapter H Decision-making Decision has no Influenced by Influenced by other Independent influence on others other competitors competitors I Examples Fresh produce Restaurants Petrol, Oil Water & electricity supply (Eskom) J Collusion Not possible Not possible Possible Not relevant K Technical effifiency Yes Close Possible Possible L Allocative Yes Close No No efficiency Activity 2 Complete the following table by filling in the missing information: Characteristics Perfect market Monopolistic Oligopoly Monopoly competition So many competitors So few competitors that that a single each business takes the business cannot actions of the others into influence the market account price Market entry Completely free Free Downward sloping Long-term economic Positive profit Seller market power Control over price Some control Considerably more than oligopoly Examples Fast-food Eskom outlets [20] © Department of Basic Education 2014 112 CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 7 Answer to activity 2 Characteristics Perfect market Monopolistic Oligopoly Monopoly competition Number of So many A very large So few competitors One business3 businesses3 competitors that number3 that each business a single business takes the actions cannot influence of the others into the market price account Market entry Completely free Free Free to restricted3 Blocked3 Demand curve3 Slopes from left to Downward Downward sloping Downward sloping = right3 sloping3 market demand3 Long term Normal profit3 Normal profit3 Positive Positive3 economic profit Seller market None, price-taker3 Some3 A whole lot3 Many (price-maker)3 power Control over price None3 Few Considerable3 Considerably more than oligopoly Examples Gold and oil3 Fast-food outlets Petrol and oil3 Eskom [20] © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS 113

7 Chapter Activity 3 Study the following graph and answer the questions that follow: Price SMC SAC a 15 b c 10 5 d MR AR 0 100 Quantity 1. Define the term imperfect market. (2) 2. Motivate why the above graph indicates short-term equilibrium. (4) 3. Which point on the graph indicates profit maximisation? (2) 4. Calculate the economic profit. (6) [14] Answers to activity 3 1. An imperfect market occurs where the market price is not a pure reflection of the scarcity of that product.33(2) 2. The firm is producing where SMC = MR and is therefore in equilibrium in the short term. 3333(4) The slope of the curves indicates a short run. 33 3. d where MR = MC 33(2) 4. Income = Price (15) × Quantity (100) 3 = R1 500 3 Cost = Cost (10) × Quantity (100) 3 = R1 000 3 Economic profit = Income (R1 500) – Cost (R1 000) = R500 33 (6) [14] Keep going! © Department of Basic Education 2014 114 CHAPTER 7 DYNAMICS OF IMPERFECT MARKETS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 8 The reasons for and consequences of market failures Markets can fail for many reasons. The reasons for, and consequences of, market failure are explained in this Topic. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES 115

8 Chapter Overview TOPIC CONTENT SCOPE AND DEPTH OF EXAMINABLE CONTENT 8. Explain the reasons for and consequences of Dynamics of market failures, reflecting on the cost-benefit markets: Market analysis failures • The causes of market failures • Discuss the causes of market failures –– Externalities in detail –– Private cost –– Private benefits HOT QUESTION: Draw a fully labelled –– Social cost graph to demonstrate the basic elements –– Social benefits of the concept externalities –– Missing markets PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION –– Community goods HOTNB QUESTION: Why do governments NB produce goods and services themselves? –– Collective goods –– Public goods –– Merit and demerit goods It is important HINT! to explain how –– Imperfect competition –– Lack of information hint these causes relate to market failure. –– Consumers –– Workers –– Entrepreneurs e.g. EG - worked examples –– Immobility of factors of production –– Labour –– Physical Capital exams –– Technological change –– Imperfect distribution of income and wealth • Consequences of market failures • Discuss the consequences of market failure in detail –– Inefficiencies (Refer to Pareto efficiency) activity • Illustrate productive and allocative inefficiency with the aid of a production –– Productive inefficiency possibility curve (refer to ParetoACTIVITIES boy and girl-left and –– Allocative inefficiency efficiency) right of page –– Externalities –– Negative externalities activity HOT QUESTION: Draw two graphs to –– Positive externalities demonstrate negative and positive elements in the concept “externalities” –– State Intervention • Illustrate with the aid of graphs Step by step comment commen –– Rules and regulations –– Direct control –– Imperfect markets –– Minimum wages –– Maximum prices –– Minimum prices © Department of Basic Education 2014 116 CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 8 –– Taxes and Subsidies –– The price mechanism –– Subsidies on goods and services –– Redistribution of wealth –– Government involvement in production • Cost-benefit analysis • Define/explain the concept –– Description/Definition • Briefly discuss the rationale/reasons –– Reasons for a CBA • Emphasise and highlight good practical –– Applications/examples in South Africa examples • Apply by graphical or numerical illustration HOT QUESTION: Present a case for the use of CBA in practice © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES 117

8 Chapter 8.1 Key concepts These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key Economics concepts that are used in this study guide. Understand these concepts well. TERM DEFINITION Allocative When resources are not allocated in the right proportions and the product mix does Inefficiency not match consumers’ tastes. It is possible to reallocate resources to make one person better off while not making someone else worse off Allocative/Pareto Occurs when resources cannot be readjusted to make one consumer better off without Efficiency making another consumer worse off. There is zero opportunity cost Black market An illegal market in which illegal goods are bought and sold or illegal prices are charged Cost-Benefit An analysis done by government which weighs the costs and benefits of a project to Analysis determine whether it should be carried out Demerit Goods Goods that are seen to be socially harmful e.g. cigarettes, gambling Externalities Costs or benefits to third parties which are not included in the market price of a good Market Failure When the forces of demand and supply fail to allocate resources efficiently Maximum Price/ A price set below the equilibrium price/market price to make goods affordable Price Ceiling Merit Goods Goods that are so beneficial to society that every individual should consume them irrespective of their income e.g health care, education Minimum Price/ A price set above the equilibrium price/market price to allow producers to make a fair Price Floor profit Minimum Wage A wage rate set by the government, below which no employer can pay their workers. It is set above the equilibrium wage rate Negative A cost to a third party which is not included in a market price of a good. It is a difference Externalities between social cost and private cost. E.g. the harmful effect of a product e.g. pollution Non-Excludable Goods whereby individuals can benefit even if they do not pay for it e.g. the television or Goods the police force Non-Rival Goods Goods when consumed by one person will not reduce the consumption by another individual e.g. street lights Positive Externalities The benefit gained by a third party which is not included in the market price Private Benefit The gain a consumer gets from the use of a goods or the gain a producer gets from the sale of a product. E.g. The joy gained by a consumer from driving a car Private Cost The actual cost paid by a consumer when a good is purchased. E.g. R150 000 for a car Producer Subsidies A cash allowance given to a producer to lower the cost of production and allow more goods to be supplied at a lower price Productive/ When resources are not used appropriately to produce the maximum number of goods Technical at the lowest cost and best quality Inefficiency Public Works A government initiative aimed at reducing poverty by creating temporary jobs in areas of Programme infrastructure and other areas SABS – South An institute that monitors the quality of goods in South Africa African Bureau Of Standards Social Benefit The benefit gained by society from the use of a good or service. E.g. taxpayers pay for the maintenance of roads, society will benefit from fewer accidents. It is calculated by adding the private benefit and external benefit Social Cost The cost of a good or service which is paid by society. It is calculated by adding the private cost and external cost. E.g. the air pollution caused by cars, will affect people’s health bills © Department of Basic Education 2014 118 CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 8 8.2 The reasons for market failures There are many reasons for market failure. These include: 8.2.1 Externalities Externalities are costs not included in the pricing of goods/services, and PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION consequently there is a difference between the private costs/benefits and NB the social costs/benefits of production. • Private costs: the cost of producing the good or service which translates into the prices that consumers pay. Also called internal Learn these six reasons for costs. market failure. HINT! • Private benefits: Internal benefits that accrue to those who produce goods and buy these goods, e.g. producing a bicycle (for producer) hint and using the bicycle (consumer). • Social costs: these are total costs incurred by society as a whole. For example the social cost of electricity includes the cost of capital, labour, inputs and the cost of the externalities such as dirty water e.g. EG - worked examples When you and air. Social cost = private costs plus external costs. buy a product in a • Social benefits: this includes the total benefit experienced by polystyrene container, this givesexams rise to a negative society as a whole. For example, municipalities provide clean water externality – pollution! This to society which results in fewer illnesses. Social benefits = private is a form of market benefits plus external benefits. failure. Negative externalities are things like pollution, tobacco smoking and alcohol abuse. The costs of negative externalities are paid by society rather than by the producers. For example, Styvesant produces cigarettes, many illnesses are related to smoking. The treatment for these illnesses is paid activity for by society. ACTIVITIE and girl-l right of p Positive externalities are the positive effects of products to third parties which are not paid for. activity Negative externalities are often over-produced while positive externalities are under-produced. This leads to market failure. 8.2.2 Missing markets Step by step com Markets are incomplete because they cannot meet the demand for certain goods. Public goods (community and collective goods) are in high demand but are not supplied by the market because of the low profit gained from them and the high cost of capital needed to supply them. Since private producers cannot withhold these goods for non-payment, they are reluctant to provide these goods. The government thus provides these goods and services. Public goods This includes community and collective goods and has two features: • Non-rivalry: Consumption by one person does not reduce consumption by another individual, e.g. a lighthouse. • Non-excludability: Consumption can’t be confined to those who pay for it (free riders can use them), e.g. radio and television. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES 119

8 Chapter In addition • Social benefits outstrip private benefits: e.g. health care and education. • Non-rejectability: Individuals are not able to abstain from consumption, e.g. street lighting. • Continuous consumption. E.g. traffic lights. Community goods These are goods such as, defence, police services, prison services, street lighting, flood control, storm water drainage and lighthouses. Collective goods These are goods such as parks, beach facilities, streets. Markets are incomplete and cannot meet the demand for all goods. Government provides public goods, which consist of: Merit and demerit goods • Merit goods: These are highly desirable for general welfare, but not highly rated by the market, e.g. health care, education and safety. If people had to pay the market price for them, very little would be Merit and consumed. The market fails because the market produces less than demerit goods relate to the desired quantity. desirability of • Demerit goods: These are over-consumed goods, e.g. cigarettes, use alcohol and drugs. Thus more of the good is produced than is socially desirable. The government bans or reduces consumption of these products through taxation, and provides information to the population on their harmful effects. 8.2.3 Imperfect competition • Competition in market economies is limited by the power of certain producers to prevent new businesses from entering the market. This is imperfect competition. • Barriers to entry are created because of advertising, a lack of capital and the controlling of resources. • The imperfect market doesn’t allow for price negotiations. • Advertising is used to promote producer sovereignty (dominance), which encourages consumers to buy existing products and allows producers to delay new products from entering the market until it is in their own interest (e.g. businesses have had the technology to produce long-life light bulbs for many years but have chosen not to launch them in the market). 8.2.4 Lack of information Consumers, workers and entrepreneurs do not have the necessary information to make rational decisions. This results in resources not being allocated efficiently. • Consumers: To maximise their benefits, consumers need detailed information about goods and services. Although technology offers this to the consumer, they obviously do have perfect information. • Workers: Are often unaware of job opportunities. • Entrepreneurs: Lack of information on costs, availability and © Department of Basic Education 2014 120 CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 8 productivity of factors of production impacts their effectiveness. 8.2.5 Immobility of factors of production • Labour takes time to move from one area to another. • The supply of skilled labour cannot be increased because of the time it takes to be trained or educated. • Physical capital, like factory buildings or infrastructure such as telephone lines cannot be reallocated easily. • Structural changes like a change from producing plastic packets to paper packets or shifting from labour-intensive production to computer based production requires a change in labourers’ skills, employment and work patterns. This takes time to change. 8.2.6 Imperfect distribution of income and wealth • Income distribution: The market system is neutral on issues of income distribution. • Discrimination: Distorts earnings for women and minority groups, disabled persons and people subject to illness and incapacity. • The market produces goods and services only for those who can afford it. • This leads to some people having too many goods while others have The market can too few goods. be efficient but not • The difference in income occurs because there is a difference in necessarily fair or equitable market power, unequal educational opportunities, discrimination and inheritance. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES 121

8 Chapter 8.3 Consequences/effects of market failures ATTENTION 8.3.1 Inefficiencies NB Two kinds of inefficiencies are possible: 1. Productive inefficiency/Technical inefficiency Learn these four When resources are not used appropriately to produce the maximum consequences of market number of goods at the lowest cost and best quality. failure. 2. Allocative inefficiency Allocative inefficiency means that the types/quantities of goods or services produced are not what is best for consumers. examples A Pareto optimum C Sweetcorn A situation where it is impossible to increase the welfare of one individual without I1 making another worse off. This implies that the welfare of the community is at its maximum. D B ACTIVITIES boy and girl-left and right of page A Flour Figure 8.1: Inefficiencies can be described using a production possibility curve • The Production possibility curve (AA), above, shows a combination of goods that can be produced using all the available resources. comment comment • Any point on the curve shows a combination of goods where resources will be used efficiently. • Therefore any point on the curve indicates Productive/Technical efficiency. • The indifference curve (I1) shows a combination of two goods which gives the consumer the same level of satisfaction. However, if production takes place at point B on the curve, but the demand for goods is actually represented by point C, Allocative inefficiency will occur where the tastes of consumers are not met. • Any point to the left of the curve such as D, indicates that some resources are unused. If this occurs some customers may be deprived of goods. This depicts Allocative and Productive inefficiency. © Department of Basic Education 2014 122 CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 8 8.3.2 Externalities (spill-over effects) Negative externalities Negative externalities bear a private cost, the cost of producing the actual product and a social cost, a cost suffered by society. If the social cost of a good were added to the private cost of a good, the final price would be pushed up and fewer goods would be supplied. This is depicted in Figure 8.2 below. S1 (MSC) D S (MPC) External P1 cost Price P S1 D (MPB) S Q1 Q Quantity Figure 8.2 Negative externalities From the graph it can be seen: • The demand for the cigarettes is represented by DD. • The supply of the product, which is also the marginal private cost (MPC) of the industry, is represented by SS. • As a result of the pollution, the marginal social cost (MSC) is greater than MPC. • If the market is left to its own devices, a quantity Q will be produced at price P. • This is a socially inefficient solution. • Social efficiency requires that MSC be equal to the price of the product. • This occurs at price P1 and quantity Q1. • Fewer goods should be produced at a higher price. • The shaded angle represents the negative externality (welfare loss) to society. The government has used three methods to reduce negative externalities: • The government has carried out campaigns in order to change/ persuade people from causing negative externalities. • Levying taxes on goods that cause negative externalities. E.g. Taxes are levied on cigarettes and alcohol. • Passing laws and regulations to prevent activities that cause negative externalities. E.g. Tobacco companies are not allowed to advertise. There are laws that regulate the amount of air pollution and waste. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES 123

8 Chapter Positive externalities If people acknowledged the social benefit of a good, they would demand more of that good. The price of such a good would therefore increase. This is depicted in the Figure 8.3 below. D1 D S (MPC) P1 Price P External benefit D1 (MSB) S D (MPB) Q Q1 Quantity Figure 8.3 Positive externalities From the graph it can be seen: • The supply of education, which is also the marginal social cost, is represented by SS. • The demand for school education, which is also the marginal private benefit (MPB) of the industry, is represented by DD. The cost of school fees is P and the quantity demanded and supplied is Q. • If the cost of school fees is P, most learners will not be able to afford it. • The demand curve D1D1 also represents the marginal social benefit. (MSB), that is, the level of education that should be demanded. • As a result of the benefits of education, MSB is greater than MPB. • If the market is left to its own devices, a quantity Q will be produced at price P. • There would be social inefficiency in the market since not enough education is being demanded. • However, if social benefits are acknowledged, a quantity Q1 will be produced at price P1. • More education would be demanded, this will lead to social efficiency. • The shaded angle represents the positive externality (the welfare gain) to society. The government encourages positive externalities by: • Advertising on the radio or television. • Providing education, health care and other services at a low cost or free. • Providing consumer subsidies. • Consumer subsidies lower the cost of a good and encourage its usage. © Department of Basic Education 2014 124 CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 8 8.3.3 Government intervention Rules and regulations a) Direct controls The government can pass laws or use existing legislative framework to control businesses that generate negative externalities. b) Imperfect markets Firms in an imperfect market supply a limited quantity of goods and services at a very high price. The government uses its laws on competition to prevent exorbitant prices charged by firms, to ensure entry to the market is free, prevent harmful collusion and encourage foreign competition which helps keep prices of goods low. c) Establishing minimum wages • When the government enforces a minimum wage, it means workers have to be paid a certain wage amount and not anything less than this. • The Figure 8.4 below shows that if the wage rate is set at W, the corresponding demand and supply of labour will be Q. • If a minimum wage of W1 is set, the demand for labour will decrease from Q to Q1. Some people may become unemployed due to the introduction of a minimum wage. • However, the quantity of labour supplied will increase from Q to Q2. • More people will offer their labour because of the higher wage. D S W1 Minimum wage Wage rate W S D Q1 Q Q2 Quantity Figure 8.4 Establishing minimum wages d) Setting maximum prices/price ceilings • The government sets a maximum price ceiling below the market price to make goods more affordable. • Maximum prices allow the poor greater access to certain goods and services. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES 125

8 Chapter • A maximum price is set on goods such as basic foods, housing and transport. • In South Africa the price of petrol, diesel fuel and paraffin are controlled at their maximum prices. D S Price P P1 Maximum price S Shortage D Q1 Q Q2 Quantity Figure 8.5 Setting maximum prices • Initially the market equilibrium price is P and equilibrium quantity is Q. • The government intervenes and passes a law that milk cannot be sold for more than P1. • The effect of this maximum price is that quantity supplied decreases to Q1 and quantity demanded increases to Q2. • There is a shortage of milk equal to the difference between Q1 and Q2. • A shortage creates a problem of how to allocate milk to consumers. • Black markets often develop where people can obtain milk. A black market is an illegal market in which either illegal goods are bought and sold or illegal prices are charged. • Maximum prices may cause a shortage of goods but they do improve the welfare of some consumers since goods can be purchased at lower prices. e) Setting minimum prices/price floors • The government sets a minimum price at some point above the market price. • This is done to enable producers to make a comfortable profit and thus encourages them to supply important essential goods. © Department of Basic Education 2014 126 CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 8 D S Surplus P1 Minimum price Price P S D Q1 Q Q2 Quantity Figure 8.6 Setting minimum prices • Consider the market for wheat. • The market equilibrium price is P and the equilibrium quantity is Q. • If the government sets a minimum price at P1, farmers will be earn greater profits and supply more wheat. Quantity supplied will therefore increase to Q2. • However, quantity demanded will decrease to Q1. • There would be a surplus of wheat equal to the difference between Q2 and Q1. • A surplus means the government will have to buy the extra wheat and dump it locally or abroad. • Although minimum prices may cause a surplus they do encourage the supply of important food stuffs. f) Taxes and subsidies Levying of taxes Governments intervene in the market by levying taxes to recover the external cost. These taxes will increase the price and will result in a decrease in production. This could help to reduce a negative externality such as pollution. Providing Producer Subsidies • The government provides subsidies to producers in order to encourage them to increase the production of goods. Supply increases. • Producer subsidies are often given to suppliers of agricultural products such as milk, wheat and maize. • Subsidies lower the cost of producing goods and thus the market price of these goods is lowered. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES 127

8 Chapter S D S1 subsidy P P1 Price D S S1 Q Q1 Quantity Figure 8.7 Taxes and subsidies For example, if we look at Figure 8.7: • The market price of rice is P and the corresponding quantity is Q. • If the government subsidises the production of rice, the market price will decrease to P1 with corresponding quantity Q1. • The lower price, P1, allows the poor to purchase more rice. g) Redistribution of wealth • Traditional methods e.g. the levying of various taxes and the provision of free services, services in kind and cash benefits to the poor. • Implementing Redress methods e.g. the use of law to enforce redistribution. It includes BEE, affirmative action, empowerment, land restitution, land redistribution and property subsidies (for RDP houses). The government can use other ways to improve income distribution and overcome market failure: • Transfers income directly to the poor e.g. child support grants, unemployment benefits etc. • Provides goods free of charge e.g. community goods, education etc. • Implements employment creation programmes e.g. public works programme. • Subsidising merit goods e.g. subsidising arts and cultural events. • Imposes taxes and laws on demerit goods to discourage consumption. • Uses fiscal and monetary policy to achieve macroeconomic stability. • Makes sure that consumers are informed about products through legislation. The South African Bureau of Standards (SABS) checks consumer goods in South Africa. • Tries to prevent misleading advertising. (Advertising Standards Authority) © Department of Basic Education 2014 128 CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 8 8.4 Cost-benefit analysis (CBA) 8.4.1 Description In both private and public sectors project evaluations are done in terms of cost and benefits. In the private sector feasibility studies are done which PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION also provides for legal aspects relating to externalities. Expected private NB costs and benefits are taken into account. In the public sector a Cost Benefit Analysis is done which takes into Learn these three points account expected social costs and social benefits of providing such goods about cost benefit analysis. HINT! and services. hint 8.4.2 Reasons for cost benefit analysis • Market signals e.g. price help to allocate resources through demand and supply. e.g. EG - worked examples • Goods supplied by the government such as roads, bridges etc. are provided free. • With the absence of market signals, decisions on the desirability of a project may be subjective. exams • Objective criteria may be required to ensure economic efficiency in resource allocation. • CBA brings greater objectivity to decision making. • This is done by identifying all the relevant benefits and costs of a project so that an informed decision can be made. activity 8.4.3 Applying the CBA (an example) ACTIVITIE and girl-l CBA is usually applied to projects where it is expected there will be a right of p significant difference in private and social costs and benefits. activity Imagine the Gautrain project, a rail service that connects Hatfield in Tshwane with Johannesburg and the OR Tambo International Airport. Private costs would include: Private benefits would include: Step by step com • The cost of land. • Train fares. • The cost of building materials and • Subsidies from government. equipment. • Money from allowing companies • Transport costs. to advertise. • Labour costs. • Overhead costs etc. External costs would include: External benefits would include: • Pollution. • Employment and income. • Destruction of plants, animals and • Opportunities for new insects. businesses. • Resettlement for people whose • Time saved because of the high homes were expropriated. speed of the train. • Increased traffic in certain areas and • Fewer accidents and less traffic. blockages of certain driving routes. • Less strain on medical facilities. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES 129

8 Chapter Once all benefits and costs were determined it was eventually decided that the idea of the Gautrain would benefit society more than harm it. Planning for the Gautrain started in 2000 but building only started in 2006. Activity 1 Study Figure 8.8 and answer the questions that follow. Figure 8.8 1. What economic technique for enumerating and evaluating is depicted in the illustration? (2) 2. Give TWO recent examples of potential ‘operations’ in South Africa that will fit into the illustration. (2) 3. List ONE social benefit of each of the above projects. (4) [8] Answers to activity 1 1. Cost benefit analysis 33(2) 2. Gautrain 3 Coega 3(2) Any other relevant fact. 3. Gautrain: Better infrastructure 33More effective transport33 Coega: Job creation33/increased standard of living 33 Any other relevant fact. (any 2 × 2) (4) [8] © Department of Basic Education 2014 130 CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 8 Activity 2 Distinguish between merit and demerit goods. [8] Answer to activity 2 • Taxation, subsidies and legislation are used to control merit and demerit goods. 33 • Merit goods: higher consumption of goods is regarded as good for society 33 government makes use of subsidies 33 (distribute condoms). 33 • Demerit goods: government imposes taxes to discourage consumption 33 (cigarettes). 33 [8] Activity 3 Discuss the features of collective goods. [8] Answer to activity 3 • Non-rivalry: 33 Consumption by one person does not reduce consumption by another individual 33 e.g. a lighthouse 33 • Non-excludability: 33 Consumption can’t be confined to those who pay for it (free riders can use it) 33 e.g. radio and television 33 [8] Activity 4 Discuss the distribution of wealth and income as a consequence of market failure. [8] Answer to activity 4 • Through the national budget and taxation33 • Change the distribution of income by: 33 Subsidies, transferring payments to poor households, providing goods and services free of charge, implementing job creation programmes33 • Regulatory measures: 33 Land reform, labour legislation, preferential access to government procurement contracts, black economic empowerment policies 33 [8] © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES 131

8 Chapter Activity 5 Study the following illustration and answer the questions that follow: 1. Identify the negative externality depicted in the illustration. (2) 2. List TWO measures that can be applied by government to reduce this externality. (2) 3. What is the liability of the factory in this regard? (2) 4. What effect will this have on consumer prices? (2) [8] Answers to activity 5 1. Pollution 33 2. Legal actions 3and taxes 3 (any 1) 3. To reduce the pollution 33 4. Consumer prices will increase 33 [8] Keep going! © Department of Basic Education 2014 132 CHAPTER 8 THE REASONS FOR AND CONSEQUENCES OF MARKET FAILURES Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 9 Economic growth and economic development Overview TOPIC CONTENT SCOPE AND DEPTH OF EXAMINABLE CONTENT 9. Compare South African growth and develop- Economic ment policies in terms of international bench- growth & marks, also highlight the North/South divide Development • Background • Distinguish between growth and development –– Economic growth • Distinguish between government policies, –– Economic development strategies and initiatives • The demand-side Approach • Discuss the demand-side approach in detail –– Growth and Development • Focus on discretionary changes in –– Monetary policy monetary and fiscal policies with the aim –– Fiscal policy of changing the level of aggregate demand and therefore output (Real GDP) –– South Africa’s Approach • Analyse SA’s approach in terms of its –– Monetary policy monetary policy Interest rate changes Open market transactions • Focus on: the SARB which is responsible Moral suasion for the implementation of the policy. Its primary goal is to protect the value of our –– Fiscal Policy currency Progressive personal income tax Wealth tax • Analyse South Africa’s approach in terms Cash benefits of fiscal policy Natura benefits • Focus on: the budgetary process, the Other redistribution purpose of fiscal policy to stimulate Land restitution and redistribution macroeconomic growth and employment Subsidies on property and to ensure a desirable redistribution of income • The supply-side Approach –– Creation of growth • Discuss the supply-side approach in detail –– Aggregate supply and demand HOT QUESTION: Critically analyse the use of –– South Africa’s approach demand and supply-side policies in South –– Efficiency and effectiveness of markets Africa –– Business efficiency –– The cost of doing business © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 9 ECONOMIC GROWTH AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT 133

9 Chapter • Evaluate the approaches of the growth and • Discuss South Africa’s growth and development policies used in South Africa development policies in detail –– Growth and Development Policies • Appraise South Africa’s growth and –– Reconstruction and Development development policies policy (RDP) • Evaluate (benchmark) elements of South –– Growth Employment and Redistribution Africa’s growth and development policies Programme (GEAR) from given data –– National Skills Development Strategy (NSDS) HOT QUESTION: Analyse South Africa’s –– Accelerated and Shared Growth Growth and Development Plan (GDP) in Initiative for South Africa (ASGISA) terms of growth and development objectives –– Joint Initiative on Priority Skills Acquisition (JIPSA) –– Expanded Public Works Programme (EPWP) –– The New Growth Path (NGP) –– National Development Plan (NDP) –– Small Business Development Promotion Programme –– Black Economic Empowerment Programmes • The North/South divide • Compare the standard of living between –– Unequal standards of living North/South countries –– Per capita income • Explain the positive/negative impact of –– Life expectancy globalisation on developing countries –– Education • Explain the negative environmental effects –– Challenges of Globalisation as a result of the economic activities in –– Poverty both North and South –– Growth –– Trade –– Environment –– Countries in the North –– Countries in the South © Department of Basic Education 2014 134 CHAPTER 9 ECONOMIC GROWTH AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 9 Use 9.1 Key concepts mobile notes to help you learn these These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key Economics key concepts. See page concepts that are used in this study guide. Understand these concepts xiv in the introduction well. for more. Term Definition Accelerated and Shared An initiative to promote development strategies, Growth initiative for e.g. infrastructure and skills development South africa (ASGISA) Broad Based Black Has the goal of the sustainable (able to continue) economic empowerment distribution of wealth across as broad a spectrum (BBBEE) of South African society as possible, especially the most vulnerable such as women, mainly through ownership and management of business enterprises Black economic An earlier policy similar to BBBEE, with the aims empowerment (BEE) of distributing wealth to and developing skills in black citizens in post-apartheid South Africa Development Bank of Promotes development in the Southern African Southern Africa (DBSA) region by financing important development projects demand-side approach The focus is on attempts to increase aggregate demand in an economy. Fiscal and monetary policy can be used economic development The process by which the standard of living improves economic development A policy that involves the interaction of economic, policy social and human development economic growth An increase in the productive capacity of an economy over time. It is a change in the real GDP economic growth policy A policy that helps to increase the annual total production or income in the economy Growth, employment and A strategy to promote economic growth, increase redistribution (Gear) employment and redistribute income Globalisation The worldwide interaction of economies with trade as an important element Integrated Manufacturing A strategy to strengthen institutional capacity to Strategy (IMS) deliver services that will facilitate development Joint initiative on Priority An initiative to aid the development of urgently Skills acquisition (JIPSA) needed skills to facilitate job creation Life expectancy Expresses in number of years how long a child born today is expected to live National Growth Path Initiatives to stimulate economic growth (NGP) North-South divide Refers to the developed countries in the Northern hemisphere and the developing countries in the Southern hemisphere © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 9 ECONOMIC GROWTH AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT 135

9 Chapter Public and Private Sector These are contracts between a public sector Partnerships (PPP) institution/municipality and a private business, in which the design, financing, building and operation of public sector projects is managed by the private business Reconstruction and A development policy to improve service delivery Development Programme to the poor and create an environment for human (RDP) development South African Reserve Central bank of South Africa with the main goal to Bank (SARB) maintain price stability, thereby promoting balanced and sustainable growth Small, Medium and Micro A small business that has a small share of the Enterprises (SMMEs) market place; operates independent of larger enterprises; employs few people; and is Learn the managed directly by owners difference between growth and Supply-side approach Policies aimed at increasing the aggregate supply development initiatives. 9.2 Economic growth and economic development The difference between economic growth and economic development Economic growth Economic development • Increase in a country’s real gross • Increase in a country’s real gross domestic product domestic product per capita over • It is measured by the increase time in the production of goods and • A process that concentrates services over time on peoples’ standards of living, self-respect and freedom of choice • Growth should lead to development 9.3 Demand-side approach 9.3.1 Growth and Development A demand-side approach includes discretionary changes in monetary and fiscal policies with the aim of changing the level of aggregate demand. PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION Monetary policy is driven by the South African Reserve Bank (SARB). It NB NB prices by managing inflation. aims to stabilise Fiscal policy is driven by the Department of Finance. It aims to facilitate government, political and economic objectives. When you HINT! A demand-side approach to economic growth and development does not only depend on fiscal and monetary policy. It is dependent on all hint prepare for the exam, memorise components of aggregate demand, that is, C, I, X and G. CONCEPTS FIRST! e.g. EG - worked examples © Department of Basic Education 2014 136 CHAPTER 9 ECONOMIC GROWTH AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 9 9.3.2 South African approach The South African approach uses both monetary and fiscal measures to influence aggregate demand in the economy. Monetary policy The South African Reserve Bank (SARB) as the central bank in South Africa formulates the monetary policy. They use the following instruments: • Interest rate changes It is used to influence credit creation by making credit more expensive or cheaper. The exchange rate is stabilised by encouraging inflow or outflows. • Open market transactions To restrict credit the SARB sells securities. When banks buy these securities money flows from banks to the SARB. The banks have less money to lend and cannot extend as much credit as before. To encourage credit creation the SARB buys securities. Money flows into the banking system. • Moral suasion The SARB consults with banks to act in a responsible manner based on the prevailing economic conditions. • Cash Reserve Requirements Banks are required to hold a certain minimum cash reserve in the central bank. Banks have a limited amount to give out as credit. Fiscal policy South Africa’s fiscal policy is put into practice through the budgetary process. The main purpose of fiscal policy is to stimulate macroeconomic growth and employment, and ensure redistribution of wealth. The following instruments are used: • Progressive personal income tax Higher income earners are taxed at higher tax rates. These taxes are used to finance social development. The poor benefit more than those with higher incomes. • Wealth taxes Properties are levied (taxed) according to their market values. Transfer duties are paid when properties are bought. Securities (shares and bonds) are taxed when traded. Capital gains tax is levied on gains on the sale of capital goods (e.g. properties, shares). Estate duties are paid on the estates of the deceased. These taxes are used to finance development expenditures which benefit the poor more often. • Cash benefits Old age pensions, disability grants, child support and unemployment insurance are cash grants. These are also known as social security payments. • Benefits in kind (natura benefits) These include the provision of healthcare, education, school meals, protection etc. When user fees are charged, poor or low income earners pay less or nothing. Limited quantities of free electricity and water are provided. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 9 ECONOMIC GROWTH AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT 137

9 Chapter • Other redistribution Public works programmes, e.g. the Strategic Integrated Projects (SIP) provides employment subsidies and other cash and financial benefits such as training, financing and export incentives. • Land restitution and land redistribution Land restitution is the return of land to those that have lost it due to discriminatory laws in the past. Land redistribution focuses on land for residential (town) and production (farm) for previously disadvantaged groups. The money for these programmes is provided in the main budget. • Subsidies on properties It helps people to acquire ownership of fixed residential properties. E.g. government’s housing subsidy scheme provides funding to all people earning less than R3 500 per month. 9.4 The supply-side approach 9.4.1 Creation of growth A supply-side approach includes anything that can influence the aggregate supply of goods and services, with the focus on microeconomic components, e.g. competition and potential output. Government intervention aims to facilitate the smooth operation of markets in order to stimulate growth and development. 9.4.2 South African approach The South African approach aims at improving the effectiveness and efficiency of markets. This requires: • Markets to operate more equitably and inclusively: More blacks must be accommodated in the mainstream economy if it is to work efficiently. • Business efficiency: Taxes must be collected efficiently, capital formation must increase, human resources must be supported to improve, and free advisory services must be made available so that business efficiency improves. • The cost of doing business must be lowered: transport, communication and energy costs must decrease. © Department of Basic Education 2014 138 CHAPTER 9 ECONOMIC GROWTH AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 9 9.5 Evaluation of the South African approaches used in South Africa 9.5.1 Growth and development policies Growth Development Macroeconomic policies Development policies These include measures to achieve the These include measures aimed at achieving industrial, agricultural following macroeconomic objectives: and human development: 1. Higher economic growth 1. Microeconomic initiatives 2. High levels of employment • Facilitating increased competition, opening up resource 3. Price stability markets, enabling land-use and environmental policy. 4. Exchange rate stability 2. Social care 5. Economic equity • Social welfare and security and poverty alleviation • Policies to redress past inequalities, including Employment Equity and BEE/BBBEE Increased economic growth leads to more tax revenue which can be used to • Affirmative action provide more social goods and services • Land redistribution and restitution with the aim of achieving economic 3. Macroeconomic characteristics and desired outcomes: development. • Standard of living low – increase the per capita income. • Unemployment high – create more employment, e.g. public All the above measures should be sector work programme. evaluated in terms of international • Productivity low – improve the level of knowledge, skills and benchmarks. motivation, e.g. JIPSA. At certain periods, the South African government has focused its initiatives on economic growth, while at other points, policy emphasis has shifted to economic development (see Figure 1 below). Figure 9.1 Growth and development policies The main growth and development policies are: 1. Reconstruction and Development Programme (RDP) The main strategy was to alleviate poverty and address the inequalities and shortfalls in social services by focusing on job creation, welfare, housing, transport, land reform, healthcare, education, training, water and sanitation. Evaluation thus far: • Meeting basic needs: government creates an increased demand for goods and services. The expanded public works programmes were mostly labour intensive. This helped alleviate unemployment and poverty slightly. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 9 ECONOMIC GROWTH AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT 139

9 Chapter • Some social achievements: building houses, providing clean water, electrification, land reform, and healthcare. • Real GDP growth erratic since 1994, unemployment in formal sector increased. • Key objectives of poverty reduction and improved service delivery hardly successful. 2. Growth, Employment and Redistribution (GEAR) The main strategy was to strengthen economic development, redistribute income and create socio-economic opportunities for the poor. Evaluation thus far: • Mixed outcomes. • Brought greater financial discipline and macroeconomic stability. • Real reduction in fiscal deficit (less than 3% in terms of international benchmarks). • Inflation has dropped mostly to within inflation targets. • Foreign exchange reserves increased in most regards. • Failure to create sustainable job opportunities. • Failure to redistribute wealth more evenly. 3. Accelerated and Shared Growth Initiative for South Africa (ASGISA) Its objective is to co-ordinate government initiative to create economic development: The key elements are: • Halve unemployment and poverty by 2014. • Accelerate economic growth to an average of 6% between 2010 and 2014. Evaluation thus far: • Growth in infrastructure investment, especially in the public sector. • Employment growth has lagged behind economic growth – reason real wage increases are higher than productivity. • The second economic strategy helped slightly to reduce unemployment through the Expanded public Works Programme. • Poor economic growth and high unemployment for the youth. 4. Joint Initiative on Priority Skills Acquisitions (JIPSA) It is the skills development arm of ASGISA. Focus is on skills development, especially through the SETAS. 5. Expanded Public Works Programme (EPWP) It is a nationwide government intervention to create employment using labour-intensive methods, and to give people skills they can use to find jobs when their work in the EPWP is done. 6. The New Growth Path (NGP) Its aim is to enhance growth, create employment and create greater equity. The strategy is to identify key sectors as “job drivers” and promote and support industries and sectors that can drive job creation. © Department of Basic Education 2014 140 CHAPTER 9 ECONOMIC GROWTH AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 9 Focus is to: • Create 5 million jobs by 2020, reducing unemployment from 25% to 15%. 7. National Development Plan (NDP) It sets out to expand economic opportunities through investment in infrastructure, more innovation, private investment and entrepreneurship. 8. Small Business Development Promotion Programme (SBDPP) It was designed to deliver support and services to small, medium and micro enterprises. • Department of Trade and Industry (DTI), Industrial Development Corporation (IDC) and the National Small Business Act offer these services. • Laws are revised to help change power imbalances. 9. Black Economic Empowerment Programmes (BEE) The Black Empowerment Act and Employment Equity Act were designed to assist in the transformation and redress of previously disadvantaged groups. Measures are implemented to ensure redress and affirmative action in the workplace and business environment. 9.6 The North/South divide The table below shows different ways to distinguish between developed countries (in the North) and developing countries (in the South). North (developed) South (developing) Standard of living: • Real GDP per capita • High • Low • Life expectancy • 75 years • 48 years • Education: Literacy level • High • Low Globalisation inequalities: • Poverty level • Low • High • Economic growth • High • Low • Production and trade • Manufacturing goods • Raw material • Receive subsidies • Agriculture/mining without subsidies Environment: • Mass production and • Mainly responsible for • Affects developing countries more consumption damages the ozone damaging the ozone layer negatively layer, caused by pollution and toxic waste Sustainable development: • The pattern of development that • Practices used in production • Production practices do not promote permits future generations to live are more in favour of sustainable development as well as the current generation sustainable development © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 9 ECONOMIC GROWTH AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT 141

9 Chapter Activity 1 Study the cartoon below and answer the questions that follow: 1. What is the message behind the cartoon? (2) 2. List any TWO countries involved in this phenomenon. (2) 3. List any TWO products displayed in the cartoon. (4) [8] Answers to activity 1 1. Globalisation 33(2) 2. USA 3and Japan 3(2) 3. Motor vehicles 33and fuel33(4) [8] © Department of Basic Education 2014 142 CHAPTER 9 ECONOMIC GROWTH AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 9 Activity 2 Study the cartoon below and answer the questions that follow: 1. What is the message behind the cartoon? (2) 2. What is the main objective of Broad-Based Black Economic Empowerment? (2) [4] Answers to activity 2 1. The people are dissatisfied about the way the government is handling Black Economic Empowerment (corruption and nepotism). 33(2) 2. To advantage the previously disadvantaged section of the population.33(2) [4] © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 9 ECONOMIC GROWTH AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT 143

9 Chapter Activity 3 Distinguish between economic growth and economic development. [8] Answer to activity 3 Economic growth Economic development • A process by which the • A process that concentrates on productive capacity of the people’s standard of living, self- economy increases over respect and freedom of choice. 33 time. 33 • Growth should lead to development. • Leads to rising levels of 33 national output and income. • The ultimate aim of economic 33 policy is an improved standard of • Is an increase in real gross living of the population per capita domestic product (GDP).33 by means of economic growth and development. 33 (any 2 × 2) × 2 [8] Activity 4 Explain unequal standards of living as a characteristic of the North/South divide. [6] Answer to activity 4 • The real per capita income in developing countries is low compared to developed countries, 3 e.g. 87% of the world’s total income is produced by 15% of the world’s population 3 • Life expectancy in developing countries is as low 3 as 47 years compared to a life expectancy of over 80 years in a country like Sweden 3 • Low levels of education 3 the adult literacy rate determines the effectiveness of education 3 [6] Keep going! © Department of Basic Education 2014 144 CHAPTER 9 ECONOMIC GROWTH AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 10 South Africa’s industrial policies and their suitability in terms of international best practice Overview TOPIC CONTENT SCOPE AND DEPTH OF EXAMINABLE CONTENT 10. Justify South Africa’s industrial development Economic policies and their suitability in terms of growth and international best practice development: Industrial • Industrial development in South Africa development • Define/explain the concept –– Industrial Development Policies policies • Briefly discuss the reasons for –– National Industrial Policy Framework industrial development (NIPF) • Justify South Africa’s Industrial –– Industrial Policy Action Plans (IPAP) Development Policies –– Industrial development Strategies • Briefly explain South Africa’s Industrial –– National Research and Development Development Strategies Strategy (NRDS) –– Integrated Manufacturing Strategy (IMS) –– Focus of these Policies and Actions –– Targeted industries, sectors and regions –– Sectors with potential –– Special Economic Zones –– Southern Africa © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE 145

10 Chapter • Regional Development • Define/explain the concept –– Aims • Briefly discuss regional development –– Regional development in South Africa –– International best practice for regional development • South Africa’s endeavours • Briefly discuss Spatial Development –– Spatial Development Initiatives (SDIs) Initiatives (SDIs) in South Africa –– Industrial Development Zones (IDZs) • Briefly discuss Industrial Development –– Special Economic Zones (SEZs) Zones (IDZs) in South Africa –– Corridors • Briefly discuss Special Economic Zones (SEZs) in South Africa –– Strategic Integrated Projects (SIPs) • Briefly discuss corridors in South Africa –– Infrastructure Plan • Incentives to encourage industrial • Critically discuss the incentives used development by the SA government to improve –– Small Businesses Support Program industrial development –– SEDA Technology Program (STP) –– Skills Support Program (SSP) –– Critical Infrastructure Facilities (CIP) –– Custom Free Incentives –– Foreign Investment Incentives –– Strategic Investment Program –– Services to Business Processes • Appropriateness of South Africa’s • Briefly discuss the appropriateness of industrial policies SA endeavours –– Success factors • Evaluate the appropriateness of the –– External Limitations South African industrial development –– Internal Limitations strategies in terms of international benchmark criteria • Appropriateness of South Africa’s regional development policies • Small business development • The appropriateness of Black Economic Empowerment in the SA economy –– Best practice for regional development – Benchmarks criteria: –– Free Market orientation –– Competitiveness –– Sustainability –– Good governance –– Provisioning of resources –– Investment of social capital –– Integration –– Partnerships CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR © Department of Basic Education 2014 146 IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 10 10.1 Key Concepts Use mobile notes to help you learn these key These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key concepts. Find out more Economics concepts that are used in this study guide. Understand about mobile notes these concepts well. on page xiv in the introduction. Term Definition Black Business Supplier An incentive for black businesses consisting of an 80% Development Programme cash grant to help increase the number of cash suppliers (BBSdP) Critical Infrastructure Offers cash grants for projects that require new, expanded Programme (CIP) or improved infrastructure Department of Trade and Provides a competitive, socially responsible environment Industry (DTI) for investment, trade and enterprise development. It helps broaden participation in the economy to strengthen economic development; and it promotes structural transformation of the economy Foreign Investment Offers cash grants for foreign investors who invest in new Grant (FIG) manufacturing businesses in South Africa General agreement on A multilateral agreement regulating international trade. Its tariffs and trade (GATT) purpose is to reduce tariffs and other trade barriers Industrial Development Set up by government to promote economic growth Corporation (IDC) and industrial development in South Africa and Africa. It promotes entrepreneurship by building competitive industries and enterprises based on sound business principles Industrial Development These are purpose-built industrial estates that are Zone (IDZ) physically enclosed and linked to an international port or airport e.g. Coega. Businesses are encouraged to open in IDZs by being offered improved tax rates or incentives Integrated Manufacturing A strategy to strengthen institutional capacity to deliver Strategy (IMS) services that will facilitate development industrial development Refers to policies that are aimed at the encouragement of industrial investment and greater industrial efficiency Regional industrial Refers to policies that are aimed at increasing the development economic livelihood of specific areas or geographical regions Southern African An inter-governmental organisation whose goal is to Development Community further socio-economic cooperation and integration, as (SADC) well as political and security cooperation among 15 Southern African states Spatial Development Initiated to attract infrastructure and business Initiatives (SDI) investments to neglected and underdeveloped areas, e.g. Maputo Corridor Small and Medium A progamme that offers grants paid to local and foreign Enterprise Development manufacturers starting new businesses Programme (SMedP) Skills Support Programme A cash incentive granted for skills development (SSP) © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE 147

10 Chapter 10.2 Industrial development policies in South Africa 10.2.1 Industrial development policies Reasons for industrial development • Exploit the world economy to trade and acquire knowledge. • Maintain macroeconomic stability. • Achieve high rates of savings and investment. • Establish large scale manufacturing, agricultural, mining and services production. • Diversification of the economy. • Develop domestic manufacturing capacity to increase exports. • Create jobs. • Develop and maintain appropriate incentives to attract investors. • Contribute to the industrial development of the African continent. National Industrial Policy Framework (NIPF) • Is the industrialisation policy of the Department of Trade and Industry. • Aims: 1. To make the economy more diverse so that exports can increase. 2. To make industrialisation more intensive in the long run. 3. To promote the development of labour-intensive industries. 4. Greater participation by disadvantaged groups and development of marginalised areas. 5. Increase potential for large scale production. Industrial Policy Action Plans (IPAP) • As part of the NIPF, the DTI developed a revised three-year rolling action plan each year with a ten year outlook. First Industrial Policy Second Industrial Third Industrial Policy Action Plan (IPAP-1), Policy Action Plan Action Plan (IPAP-3), 2007 (IPAP-2), 2011 2012 Establish a new support Increase the Launch manufacturing programme for the availability of Competitiveness clothing and textile financing for industrial Enhancement industry development Programmes Provide a programme Improve the Develop special to assist the motor procurement policy economic zones industry under BBBEE policy including IDZs Strengthening the Strengthening the Provide government Competitions Act trade policy support for regional Increase energy savings economic development Make business Reduce anti- Encourage integration management more competitive practices of South Africa into efficient and increase Southern African job creation region CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR © Department of Basic Education 2014 148 IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 10 10.2.2 Industrial development strategies • National Research and Development Strategy (NRDS) • Integrated Manufacturing Strategy –– The IMS focus on improving competitiveness in manufacturing by looking at a range of factors, such as input prices, improving infrastructure, technology and innovation, skills and effective regulation. Focus of these policies and actions • Targeted industries, sectors and regions • Sectors with potential • Special Economic Zone (SEZ) • Southern Africa 10.3 Regional development 10.3.1 Aims • Reduce unequal development of economic activities within the country • To stimulate development in poorer areas • To implement and coordinate the implementation of national and regional industrial policies • To prevent new imbalances from emerging 10.3.2 Regional development in South Africa • An estimated 80% of the country’s GDP is produced in four industrialised areas, namely: –– Johannesburg-Pretoria-Tshwane –– Durban-Pinetown –– Cape Town metropole –– Port Elizabeth-Coega-Uitenhage • Reasons for the uneven geographical economic development –– Unequal spending on regional development –– Uneven distribution of economic resources, such as natural resources and skilled workforce • The regional development policy aims to promote a more even spread of industries so that capital and labour can be directed towards under-developed areas. • Regional development is currently based on the Spatial Development Initiatives (SDIs), Special Economic Zones (including IDZs and corridors) • The Integrated Manufacturing Strategy (IMS) was implemented by the DTI to assist industries to grow by identifying certain cross cutting issues and competitive input sectors. The cross cutting issues are technology, human resource development, access to finance and infrastructure. The competitive input sectors are transport, telecommunications and energy. • Strategic Integrated Projects (SIPs) are being implemented to uplift economic and social infrastructure projects across the country. There are currently 17 identified SIPs. © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE 149

10 Chapter 10.3.3 International best practice for regional development These are the best international practices for regional industrial development policies: Best practice Description Good governance Regional development strategies should be managed effectively and free of corruption. Democratic decision- making, transparency, financial management and control. Integration An integrated approach, ensuring that the benefits of one region spill over to other industries and areas. Partnerships Partnerships should be built between central government, local authorities, civil society, special interest groups, NGOs and the private sector. Provision of Sufficient resources should be provided in resource-poor resources areas, e.g. infrastructure, human resources. Competitiveness Industries or business established as a result of regional policies should be competitive and not need ongoing financial aid from government. Development Regional development concerns people, and aims to serve of people, for the people of the region. Training, education, improving people, by people productivity and providing essential goods and services to raise the standards of living in regions. People should be involved. Development Concentrate on issues at grass roots level where most from below urgent human needs exist. It starts by dealing with poverty. Total Treat development from a global perspective covering all development as a human life, including the interaction of special forces in a multi-dimensional community, e.g. education, health, nutrition. process 10.4 South Africa’s endeavours 10.4.1 Spatial Development Initiatives (SDIs) SDI is a policy to promote sustainable industrial development in areas where poverty and unemployment are at their highest. It can be defined as a link between important economic hubs and regions in a country. The main objective is to stimulate economic growth and employment in those regions. CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR © Department of Basic Education 2014 150 IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 10 These are the main SDIs and their economic focus: SDI Economic area KwaZulu-Natal SDI Industrial Wild Coast SDI Agri-tourism Fish River SDI Industrial West Coast Investment Initiative Industrials and agri-processing Coast to coast Corridor Transport and Tourism Platinum SDI Mining and agri-tourism Phalaborwa SDI Industrial and agri-tourism Gauteng Special Economic Zone Information technology, telecommunications Maputo Development Corridor Industrial and agri-processing Lubombo SDI Agri-tourism Richards Bay Initiative Mining, industrial and agri-processing Financial incentives for SDIs: • Duty-free incentives – duty-free import of raw materials or intermediate goods. • Small and Medium Enterprise Development Programme (support operations). • Skills support programme – tax-free grants for skills development. • Critical infrastructure programme – cash grant to build or expand physical infrastructure. • Foreign investment grants – cash grant to foreign companies that want to invest in new manufacturing businesses. 10.4.2 Industrial Development Zones (IDZ) A purpose built industrial estate linked to an airport or seaport with export as the main objective (it will be incorporated into the SEZ in future). These are the current IDZs in SA: • Coega – Steel and auto components • OR Tambo International Airport – high tech industries • East London – vehicles • Richards Bay – metals • Saldanha Bay – steel 10.4.3 Special Economic Zones (SEZ) Geographically demarcated area where specific economic activities have been identified to be developed. These areas may enjoy incentives such as tax relief and support systems to promote industrial development. It creates a basis for a broader range of industrial parks and provides economic infrastructure to enable the effective clustering of value-adding and employment-enhancing manufacturers. © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE 151

10 Chapter 10.4.4 Corridors A corridor is a track of land that forms a passageway allowing access from one area to another and is developed as part of regional development (also forms part of an SDI). 10.4.5 Strategic Integrated Projects (SIPs) Integration of economic and social infrastructure projects in the country. There are currently 17 designated projects identified. The Strategic Integrated Projects main objective is to identify and implement projects to achieve the provisioning of infrastructure. 10.4.6 Infrastructure plan The focus is on assessing infrastructure gaps and needs in terms of population growth. The main focus is on water, electricity, roads, sanitation and communication. 10.5 Incentives to encourage industrial development 10.5.1 Small Business Support Program • This programme is designed for small businesses with assets of R100 million or less. • This incentive consists of a tax free cash grant for investment in industries. • Grants were available to new and expanding businesses. • Grants are given for three years after which the company is expected to become self-sustaining. 10.5.2 Seda Technology Program (STP) • STP was created as part of government’s national strategy of consolidating and rationalising small enterprise support interventions across the different government departments and government agencies, within the overall objective of improving the delivery of small business support services to entrepreneurs and small enterprises. 10.5.3 Skills Development Programme (SSP) • This a cash incentive to encourage greater investment in skills training and to introduce new, advanced skills to the SA labour force. • A maximum of 50% of a company’s trading costs are covered. CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR © Department of Basic Education 2014 152 IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 10 10.5.4 Critical Infrastructure Programme (CIP) • It is a cost sharing grant for projects designed to improve infrastructure in SA. • It covers a qualifying development cost between 10% and 30% towards the total development cost. • It becomes available on completion of the project. • It extends to both the public sector (e.g. municipalities) and private sector (companies). • It is deemed “critical” if the investment had not taken place or would not work optimally without the infrastructure. 10.5.5 Custom free incentives • These incentives are aimed at export orientated manufacturing businesses that operate in the IDZs and SEZs. • Duty-free imports on intermediate products that will be used in the IDZ to produce other final goods. 10.5.6 Foreign investment incentives • It is a cash incentive to assist foreign investors who want to invest in new manufacturing businesses in SA. • It covers the cost of relocating new machinery and equipment from abroad. • It becomes available to any registered company who would like to operate in the manufacturing sector. • It also covers up to 15% of the costs of new machinery and equipment to a certain value. • Strategic Investment Programme. 10.5.7 Services to business processes • The BPS aims to attract investment and create employment in South Africa through off-shore activities. • A base incentive as a tax exempt grant is paid over three years for each offshore job created and maintained. • A graduated bonus incentive is paid as follows: –– 20% bonus for more than 4 000 but less than 8 000 offshore jobs paid once off in a year in which the bonus is reached; –– 30% bonus for more than 8 000 offshore jobs paid once off in the year in which the bonus level is reached. © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE 153

10 Chapter CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR © Department of Basic Education 2014 154 IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 10 10.6 Appropriateness of South Africa’s industrial policies 10.6.1 Success factors • GEAR did not do enough to promote development and an increase in economic growth did not occur. • Asgisa policy was not successful in the main aim of reducing unemployment and increasing skills. • The New Growth Path has not seen any decrease in the number of people who are unemployed. • The National Industrial Policy Framework is an appropriate policy within best practice, but is hindered by an unemployment problem. • SDIs the growth rate is lower than expected despite the huge amount spent on improvement on infrastructure in the SDIs. The main aim of creating employment has not been achieved. • IDZs – growth has been very slow. The incentives offered were not attractive enough. Investors have not been attracted to Gauteng and Saldanha Bay as expected. Coega and Richards Bay have been more successful. • Regional development is still uneven, concentrated mainly in the four metropolitan areas. • Workers still have to move where employment is. • Small business development – specific government programmes were successful. The promotion of entrepreneurship (amongst women and youth) have been reasonably successful. Improved access to finance and capital, information and advice have been reasonably successful. 10.6.2 External limitations • Global recession had a severe negative effect on the manufacturing industry. • An unstable exchange rate resulted in slow economic growth and development in the industrial sectors. 10.6.3 Internal limitations • Huge increase in electricity and logistic costs – these price hikes affected smaller businesses and many more were forced into bankruptcy. • Skill shortages – slow progress in addressing this need. • Infrastructure –backlogs in expenditure at all government levels. • Restructural scale – government sectoral programme to restructure the industrial economy was not of a significant scale for the structural scale envisaged. • Neglect of larger firms – much emphasis has been placed on smaller firms and larger firms were neglected. • Uncompetitive behaviour of firms – competition policy needs to be strengthened to counter high levels of industry concentration and anti-competitive behaviour. • Poor industrial financing – insufficient financing to meet South Africa’s investment and industrialisation challenges. © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE 155

10 Chapter 10.7 Appropriateness of South Africa’s regional development policies The regional policy is underpinned by most important international best practice principles: job creation, human development and macro- and microeconomic development. It focuses on: • Workers-to-the-work: The priority is on employment creation. Workers have to move to where employment is. • Work-to-workers: This is internationally regarded as the policy most likely to affect long-term problems of structural unemployment (unemployment resulting from a mismatch between demand in the labour market, and the skills and locations of workers). 10.8 Small business development policies • The Department of Trade and Industry has various programmes in place to support SMMEs. • The creation of employment for structurally unemployed people. • Focus is on incentives for small businesses. • Providing easier access to capital, information, business advice. • Promotion of entrepreneurial development among women and the youth. 10.9 The appropriateness of black economic empowerment in the South African economy • This strategy is in line with the empowerment of indigenous people in the development in developing countries. It is in line with the UN and World Bank development initiative of indigenous people in a country. • Benchmark criteria. CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR © Department of Basic Education 2014 156 IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 10 Activity 1 Study the logos in Figure 10.1 and answer the questions that follow: Figure 10.1: Logos 1. What government bodies do the acronyms in the logos stand for? (2) 2. Define the concept industrial development. (2) 3. Describe in your own words the important role of these institutions. (2) [6] Answers to activity 1 1. DTI – Department of Trade and Industry3 IDC – Industrial Development Corporation3(2) 2. Refers to policies that are aimed at the encouragement of industrial investment and greater industrial efficiency. 33(2) 3. They promote industrial development in underdeveloped regions.33(2) [6] Activity 2 Discuss any TWO international best practices in terms of regional development. [8] Answers to activity 2 1. Total development as a multidimensional process 33 This is from a global development perspective. It includes all dimensions of human living, including the interaction of social forces in a community, e.g. education, health, nutrition.33 2. Development from within 33This is endogenous or independent development. In the past development programmes were forced upon regions. Now regions strive for independence with development assistance from outside included in their strategies. Local physical resources, human resources and energy are utilised.33 [8] Activity 3 Explain the rationale of industrial development highlighting the past and present approaches. [8] © Department of Basic Education 2014 CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE 157

10 Chapter Answers to activity 3 1. Past: Manufacturing development 33 is a method to advance economic development. It is financed by foreign loans, aid and generous financial and other incentives received by businesses. 33 2. Present: Emphasis has shifted to industrial development 33 – services and agricultural activities – focus on role for SMMEs – policies continue to exist – aim to export, employ and raise standard of living. 33 [8] Activity 4 Study Figure 10.2 and answer the questions that follow: CREATING JOBS – INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT ZONES Johannesburg IDZ Still to be developed East London IDZ • Jobs created to date: 930 manufacturing and related jobs Richards Bay IDZ • Value of investment The R670 million Coega IDZ to date: R1,3 billion Tata ferrochrome • Motor industry plant employs 300 • Jobs created: people. Possible future 7 147 investment of • Value of investment R400 million could to date: R2,1 billion create another 400 jobs Figure 10.2: Creating jobs. Industrial development zones 1. Define the concept IDZ. (2) 2. List any TWO IDZ ’s from the map. (2) 3. Mention the industry involved in TWO of the above mentioned IDZ’s. (2) 4. Discuss an incentive applied to businesses within the IDZ. (4) [10] Answers to activity 4 1. Industrial Development Zones are purpose-built industrial estates that are physically enclosed and linked to an international port or airport.33(2) 2. Johannesburg,3 Richards Bay, 3East London3 and Coega 3 (any 2) (2) 3. Coega = motor industry3 and Richards Bay = metal industry3 (2) 4. No duties are paid on imported goods.33 Designed to encourage domestic and foreign businesses to open in an IDZ and produce goods and services for export. 33(4) Keep going! [10] CHAPTER 10 SOUTH AFRICA’S INDUSTRIAL POLICIES AND THEIR © Department of Basic Education 2014 158 IN TERMS OF INETRNATIONAL BEST PRACTICE Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 11 South Africa’s economic and social indicators Economic and social indicators are useful tools to determine a country’s well-being. There are many economic and social indicators, including production, employment, education and demographic indicators. Overview TOPIC CONTENT SCOPE AND DEPTH OF EXAMINABLE CONTENT 11. Analyse South Africa’s economic and • Define/explain the relevant concepts Economics: social performance indicators and their uses • Broadly outline the performance of an basic concepts economy and quantitive • The Performance of an Economy elements: –– Performance HOT QUESTION: Propose five Economic considerations when assessing the and social –– Comparisons performance of an economy performance –– Specifications indicators –– Purposes • Analyse the economic indicators in detail • Economic Indicators: –– Inflation Rate –– Production prices (PPI) –– Consumer prices (CPI) –– Foreign Trade –– Terms of trade –– The exchange rate –– Employment –– Economically Active Population (EAP) –– Employment rate –– Unemployment rate –– Productivity –– Labour productivity –– Remuneration per worker –– Interest Rates –– Repo Rate © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 11 SOUTH AFRICA’S ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL INDICATORS 159

11 Chapter –– Money Supply –– M1 –– M2 –– M3 • Social Indicators: • Analyse the social indicators in detail –– Demographics –– Population growth HOT QUESTION: Identify five social –– Life expectancy indicators that are used for international benchmarking and give an analysis of –– Nutrition and Health their importance –– Nutrition –– Malnutrition –– Obesity –– Health –– Infant mortality –– Under 5 mortality –– Spending on health –– Access to clean water –– Access to sanitation –– Education –– Percentage public sector spending –– Percentage enrolment in Secondary Schools –– Services –– Electricity –– Refuse/Garbage removal –– Water supply –– Sanitation –– Housing and Urbanisation –– Housing –– Number of houses completed –– Urbanisation –– Natural growth in population –– Migration –– Founding of new towns • International Comparisons –– Globalisation –– International standardisation –– Aid and support –– Comparison and forecasting © Department of Basic Education 2014 160 CHAPTER 11 SOUTH AFRICA’S ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL INDICATORS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 11 11.1 Key concepts These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key Economics concepts that are used in this study guide. Understand these concepts Use mobile well. notes to help you learn these key concepts. Learn more about Term Definition mobile notes on page xiv in the introduction. Consumer Price Measures changes over time in the prices of an Index (CPI) average market ‘basket’ of consumer goods and services purchased by households Economically active All persons of either sex between the ages of 15 and Population 65 who supply labour for productive activities (EAP) International An organisation working to promote employment, Monetary Fund (IMF) exchange rate stability, and international trade and economic cooperation by making financial resources available to member countries to meet their balance of payments needs System of National Techniques which include double-entry accounting, for accounts (SNa) measuring the economic activity of a nation United Nations An international body working for the development of Children’s Fund children’s rights, and their survival and protection (UNICEF) World Bank The international bank established to promote economic recovery and development © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 11 SOUTH AFRICA’S ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL INDICATORS 161

11 Chapter 11.2 The performance of an economy When we assess the economy, there are a few things that should be considered: • Performance Economic indicators are used to establish the state of the economy. An economic indicator is a statistic (data) that shows the behaviour of one or other variable. • Comparisons Changing statistics (data) inform us of changes in the economy. By comparing these changes we can determine whether there is a growth or slowdown in the economy. • Specifications To be meaningful, indicators have to be compiled in terms of their rules of compilation. • Purposes Indicators are compiled for specific purposes. Example, the CPI is calculated to show increases in consumer prices and reflect the cost of living. 11.3 Economic indicators 11.3.1 Price change indicators Price increases occur either because of scarcities of a product or changes in consumer preferences. Price increases over long periods of time are known as inflation. There are two key price change indicators: • Producer Price index (PPI): This is the indicator used to measure an increase or decrease over time in the prices of goods produced locally when they leave the factory floor; and an increase or decrease in the price of imported goods. • Consumer Price index (CPI): Weights are obtained from the expenditure of households and show changes in the purchasing power of the rand. This is the official index used in inflation targeting. 11.3.2 Foreign trade indicators International trade is important in a globalised world. Exports stimulate employment and imports widen the choice of consumers. • Terms of trade: The ratio of export and import prices. If the ratio deteriorates (gets worse), a greater volume of exports must be produced that may cause a spill-over effect into the balance of payments. • Exchange rate: The value of one country’s currency in relation to another country’s currency. © Department of Basic Education 2014 162 CHAPTER 11 SOUTH AFRICA’S ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL INDICATORS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 11 © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 11 SOUTH AFRICA’S ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL INDICATORS 163

11 Chapter 11.3.3 Employment indicators • The economically active population (EAP): The labour force between15 – 65 years of age. • Employment: The number of employed persons as a percentage of the economically active population (EAP), e.g. 73.5% in South Africa. • Unemployment: The unemployed (who are actively looking for work) as a percentage of the economically active population. 11.3.4 Productivity indicators Labour productivity is watched very closely, particularly in relation to real wage increases. • Labour productivity: This is measured by dividing the real GDP by the number of workers employed. • Remuneration per worker: If productivity increases are lower than the real wage increases, inflationary pressures will occur. 11.3.5 Interest rates Interest is the charge made for borrowing money. • Repo rate is one of the most important interest rate indicators. It is the rate at which the SARB lends money to banks. 11.3.6 Money supply The supply of money is controlled by the SARB. The money is classified in three categories. • M1: notes and coins in circulation and demand deposits of the domestic private sector at banks. • M2: M1 plus other short term and medium term deposits of the domestic private sector at banks. • M3: M2 plus long term deposits of the domestic private sector at banks. 11.4 Social indicators Social indicators are concerned with people. They monitor identifiable and definable issues related to human well-being over a period of time. 11.4.1 Demographics The size of the population is important for infrastructure and social programmes. • Population growth: The population numbered 46.8 million in 2005. Growth is slowing down. Measuring population growth is important for delivering social services and for identifying the size of the tax base (the total number of people paying taxes). • Life expectancy: South Africa’s life expectancy rate is down from 62,8 years to 47 years. © Department of Basic Education 2014 164 CHAPTER 11 SOUTH AFRICA’S ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL INDICATORS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 11 11.4.2 Nutrition and Health The standard of living of the population is related to the quality of nutrition and health: Nutrition • Child malnutrition: Malnutrition is expressed in two ways – weight for age (under weight) and height for age (dwarfism). The proportion of underweight children is the most important indicator of malnutrition. • Overweight children: there is an association between obesity of children and other diseases. Health • Infant mortality: The number of children that will die before one year of age is one way of measuring the health of a population. • Under-five mortality: the number of children that will die before the age of 5 years. • Health expenditure: the amount of health expenditure as a percentage of GDP. • Access to safe drinking water: the percentage of a population that has reasonable access to safe drinking water. • Access to sanitation facilities: the percentage of a population with at least adequate sanitation facilities that can prevent human, animal and insect contact. 11.4.3 Education The standard of living is related to the level of education. Education is a key social indicator: • Public expenditure: The percentage of the national budget that is directed towards education. • Secondary enrolment: This shows the percentage of an age group attending high school. • Primary completion: The percentage of an age group that has completed primary education is an indicator of the efficiency of the education system. • Youth literacy rate: The percentage of the 15–24 age group that are literate. 11.4.4 Services A number of services that are vital to enhance people’s lifestyle and level of economic and social development: • Electricity • Refuse removal • Water supply • Sanitation © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 11 SOUTH AFRICA’S ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL INDICATORS 165

11 Chapter 11.4.5 Housing and urbanisation The standard of living of the population is related to the quality of their housing and services: Housing • Housing: Many South African citizens are poor and cannot afford property. The government supplies housing subsidies and the private sector provides housing loans. Urbanisation The level of urbanisation is one of the indicators of a country’s social development. It is measured by: • Natural growth of the urban population • Migration • Establishment of new towns 11.5 International comparisons International comparisons are the key means of measuring a country’s PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION NB NB development. economic and social Learn these four points that 11.5.1 Globalisation are used by international • International trade: Payments are affected by the exchange rate. organisations to measureHINT! a • Internationalisation: Branch offices in foreign countries monitor hint country’s level of economic indicators to publish financial reports in a single currency and pay and social development. dividends in different currencies. 11.5.2 International standardisation e.g. EG - worked examples • Economic and social indicators are useful. International organisations, like the World Bank and the IMF, are very specific in determining, utilising and applying these indicators. exams • Benefits from organisations cannot be measured if indicators are not available, e.g. bridging finance from the IMF, World Bank and the UN. 11.5.3 Aid and support • Foreign countries, governments, international institutions and NGOs are globally involved in providing financial aid. • A country needs indicators, including domestic income, production activity and expenditure, poverty, education and health data, to receive aid ACTIVITIES boy and and to and girl-left measure the impact of this aid. • right Humanof page rights (children’s rights), environment (pollution) and governance (corruption) indicators might also be requested by aid activity organisations. 11.5.4 Comparison and forecasting • Capital markets are liberated through globalisation. Step by step • Capital comment commentmoves where it receives the best returns. • Publications for global players give indicator values for the 3 previous and 3 future years to spot underlying trends. © Department of Basic Education 2014 166 CHAPTER 11 SOUTH AFRICA’S ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL INDICATORS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 11 © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 11 SOUTH AFRICA’S ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL INDICATORS 167

11 Chapter Activity 1 Choose the correct word between brackets: 1. The key rate of interest in SA is the (repo/exchange) rate. (2) 2. The growth performance of a country is measured in terms of the (per capita real GDP/increase in the real GDP). (2) 3. The economically active population is the labour force between 15 and (55/65) years of age. (2) 4. The index used to determine the prices of inputs is called the (consumer/producer) price index. (2) 5. Social indicators are concerned with people, such as education and (corruption/health). (2) [10] Answers to activity 1 1. Repo rate 33(2) 2. Increase in the real GDP33(2) 3. 6533(2) 4. Producer33(2) 5. Health33(2) [10] Activity 2 Give ONE answer for each of the following: 1. An international bank established to promote economic recovery and development (2) 2. Used to establish the performance of the economy in terms of basic economic objectives of growth, price stability, exchange rate stability and full employment (2) 3. It is depicted in the Lorenz curve and shows the distribution of income(2) 4. The price of one country’s currency in terms of another country’s currency (2) 5. Ratio of export and import prices (2) [10] Answers to activity 2 1. World Bank33(2) 2. Economic indicator33(2) 3. Gini coefficient 33(2) 4. Exchange rate33(2) 5. Terms of trade33(2) [10] © Department of Basic Education 2014 168 CHAPTER 11 SOUTH AFRICA’S ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL INDICATORS Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 11 Activity 3 Distinguish in tabular form between the Consumer Price Index and the Producer Price Index. (2 × 4) [8] Answers to activity 3 PPI CPI Producer Price Index: an index that Consumer Price Index: an index that assesses the impact of changes 3 measures the price 3 of a fixed in the relative prices of production basket of consumer goods and inputs 3 services 3 • Relates to the cost of production • Relates to the cost of living 3 3 • Basket consists of consumer • Basket consists of goods only33 goods and services 33 • Capital and intermediate goods • Capital and intermediate goods are included33 are excluded 33 • Prices exclude VAT 33 • Prices include VAT 33 • Interest rates are excluded 33 • Interest rates are taken into • Prices of imported goods are account 33 shown explicitly 33 • Prices of imported goods are not shown 33 [8] Keep going! © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 11 SOUTH AFRICA’S ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL INDICATORS 169

12 Chapter Inflation Inflation occurs when there is a sustained and significant increase in the general price level over a period of time. At the same time, there is a decline in the buying power of money, i.e. the general price level increases more than the general increase in wages or salaries. Overview TOPIC CONTENT SCOPE AND DEPTH OF EXAMINABLE CONTENT 12 Analyse and investigate inflation and the Economic Issues policies used to combat it of the day: Inflation Inflation • Define/explain the concept • Definition • Measuring Inflation • Examine ways to measure inflation –– Indexes (CPI/PPI) –– Weighting (Basket of goods and services) –– Inflation Rate (Calculations) • Types and Characteristics of Inflation • Define/explain the different types of –– Consumer Inflation inflation –– Headline Inflation • Distinguish between the different –– Core Inflation types of inflation –– Administered Prices Inflation –– Producer Inflation –– All inclusive Inflation –– Hyperinflation –– Stagflation –– Comparison of inflation rates • Causes and consequences of inflation • Briefly discuss demand-pull inflation –– Demand-pull inflation • Analyse the causes of demand-pull –– Monetarists explanation inflation –– Causes of demand inflation –– Increase in household consumption –– Decline in saving –– Tax reduction –– Access to credit –– Investors expenditure –– Government expenditure –– Export services © Department of Basic Education 2014 170 CHAPTER 12 INFLATION Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 12 –– Cost-push Inflation • Briefly discuss cost-push inflation –– Causes of cost-push inflation • Analyse the causes of cost-push –– Wages inflation –– Key inputs –– Exchange rate depreciation –– Profit margins –– Productivity –– Natural disasters –– Consequences of Inflation, on • Examine in detail the consequences of inflation –– Debtors/Creditors –– Wage and salary earners –– Investors and savers –– Taxpayers –– Industrial peace –– Expectancy and Inflation • Broadly outline the inflation problem in • The inflation problem in South Africa South Africa • Examine the measures to combat • Measures to Combat Inflation inflation in detail –– Demand-pull inflation • Use the following information to –– Monetary policy calculate the CPI for September 20… –– Fiscal policy –– Cost-Push Inflation HOT QUESTION: What effects does –– Productivity inflation have on the current account of the South African BoP? –– Competition © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 12 INFLATION 171

12 Chapter 12.1 Key concepts These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key Economics concepts that are used in this study guide. Understand these concepts well. Term Definition Administered prices Prices set or controlled by government Core inflation Excludes items from the CPI basket that are highly volatile or prices affected by government policy Cost-push inflation Occurs when there is an increase in the general price level caused by an increase in the cost of production Consumer Price An index that measures the price of a fixed basket of Index (CPI) consumer goods and services • Relates to the cost of living • The basket consists of consumer goods and services • Capital and intermediate goods are excluded • Prices include VAT • Interest rates are taken into account • Prices of imported goods are not shown Demand-pull Occurs when the aggregate demand for goods and services inflation exceeds the aggregate supply of goods and services Headline inflation Unadjusted CPI figures Hyperinflation An inflation rate above 50%. People lose confidence in the value of money and start bartering goods and services Inflation A sustained and significant increase in the general price Monetary Policy level over a period of time; and a simultaneous (at the in South Africa is same time) decline in the buying power of money formulated and implemented by SARB within an inflation Inflation targeting Forms part of monetary policy and is managed by the targeting framework. SARB Reserve Bank to keep inflation within the range as set by works closely with Treasury, the Minister of Finance (between 3% and 6%) but it has operational Monetary Policy Consists of the Governor of the Reserve Bank, 3 deputy independence. Committee (MPC) governors and another 3 members. Their main purpose is to determine an interest rate that will be consistent with meeting the inflation target Producer Price Assesses the impact of changes in the relative weighting of Index (PPI) production inputs: • Pertains to the cost of production • The basket consists of goods only • Capital and intermediate goods are included • Prices exclude VAT • Interest rates are excluded • Prices of imported goods are shown explicitly Stagflation Low growth, high unemployment and high inflation rates occur simultaneously 12.2 Measuring inflation (define, explain, examine) Price indexes are used to measure the changes in the general price level. The following are important concepts related to measuring inflation: 1. Indexes: A price index is compiled by using the prices of a representative range of goods and services which are recorded on a regular basis. © Department of Basic Education 2014 172 CHAPTER 12 INFLATION Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 12 2. Weighting: The difference in the importance of items in an index The main way is solved through a weighted index which reflects the relative in which inflation is importance of each item. measure are: 3. Inflation rate: The inflation rate is determined by using changes in Changes in CPI; Changes in PPI; Changes in the CPI and/or PPI index. The figures for each month are compared implicit GDP to the corresponding month in the previous year. deflator 4. Inflation targeting: Forms part of monetary policy set by government and is managed by the Reserve Bank to keep inflation within the range as set by the Minister of Finance (between 3% and 6%). The aim of inflation targeting is to keep the inflation rate at low and more stable levels. 12.3 Types and characteristics of inflation There are two main types of inflation – demand-pull inflation and cost- push inflation. Their characteristics are explained below: 12.3.1 Consumer inflation • Headline inflation: it is measured by the CPI and is calculated for urban areas only. It represents the cost of a shopping basket of goods and services of a typical SA household. Stats SA identifies 1 500 different consumer goods/services, assigns a weight to each, decides on a base year, on formula and on the collection of prices. The unadjusted CPI rate is known as headline inflation. • Core inflation: it is published by Stats SA and excludes items from the CPI basket with highly volatile prices and those affected by government intervention and policy, e.g. fresh and frozen meat and fish, vegetables, interest rates on mortgage bonds, VAT and assessment rates. • Administered prices: the prices are set by government or controlled by government through appointed authorities. Price changes must remain within the inflation target prescribed by the Minister of Finance. 12.3.2 Producer inflation PPI is used to measure the prices of domestically produced goods. It also shows domestic output. When the rand depreciates it will first be reflected in the PPI. Differences between CPI and PPI: CPI: • Pertains to cost of living • Basket consists of consumer goods and services • Capital and intermediate goods are excluded • Prices include VAT • Interest rates are taken into account • Prices of imported goods are not shown PPI: • Pertains to cost of production. • Basket consists of goods only. • Capital and intermediate goods are included. • Prices exclude VAT. • Interest rates are excluded. • Prices of imported goods are shown explicitly. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 12 INFLATION 173

12 Chapter 12.3.3 All-inclusive inflation • Economists check what happened to prices of all final goods and services produced in a particular year. • Use the calculated implicit GDP deflator. • GDP figures at current and constant prices are used as published in the national accounts. • GDP at constant prices measures economic growth and measures inflation. • Measures the inflation rate for economy as a whole. • Implicit GDP deflator is the ratio of GDP at current prices to GDP at constant prices. • To determine inflation: GDP deflator for next year × 100. GDP deflator for previous year 12.3.4 Hyperinflation • Very high rate of inflation (more than 50%). • Price levels rise so rapidly that people lose confidence in the value of money. • Becomes difficult for the economy to operate. • People resort to goods as medium of exchange – barter. 12.3.5 Stagflation A low growth rate, high unemployment and high inflation rate. 12.3.6 Comparison of inflation rates • Annual inflation rates of CPI, PPI and GDP deflation are provided. • For policy purposes and forecasting all these indexes as well as other implicit deflators are considered. • For the consumer the CPI is by far the most important indicator because it relates to their cost of living and the interest rate policy of the Reserve Bank. 12.4 The causes of inflation Note that 12.4.1 Demand-pull inflation demand inflation is the same thing as Demand-pull inflation occurs when aggregate demand in an economy outpaces demand-pull inflation. (is faster than) aggregate supply, even though gross domestic product rises Cost inflation is the and unemployment falls. Effectively, too much money is spent chasing too few same thing as cost- goods. Generally, an increase in the supply of demanded goods will reverse push inflation. the inflationary trend. Some of the characteristics of demand-pull inflation are: • Aggregate demand rises more than aggregate supply, causing an increase in the general price level. • Groups that are responsible: Consumers, businesses and government. • Foreigners’ contribution: They further increase the demand for our goods and services through an increase in exports. • Relative increase in aggregate demand’s components: C (consumption spending), I (investment spending), G (government spending), M (cost of imports). • Decline savings: if savings habits are changed and consumers start spending their current and accumulated savings, growth in aggregate demand can outstrip growth in aggregate supply © Department of Basic Education 2014 174 CHAPTER 12 INFLATION Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 12 • Tax reduction: If personal income tax is reduced more money is available for private consumption expenditure. • Access to credit: Ggreater availability of consumer credit (credit cards) and cheaper credit – credit multiplier kicks in and more credit is created. AS (Aggregate • Figure 12.1 illustrates an increase in Supply) aggregate demand from AD1 to AD2 and a single aggregate supply AS1. As the aggregate demand increases, the price level and production output will also increase AD2 until full employment is reached. The initial increase in demand will have a positive AD (Aggregate influence on production, employment and Demand) income, but when full capacity is reached further increases in demand will lead to price increases. Causes of demand-pull inflation Figure 12.1: The inflationary process There are many causes of demand-pull inflation. Some of these are: • Increase in household consumption: due to easily available credit, a reduction in taxes and less savings. • Investors expenditure: may lead to higher profit expectations of businesses. They will invest more, this might lead to an increase in the demand for goods and services. • Government expenditure: an increase in government spending leads to an increase in prices. More money comes into circulation due to an increase in spending on infrastructure, consumption spending and social spending. • Export earnings: the growth in foreign countries might create an increased demand for locally produced goods without an increase in production. • The Monetarist explanation: According to the monetarists sustained high rates of growth in the money supply cause high inflation, while low rates of growth cause low inflation. They base their view on the quantity theory of money (MV = PT). They make three basic assumptions: the velocity of circulation of money is stable; the quantity of money is exogenously determined by monetary authorities and real output is determined by the quantity and quality of various factors of production. 12.4.2 Cost-push inflation Cost-push inflation is caused by an increase in the cost of goods or services that are very important to the economy, and for which no alternatives exist. Examples can be spikes in the oil price due to war, huge price rises in essential food products due to drought, or excessive increases in the cost of labour due to control of industries by trade unions. Some of the characteristics of cost-push inflation are: • An increase in labour costs: Aggressive trade union negotiations push the price of labour up above the increase in productivity. • Producers increase profits: Prices rise more than the rise in production costs. • The state imposes a higher VAT rate. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 12 INFLATION 175

12 Chapter • Expensive imported products (intermediate goods) cause an We have supplied increase in the prices of locally finished goods. you with a variety of • Lower productivity but the same remuneration: The cost of facts - memorise one production increases. page per day! You can do it! • Natural disasters: Floods or droughts increase the cost of production. • Increased total costs on the supply side. Causes of cost-push inflation • Wages: an increase in wages constitutes 50% of GVA at basic prices and is one of the major causes of cost-push inflation. • Key inputs: When the prices of key input goods that are imported, increase, domestic cost of production increases especially in the manufacturing sector. • Exchange rate depreciation: The depreciation in the rand will lead to more expensive imports. • Profit margins: When businesses increase their profit margins, their cost of production and prices consumers must pay, will also increase. • Productivity: Less productive factors of production will lead to increased cost per unit. • Natural disasters: Prices will increase due to weather changes such as droughts, floods and global warming. Expectancy and inflation The inflationary process is triggered by demand pull and cost push inflation. The role of inflationary expectations: • during inflation consumers expect prices to rice and start to buy more goods • labour unions wish to protect their members’ income against erosion of purchasing power caused by inflation • expectation that wages will rise encourages some businesses to increase prices in advance. 12.5 The consequences of inflation • Debtors/Creditors: debtors benefit because they receive money with SUMMARY: Fiscal policy a high purchasing power and repay their debt with money with low makes use of tax increases purchasing power. Creditors on the other hand suffer. and spending cuts to combat inflation. • Wage and salary earners: people with a fixed income will be able to purchase less as prices are rising. • Investors and savers: Assets with a fixed nominal value have a fixed return and lower purchasing power as prices increase. Real value of savings decreases. • Tax payers: In South Africa income is taxed on a progressive system. We experience a bracket creep, resulting from inflation and progressive income tax and the government benefits. • Disruption of industrial peace: Wage bargaining is accompanied by strikes and mass action. 12.6 Measures to combat inflation Policy makers can use various policy measures to fight inflation when it gets too high. Three types of policy measures are highlighted. © Department of Basic Education 2014 176 CHAPTER 12 INFLATION Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 12 12.6.1 Fiscal measures Fiscal measures are measures taken by the Minister of Finance regarding taxation and expenditure. Examples of measures that can be taken include: SUMMARY: Monetary policy • An increase in direct taxation (personal income tax) which will help involves reducing money to decrease demand. supply to combat inflation. • An increase in indirect taxation (VAT) causes spending to decrease because goods become more expensive. • A loan levy. Reduces the disposable income of consumers. • The state cuts back on expenditure by cancelling government projects like roads, hospitals and schools. • The country’s finance budget deficit is non-inflationary (the government uses loans from the non-banking sector to limit inflation). • The state imposes surcharges on imported goods. This increases the price of these imported goods, resulting in many people being unable to afford to buy these goods. 12.6.2 Monetary measures The South African Reserve Bank (SARB) and the government apply certain monetary measures to curb inflation: • The SARB adjusts the quantity of money to the needs of the economy, (e.g. through open-market policy, thus maintaining a fine balance) between the supply of goods and services and money supply. • The SARB curbs inflation caused by excess demand by reducing the money supply. • The bank rate of the central bank (SARB) affects the interest rates in the economy (repo rate). The bank rate can be raised to encourage savings. • Excessive credit can be reduced by restricting the granting of credit by banks. • The SARB can apply moral pressure (moral suasion) on financial institutions to be more careful when granting credit. 12.6.3 Other measures Additional measures that can be taken to combat inflation include: • Increase productivity: This is a long-term measure generated through improved education and training which allows more people to be employed and ensures they are more productive. • Price control: By fixing the price of certain essential goods, the government assures they remain affordable. • Wage policy: The government takes a decision to break the inflationary spiral of increased wages and prices by keeping the increase in wages below or at the level of inflation. Use the following word • Stricter conditions for consumer credit: The government makes it acronyms to help you harder for consumers to get credit in order to restrict their spending. remember these additional • Encourage personal savings: The government implements measures measures to combat inflation: to encourage savings, e.g. by cutting taxes on savings. The imbalance between demand and supply is corrected by increased savings, as W – Wage people save more and spend less. I – Import P – Productivity • Import controls are relaxed. E – Exchange rate • Floating exchange rate: Prices are automatically adjusted to international conditions. S – Savings • Indexation: A policy of linking prices of items such as wages, C – Credit pensions and mortgage bond interest rates to price indices to I – Indexation eliminate the effects of inflation. P – Price © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 12 INFLATION 177

12 Chapter Activity 1 Study Figure 12.2 below and answer the questions that follow: Date Figure 12.2 South Africa’s inflation rate 1. Define the concept inflation. (2) 2. When did the inflation rate peak? (2) 3. Do we adhere to the inflation target set by government from July 2010–Jan 2011? Supply figures. (4) 4. Explain what you would do to lower the inflation rate in our country? (4) 5. Which institutions in South Africa make inflation figures available? (2) 6. What, according to you, caused the double figures in April–July 2008? (4) 7. Why are these figures in the graph not a reflection of hyperinflation? (4) [22] Answers to activity 1 1. A sustained and significant increase in the general price level over a period of time. 33(2) 2. July 2008 33(2) 3. Yes 33 Inflation target between 3 – 6 % 33(4) 4. Apply monetary (repo rate) 33 and fiscal policies (tax increases) 33(4) 5. SARB and Stats SA 33(2) 6. Excessive consumer spending. 33 Due to the capital expenditure by the state for the Soccer World Cup 33(4) 7. Hyperinflation starts at 50% 3333(4) [22] © Department of Basic Education 2014 178 CHAPTER 12 INFLATION Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 12 Activity 2 Study the cartoon below and answer the questions that follow: Before inflation - she goes to the And brings her groceries home in a market carrying her money in her BASKET HANDBAG After inflation - she carries her Brings her groceries home in her MONEY in a basket, and..... HANDBAG 1. What is the message behind the cartoon? (2) 2. What is happening to the purchasing power of the money? (2) 3. In which country is this woman a consumer? Motivate your answer.(4) [8] Answers to activity 2 1. Due to inflation, the consumer can buy less for the same amount 33(2) 2. Declining 33(2) 3. USA 33 She is carrying US Dollars ($) in her basket 33(4) [8] Activity 3 Name any THREE fiscal measures to control inflation. (3 × 2) [6] Answers to activity 3 Increase direct taxation (personal income tax) if inflation is due to excess demand33 • Increase indirect taxation (VAT) 33 • A loan levy is introduced 33 • The state cuts back on expenditure 33 • The finance budget deficit is non-inflationary 33 • Impose surcharges on imported goods 33 (any 3) (3 × 2) [6] Keep going! © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 12 INFLATION 179

13 Chapter Tourism Tourism is travel for the purpose of leisure, recreation or business. Local tourists travel to different places in their own country. Inbound tourists come to South Africa from other countries. South African tourists who travel overseas are known as outbound tourists. South Africa is a popular tourist destination because of its beauty, wildlife, good weather and its interesting political history. © Department of Basic Education 2014 180 CHAPTER 13 TOURISM Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 13 Overview TOPIC CONTENT CONTENT DETAILS FOR TEACHING, LEARNING AND ASSESSMENT PURPOSES 13. Debate the economic importance of tourism Tourism and to South Africa and suggest policies to Economic promote it, also refer to the importance of Redress: indigenous knowledge systems (IKS) Environmental sustainability • Define/explain the relevant concepts Tourism: • Broadly outline the types of tourism • Definition • Broadly outline the measuring of tourism • Types of tourism • Measuring tourism • Reasons for its Growth • Examine the reasons for growth in the –– International tourism industry in detail –– Domestically • The Effects of Tourism on: • Examine the effects of tourism in detail –– GDP –– Employment –– Poverty –– Externalities –– Environment –– Investment • The Benefits of Tourism for: • Examine the benefits of tourism on: –– Households Households, Businesses, Government and –– Businesses Infrastructure development –– State –– Infrastructure Development • South Africa’s profile (indigenous • Broadly outline the tourism profile of South knowledge systems) Africa –– South Africa’s Profile –– Aim with visits –– Local Destinations –– Local Tourists –– Indigenous Knowledge • Policy Suggestions – Department of • Broadly outline the Department of Tourism Tourism’s policy suggestions –– Marketing, infrastructure, education • Briefly analyse the relationship between and training and environmental tourism and indigenous knowledge within management the South African context © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 13 TOURISM 181

13 Chapter Use mobile 13.1 Key concepts notes to help you learn these key These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key Economics concepts. Learn more concepts that are used in this study guide. Understand these concepts about mobile notes well. Use mobile notes to help you remember them. on page xiv in the introduction. Term Definition Domestic tourist South African citizens travelling within the borders of South Africa Department of Tourism Ensures and accelerates (speeds up) the delivery of tourism benefits Foreign tourist Visits a foreign country as a destination Inbound tourist Tourists from other countries (foreign tourists) who stay for more than one day Outbound tourist South African citizens travelling abroad. They have the same effect as imports on the balance of payments Tourism Activities of people travelling to and staying in places outside their usual environment for no more than one year for leisure, business and other purposes. It does not relate to any work done for money in the place visited Transit tourist Tourists travelling through South Africa using air, road, rail and sea transport to get to another destination 13.2 Definition of tourism Tourists travel to foreign countries for holidays, business, conferences and to discover more about other countries. Tourism allows people to experience the world. Tourism can be defined as activities of people travelling to places outside their usual environment for less than one year for business, leisure or other purposes without any remuneration. An activity is seen as tourism if it fits in with the following criteria: • There is a purpose for the visit or activity. • There is no remuneration (money) earned in the place visited. • A minimum length of stay is one night. • A maximum length of stay is one year. • There is a travelling distance of more than 160 km from the tourist’s home environment. © Department of Basic Education 2014 182 CHAPTER 13 TOURISM Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 13 13.3 The purposes (types) of tourism • Leisure and recreation: Tourists come to South Africa on holiday, to play sport, to visit friends, and to see the tourist attractions • Cultural tourism: Tourists come to visit museums and art galleries, e.g. Robben Island and the Apartheid Museum. • Ecotourism: Tourists visit undisturbed natural areas, e.g. the Richtersveld Cultural and Botanical Landscape, the Cape Floral Region Protected Areas and the Kruger National Park. • Business and professional: Tourists visit for business meetings and conferences. • Other: For studies, or medical reasons. Leisure and recreation Cultural tourism Ecotourism Business and professional 13.4 Measuring tourism Tourism consists of different activities that should comply with the following: • There should be a purpose for the visit e.g. camping, business or studies. • No remuneration should be earned at the tourist destination. • A minimum length of stay should be one night. • The maximum length of stay should not exceed one year. • The travelling distance should exceed 160 km from a person’s residence. 13.5 Reasons for growth The rapid growth in the tourism industry has resulted in a steady change in the standard of living as well as people’s lifestyles. Tourism is much more evident in the developed than developing countries, although tourism is increasing faster in the developing countries. Local tourism is booming since South Africa is becoming more attractive as tourist destination. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 13 TOURISM 183

13 Chapter Reasons for the growth of the tourism industry are: • Increased disposable income. • Less working hours so more time to travel. • An awareness of leisure and recreation. • Improved transport, communication and accommodation facilities. • Increased advertising and promotion. • Enjoying the benefits of holidays and travel. • Easily obtainable foreign exchange. • International: tourism is much more evident in the developed than developing world, but tourism is growing faster in developing countries, e.g. 4.6% growth from 2010 to 2011. • Locally: –– Foreign arrivals: foreign tourists who visit the country as their destination. –– Those who are stopping over, are called transit tourists or same- day travellers. –– Foreign tourists: come for the experience – visit friends, game farms, enjoy the different cultures, heritage spots or sports activities and events. –– Domestic tourism: South Africans are free to travel locally (domestic tourists) or abroad (outbound tourists). Outbound tourists have the same effect on the Balance of Payments as imports. Use the acronym PIGEEE to 13.6 The effects of tourism help you remember the 6 effects of tourism: Tourism has a significant effect on the economy and the country as a whole. The following 6 areas are greatly affected by tourism: P – Poverty I – Infrastructure G – GDP 13.6.1 Employment • Tourism employs 7% of South Africa’s workforce (approximately E – Employment 1,12 million people). E – Environment • Tourism is the largest provider of jobs because it: E – Externalities –– Is labour intensive. –– Employs many different kinds of skills, e.g. tourist guides, hotel staff. –– Provides immediate employment. –– Provides entrepreneurial opportunities. • Tourism is the largest earner of foreign exchange because: –– Foreign tourists pay for services in foreign exchange. –– Foreign tourists usually spend more than local tourists. 13.6.2 Gross domestic product (GDP) • Tourism has the biggest impact on the services industry. • Indirect contribution: Tourism is a service-based industry. It is responsible for 65% of the GDP in developed economies and 40% of the GDP in developing countries. • Direct contribution: Tourism contributes 7,9 % of GDP in South Africa (compared to 12% worldwide). © Department of Basic Education 2014 184 CHAPTER 13 TOURISM Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 13 13.6.3 Poverty Poverty is most evident in rural areas due to a lack of job opportunities. Tourism can alleviate (ease) poverty in the following ways: • Tourism is a fast and effective mechanism for distributing resources to rural areas to develop them as tourist sites. • Many prime tourist attractions are located in rural areas. • Tourist developments in rural areas increase the number of available jobs in areas where there aren’t many jobs. • Tourism promotes a balanced and sustainable form of development. People are able to earn a living in their home areas, resulting in a reduction in urbanisation and a more balanced population distribution. 13.6.4 Externalities Externalities are costs and benefits that result from a specific activity. Tourism results in both: Positive externalities: • Tourism attracts large amounts of revenue. • Tourism leads to an improvement in infrastructure development. • Tourism can stimulate employment indirectly. • Tourism can help conserve cultural and natural assets and alleviate poverty, but needs to be carefully planned. Negative externalities: • Tourism can cause environmental damage if not managed correctly. • Tourism can result in a lot of waste and damage to sensitive tourist sites. • The infrastructure at tourist sites can come under pressure to cater for increased tourist numbers. • Tourism can lead to increased prices for locals. 13.6.5 The environment Tourism can create environmental stress. It can result in: • Permanent restructuring of the landscape, e.g. construction work on highways. • Additional waste products, e.g. biological (sewage) and non-biological (litter) waste. • Direct environmental stress, e.g. the loss of wildlife species due to safari hunting. • Effects on population dynamics, e.g. migration and changes in population density in response to the needs of tourist sites. 13.6.6 Investment Tourist destinations require adequate physical (hotel rooms), economic (ATMs) and basic (water and electricity) services infrastructure. This includes: • Transport infrastructure, e.g. improved roads are needed to access tourist sites. • Communication infrastructure, e.g. hotels need telephone lines to take bookings at tourist sites. • Energy infrastructure, e.g. tourists need electricity at tourist sites. • Basic services, e.g. clean water and refuse removal. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 13 TOURISM 185

13 Chapter Use this mnemonic to help 13.7 The benefits of tourism you remember the 4 benefits South Africa benefits from tourism through the growth in the gross domestic of tourism: product (GDP), employment and infrastructure development. An additional H – Households – HOT benefit is that spending by foreign tourists results in an increase in foreign B – Businesses – BEACHES exchange earnings, which has a similar impact on the GDP to an increase I – Infrastructure – IN in exports. G – Government – GEORGE 13.7.1 Households Tourism benefits a household’s prosperity (wealth) in three ways: • More people earn salaries and wages because of additional job opportunities. • Infrastructure built for tourists is available both for tourists and local people’s use. • Skills: A variety of skills is required in the tourism industry. 13.7.2 Businesses Tourism has many benefits for the business sector: • The economic and basic services infrastructure required for tourism is provided by the public sector. • Tourism needs superstructure, which consists of businesses that provide accommodation, transport, built attractions, retailing and recreation services. • Superstructure is normally supplied by the private sector, and the building and running of the superstructure make profits. • Public and private sector partnerships (PPPs) are used to develop tourist destinations. • Other work opportunities become available for the previously disadvantaged. These include: –– Employment opportunities in entertainment, laundry and transportation. –– Business opportunities in car rental, arts, craft and curio sales. 13.7.3 Government The main benefit to government is in the levying (charging) of taxes. This has two purposes: • To recover external costs: To compensate the host community for providing infrastructure. • To raise revenue: Tourists are seen as part of the overall tax base (e.g. airport departure taxes and hotel tourism levies increase the amount of taxes collected). 13.7.4 Infrastructure development South Africa benefits from tourism because all infrastructure built to support tourism becomes an asset to the country. As a result: • Residents and visitors enjoy adequate and well-maintained physical and basic services infrastructure. • The Department of Transport prioritises economic infrastructure. Spatial Development Initiatives and economic corridors focus on tourism, and public and private sector partnerships (PPPs) are used for the development of infrastructure. © Department of Basic Education 2014 186 CHAPTER 13 TOURISM Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 13 • Tourists require social infrastructure – ambulances, medical clinics, police protection services and information services – that becomes a national asset. 13.8 A South African tourism profile 1. Aim with visits: most foreign tourists visit South Africa for vacation (94.3%) and business (2%). The major attractions are the coast, wildlife and scenery. 2. Local destinations: Destinations link all aspects of tourism – demand, supply, transport, accommodation and marketing. The success of tourism is determined by the variety of destinations as well as the geographical distribution of tourist destinations. 3. Local tourists: There has been a steady growth in the number of South Africans travelling domestically. 4. Indigenous knowledge • Tourists want to understand the indigenous (local) culture, history and environment. • Tourists seek authentic (genuine) and unique destinations. They want to see how local people live and work. • The Khoi San are among the world’s oldest people, and their way of life is of interest to many foreign tourists. World heritage sites: • Mapungubwe (Limpopo) • Vredefort Dome (Free State and North West) • Sterkfontein caves • Robben Island • Richtersveld Cultural and Botanical Landscape Environmental World Heritage Sites: • iSimangiliso Wetland Park (ecosystems) • Cape Fynbos Region • uKhahlamba Drakensberg Park 13.9 Tourism policy suggestions The Department of Tourism leads and directs tourism policy. The starting point for policy on tourism is the White Paper on Tourism. Tourism policy is also supported and directed by the Tourism Forum, which is an advisory This is an easy topic. Memorise at body to the Minister of Tourism. Some tourism policy initiatives include the least 4 facts under following: each heading. 13.9.1 Marketing SA Tourism was created to promote tourism internationally and nationally: • Nationally: SA Tourism persuades South African citizens to travel in their own country. • Internationally: Marketing initiatives try to ensure South Africa is selected as a tourist destination. Foreigners visit our country for the following reasons: –– Value for money –– The world in one country © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 13 TOURISM 187

13 Chapter –– South Africa’s political miracle –– The climate –– Safety –– The friendliness of South Africa’s people –– The cleanliness and tranquility (peace) of our tourist destinations 13.9.2 Directing tourists’ spatial distribution Three approaches are followed to distribute tourists effectively to the many tourist sites: • Create representative bodies: Tourist-based industries are linked to form representative bodies. Tourists can then easily access knowledge about all tourist destinations. • Improve marketing: Tourists receive accurate product descriptions and information about competitive prices. Less well-known destinations are aggressively marketed. • Improve supporting services: The standards of transport, accommodation and other amenities (facilities and services) are world class. 13.9.3 Taxation Growth in tourism results in increased tourist taxes. Guidelines for levying taxes are: • Equity: Taxes must be fair, e.g. taxes on air tickets. • Efficiency: Nature and game reserves charge entry taxes to regulate tourist flows. • Simplicity: A flat tax rate is used to ensure taxes are easy to pay and administer. 13.9.4 Infrastructure Tourism requires economic infrastructure (roads), social infrastructure (ambulances) and basic services (clean water): • Infrastructure is maintained for the benefit of domestic and foreign tourists, as well as local citizens. • The basic considerations are: –– More infrastructure is required, e.g. water supplies. –– Existing infrastructure must be upgraded, e.g. upgrade dirt roads to tarred roads. –– Use new technology to extend the infrastructure, e.g. build the Gautrain. © Department of Basic Education 2014 188 CHAPTER 13 TOURISM Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 13 Activity 1 Study the diagram below and answer the questions that follow: I am an inbound tourist! I’m an outbound tourist! 1. Define the concept tourism. (4) 2. Explain the difference between an inbound and an outbound tourist.(4) 3. List any THREE World Heritage Sites in South Africa. (3) 4. Discuss the effect of tourism on infrastructure. (4 × 2) (8) [19] Answers to activity 1 1. Activities of people travelling to and staying in places 3 outside of their usual environment for no more than one consecutive year 3 for leisure, business and other purposes. 3 It does not relate to any work done for money in the place visited. 3(4) 2. Inbound tourist Tourists from other countries 3 who stay for more than one day 3 are inbound tourists (foreign tourists). Outbound tourist South African citizens travelling abroad 3 have the same effect as imports on the balance of payments. 3 (4) 3. Mapungubwe in Limpopo 3 Vredefort Dome (meteorite) in North West 3 Sterkfontein caves (Mrs Ples and Cradle of Humankind) 3 Robben Island 3 (any 3) (3) 4. Tourism requires economic infrastructure (roads), social infrastructure (ambulances) and basic services (clean water). 3 This infrastructure needs to be maintained for local citizens, domestic and foreign tourists. 3 Basic considerations for infrastructure development are: –– More infrastructure (e.g. water) 33 –– Upgrading (e.g. upgrade dirt roads to tarred roads) 33 –– New technology (e.g. transport) 33(8) [19] © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 13 TOURISM 189

13 Chapter Activity 2 Choose the correct answer from the following alternatives: Tourism is _________ intensive. A. Labour B. Capital C. Risk [2] Answer to activity 2 A. Labour 33 [2] Activity 3 Choose the correct answer from the following alternatives: Tourism benefits the household through_________ . A. Lower incomes B. Lower productivity C. More infrastructure [2] Answer to activity 3 C. More infrastructure 33 [2] Keep going! © Department of Basic Education 2014 190 CHAPTER 13 TOURISM Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 14 Environmental sustainability Environmental sustainability relates to the ability of the environment to survive its use for economic activity. The environment is not an unlimited resource and it is important that we sustain the environment so that it can be used by future generations. Overview TOPIC CONTENT CONTENT DETAILS FOR TEACHING, LEARNING AND ASSESSMENT PURPOSES 14. Analyse environmental sustainability and Basic economic investigate recent international agreements problem: in this regard, for example, the Rio de Environmental Janeiro and Johannesburg summits sustainability • The State of the Environment • Define/explain the relevant concepts –– Pollution • Briefly discuss the state of environment –– Definition –– Types –– Erosion, deforestation and climate change –– Conservation –– Preservation • Measures to Ensure Sustainability • Examine the measures to ensure sustainability in detail –– Using the market –– The market does not take care of social costs and benefits HOT QUESTION: How effective are the South African government’s interventions –– The market fails because of specific with regard to environmental reasons sustainability? Motivate your response! –– The mechanism of market and social costs and benefits © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 14 ENVIRONMENTAL STABILITY 191

14 Chapter –– Government Interventions –– Give property rights –– Pay for environmental use –– Levying of environmental tax –– Pay for environmental subsidies –– Issuing of marketable permits –– Public sector control –– Command and control –– Voluntary agreements –– Education –– International –– Sustaining biodiversity –– Chemical waste –– Hazardous waste –– Climate change policy – adaptation and mitigation –– Loss in indigenous knowledge • Major International Agreements • Distinguish between the concepts, –– Rio de Janeiro summit (UNCED) protocol and agreement –– Johannesburg summit (WSSD) • Briefly discuss the major protocols in –– Rio + 20 summit terms of the following: –– Kyoto-protocol –– Name of the agreement –– Millennium Development Goals –– Environmental issue to be addressed by the agreement/protocol –– United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (COP 17) –– Envisaged outcome of the agreement/protocol © Department of Basic Education 2014 192 CHAPTER 14 ENVIRONMENTAL STABILITY Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 14 14.1 Key concepts These definitions will help you understand the meaning of key Economics concepts that are used in this study guide. Understand these concepts Use mobile well. Use mobile notes to help you study them. notes to help you learn these key Terms Definitions concepts. Learn more about mobile notes on page xiv in the Command and The direct regulation of an industry or activity through introduction. Control (CAC) laws that state what is allowed and what is illegal Conservation Seeks creative continuity of the environment, while ensuring that environmental change considers the quality of life for both present and future generations Environmental The ability of the environment to survive its use for sustainability economic activity. It refers to meeting the needs of the present generation without compromising the needs of future generations Pollution Emissions which flow into the natural environment from human activity, and which are beyond the capacity of the environment to absorb Preservation To keep resources that are non-renewable intact, e.g. ecological systems, heritage sites The United Nations UNCED was held in 1992 and is known as the Earth Conference on Summit. The goal of UNCED was to create strategies Environment and to stop and reverse the effects of environmental Development degradation (damage), and to support international (UNCED) efforts to promote sustainable development in all countries © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 14 ENVIRONMENTAL STABILITY 193

14 Chapter 14.2 The state of the environment The state of the environment is very important for environmental sustainability. If the environment is damaged, it will become more difficult to sustain life on earth. The environment can be damaged by excessive (too much) mining; by farming without allowing the soil to recover; by excess fishing without allowing the fishing stocks to build up again; and by not controlling the release of pollution. 14.2.1 Pollution Pollution relates to the introduction of contaminants (poisons) that damage the natural environment. Pollution can come from chemical substances released by factories, as well as from household and business waste and rubbish. Pollution policy is difficult to apply in practice. The following are 3 ways of dealing with pollution: • Technology and control: New technology is cleaner and has less impact on the environment. The government controls pollution by limiting the use of older technologies that pollute the environment. • Marginal decisions: These are decisions made by government on what acceptable levels of pollution are. If the government is too tolerant, or makes its decisions in the interest of expanding business rather than sustaining the environment, then pollution levels can rise to the point where they damage the environment. • Self-interest: For example, keeping a beach litter-free. People use dustbins on the beach because they want to use a beach that is clean. 14.2.2 Conservation Conservation relates to the preservation (looking after) of natural resources to ensure they are not completely used up and disappear from the environment. Conservation is necessary due to pollution and the over- utilisation (using too much) of resources: The conservation of stocks (resources): • Conservation is needed when stocks are utilised (used) more than they can reproduce to replace what has been used. • This leads to a search for substitutes. • Conservation policies help to conserve renewable stocks (e.g. trees) and non-renewable stocks (e.g. fossil fuels). Maintaining renewable stocks: • A market economy has an interest in conservation as it helps maintain renewable stocks, e.g. timber and fishing. Conservation is achieved through the force of demand and supply which helps to sustain these kinds of industries. • Direct controls: The government maintains the stock levels of environmental resources through the issuing of permits and quotas. For example, the government sets quotas for fishing to stop catches being so large that they exceed (are bigger than) the growth of the fish population. It also sets quotas for cutting down trees to ensure deforestation does not exceed the rate of renewal. © Department of Basic Education 2014 194 CHAPTER 14 ENVIRONMENTAL STABILITY Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 14 14.2.3 Preservation Preservation is linked to conservation. It is about preserving existing assets to ensure they do not get used in a way that is destructive to the environment. • Private property: A game reserve may be sold to a businessman to be used for farming. But the government can intervene and stop the sale because they recognise the importance to the environment of preserving game reserves. • Preservation requires compromise (give and take): Farmers may develop their river mouth as a holiday resort. If this is not controlled, and too many other farmers do the same, the entire ecosystem will be damaged, and animal and plant life will be negatively affected. • Government policy: Government intervenes to preserve environmental assets by: –– Buying, confiscating, expropriating (taking ownership) or nationalising resources, e.g. indigenous forests. –– Subsidising key resources, e.g. privately owned ecosystems. 14.2.4 Externalities Externalities imply costs and benefits that were not planned for. • The extra costs and benefits of externalities are not factors when the state of the environment is assessed. • Goods that have negative externalities such as air and water pollution are generally oversupplied in the market. • When businesses are expected to bear the cost of equipment to reduce pollution, it could have a positive externality on others. Businesses tend to spend little on pollution abatement equipment due to its limited marginal private benefit. The major role of government, regarding the environment, is to correct inefficiencies arising from externalities. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 14 ENVIRONMENTAL STABILITY 195

14 Chapter 14.3 Measures to ensure sustainability It is important for governments to take steps to ensure sustainability. Sometimes, businesses are driven by self-interest, and they see nothing wrong with using all available resources if they can make a profit from them. There are 5 controlling mechanisms to ensure sustainability: 14.3.1 The market The market is driven by self-interest. The market considers the environment Use this mnemonic to help as an asset to be used for its own benefit. Sustainability is achieved in the you remember the free market only to the extent that resource prices rise as they become 5 controlling mechanisms scarce (less available), and through the development of environment- M – Market – Make friendly technology. I – Intervention – It There is a social interest in using the environment, not only to the direct C – Control – Count producer/consumer, but also to people in general, now and in the future. M – Measures – More This means we all have an interest in preserving the environment. A – Agreements – Always Reasons why the market fails to ensure sustainability: • The market sees the environment as a common resource. • Externalities such as air pollution caused by factories cannot be stopped without restrictive policies. • Lack of knowledge: Businesses cause damage without realising it, e.g. companies making aerosol cans (such as spray-on deodorants) and did not know the damaging effect they had on the ozone layer. • Carelessness: People continue with harmful practices and leave future generations to worry about the consequences. Optimum market decisions • Market mechanisms have failed when market forces fail to produce the desired result of environmental sustainability. • All costs and benefits are not captured in the market price. The future cost of the resource disappearing is not often considered. 14.3.2 Public sector intervention Public sector intervention aims to achieve social efficiency. This occurs through: Granting property rights: • The conservationist effect: People care for things that belong to them. • To prevent fauna and flora species from becoming extinct, people are granted property rights if they agree to preserve the flora and fauna. • Property rights can be expanded to common goods such as clean air. • The Kyoto Protocol is an international agreement whereby developed countries pay developing countries for their right to pollute. Charging for the use of the environment: • Price the environment: The government levies fees for waste produced and dumped in the environment. • In South Africa, local authorities levy charges on rubbish collection and sewage disposal. © Department of Basic Education 2014 196 CHAPTER 14 ENVIRONMENTAL STABILITY Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 14 • The best results are achieved when charges are proportional (related to) to waste produced. Environmental taxes: • Environmental taxes are taxes imposed on the output of goods that generate external environmental costs (pollution). These are called green taxes. • Carbon dioxide emissions from wineries and vehicle tyres are taxed. The tax rate is equal to the marginal external cost. Environmental subsidies: • Subsidies are granted to businesses to reduce environmental damage, e.g. the government subsidises new technology that saves energy, such as energy-saving light bulbs or solar geysers. Marketable permits: • The government gives each business a licence to pollute to a certain degree. • Businesses sell their licences to other businesses. • In South Africa, marketable permits are granted by the Department of Minerals and Energy. 14.3.3 Public sector control When government environmental policies don’t produce positive results, the government takes direct control through Command and Control (CAC) systems: Command and Control (CAC): • The government enforces policy by setting maximum levels of the emission of pollution. • Most developed countries have regulations that control air and water pollution. There are 3 approaches in CAC systems: • Quantity standards: These focus on the amount of pollution emitted. • Quality standards: These focus on the environmental impact of the pollution emitted. • Social impact standards: These focus on the effect on people of the pollution emitted. Voluntary agreements: • The government concludes agreements with businesses on a voluntary basis to cut pollution. Education: • Education is used to try to change people’s attitudes towards the environment. • Innovative approaches have been tried in the developing world to educate people, e.g. setting up community wildlife reserves. © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 14 ENVIRONMENTAL STABILITY 197

14 Chapter 14.3.4 International measures Environmental problems are global problems. For example, pollution from motor vehicles and the greenhouse effect have an impact on the entire world. Polluted air and water moves from one country to another, and if the ocean is polluted in America, it can affect beaches in Australia. International measures have been implemented to deal with the following 5 environmental problems: Biodiversity loss: • If species become extinct (die out completely), this cannot be reversed. • Modern techniques such as gene transplants can limit the loss of species. • The Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES) sets many policies to deal with species loss. Chemical waste: • Chemical waste is toxic (it has a negative effect on living beings and can cause infertility or death). • Chemical waste needs to be carefully managed to ensure it does not seep into the ground water. • The Stockholm Protocol is a United Nations agreement to limit chemical waste. Hazardous waste: • Hazardous waste is highly toxic. It has a slow decomposition rate (it stays poisonous for a very long time). • The most hazardous (dangerous) waste is radioactive waste from nuclear power. • The Basel Convention is an international agreement to manage nuclear waste. South Africa is a signatory to the agreement. Climate change: • Global warming primarily causes climate change. • Climate change can be reversed through widespread international co-operation, e.g. sharing weather information and weather patterns; agreeing to limit pollution; and banning chemical products such as greenhouse gases that damage the ozone layer. • The Kyoto Protocol of 1997 is an international agreement to limit the production of greenhouse gases, because voluntary reductions of carbon dioxide levels did not succeed. Loss of indigenous knowledge: • Indigenous people have a lot of knowledge about the natural environment, which they use to make a living. • Indigenous people traditionally used organic methods and natural processes. • As indigenous people lose their habitats or are urbanised, this knowledge is disappearing and is being lost to the world forever. • Local capacity-building is very important for the environmental sustainability of indigenous people, i.e. finding a way for them to earn a living in their traditional environment. © Department of Basic Education 2014 198 CHAPTER 14 ENVIRONMENTAL STABILITY Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Chapter 14 14.3.5 Major international agreements Since the 1990’s the United Nations has convened various meetings with all countries worldwide on issues affecting them. They should take responsibility for the management of these issues. • Rio de Janeiro summit (UNCED): This summit took place in 1992 with the objective of sustainable development. Envisaged outcomes included: environmental protection as an integral part of development, cooperation to conserve, protect and restore the health of the ecosystem, prevent environmental degradation where the polluter should bear the cost of pollution and assess the environmental impact. • Johannesburg summit (WSSD): Hosted in 2002 in Johannesburg on Sustainable Development. Envisaged outcome of the programme includes: poverty eradication, changing unsustainable patterns of consumption, globalisation, health and the environment. • Rio +20 summit: Also known as die United Nations Conference on Sustainable Development took place in Brazil. The main issue was sustainable growth and poverty eradication without damaging the environment. It was agreed that a green economy would be one of the tools for sustainable development. Sustainable development goals covering economic, social and environmental aspects will replace the MDG from 2013. • Kyoto-protocol: This conference held in 1997 in Kyoto, established legally binding obligations whereby industrialised countries agreed to PAY SPECIAL ATTENTION NB reduce their emission of six greenhouse gases. NB • Millennium Development Goals: Communities depend on healthy ecosystems to survive and prosper. Some of the MDGs are: eradication of extreme poverty and hunger, achieve universal primary The Kyoto conference was education, gender equality, reducing child mortality rates, held in Japan in 1997 and HINT! improve focused specifically on climate hint maternal health, combat HIV/Aids and other diseases and create a global partnership for development. change. It resulted in the Kyoto Protocol which attempted to • United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (COP 17): get the developed countries The 17th Conference of the Parties was held in Durban where the to commit to reducing their following decisions were taken: e.g. EG - worked examples emission of greenhouse gases. –– Commitment to the Kyoto Protocol and reducing pollution by greenhouse gases. –– A Green Climate Fund to help developing countries to establish exams cleaner sources of energy and to adapt to climate change. –– An Adaptation committee of 16 members to report to COP 18 on the improvement of the ability of the poorest and most vulnerable countries to adapt to climate change, better protection and help against losses and damage related to climate change. activity ACTIVITIES boy and girl-left and right of page activity Step by step comment comment © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics CHAPTER 14 ENVIRONMENTAL STABILITY 199

14 Chapter Activity 1 Study the following sign and answer the questions that follow: 1. What environmental hazard is depicted in the above logo? (1) 2. Explain in your own words how the above can threaten the environment.(3) 3. Name an international protocol which addresses this hazard. (2) [6] Answers to activity 1 1. Chemical waste 3(1) 2. Pollution of water resources which can be very harmful to humans 3 plants and animals 3(3) 3. The Stockholm Protocol 33 (2) [6] You are there, well done! © Department of Basic Education 2014 200 CHAPTER 14 ENVIRONMENTAL STABILITY Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics

Appendix Appendix: Exemplar exam papers The 2014 Economics exams have a new format in line with CAPS. The Department of Basic Education has offered an example of Economics Paper 1 and Paper 2 with marking memoranda. Use this exam paper and marking memorandum to help you prepare for your exams: 1. Answer the questions in the exam. Time yourself so you complete it within 1½ hours (which is the time you will have in the real exam). 2. Treat each one as a ‘real’ exam by making sure you have all the materials you need (pens, pencils, eraser, protractor and calculator). 3. This exercise is meant to test your knowledge – so don’t cheat yourself by looking up the answers provided in the marking memoranda before you’ve finished each exam. 4. Use the memoranda to check whether or not your answers are correct. Note where you have got answers wrong – these are the sections of the curriculum that you need to do more work on. Go back to your textbooks and to the relevant sections of this study guide, and spend time learning the sections for which you got the lowest marks. 5. And remember: success depends on practise, practise, practise, and then more practice! Repeat this exercise as often as you can so that you fly in your year-end exams! © Department of Basic Education 2014 Mind the Gap CAPS Grade 12 Economics APPENDIX 201

Economics/P1 2 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar Appendix 202 APPENDIX INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION 1. Answer FOUR questions as follows in the ANSWER BOOK: SECTION A: COMPULSORY SECTION B: Answer TWO of the three questions. SECTION C: Answer ONE of the two questions. 2. Answer only the required number of questions. Answers in excess of the required number will NOT be marked. 3. Number the answers correctly according to the numbering system used in this question paper. 4. Write the question number above each answer. 5. Read the questions carefully. 6. Start EACH question on a NEW page. 7. Leave 2–3 lines between subsections of questions. 8. Answer the questions in full sentences and ensure that the format, content and context of your responses comply with the cognitive requirements of the questions. 9. Use only black or blue ink. 10. You may use a non-programmable pocket calculator. 11. Write neatly and legibly. Copyright reserved Please turn over Economics CAPS Mind the Gap

Economics/P1 3 DBE/2014 Economics/P1 4 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar 1.1.7 The ratio of export prices and import prices is known as the … Mind the Gap SECTION A (COMPULSORY) A terms of trade. Economics CAPS QUESTION 1 30 MARKS – 15 MINUTES B exchange rate. C balance of payments. 1.1 Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. Choose the answer and write only the letter (A–C) next to the question 1.1.8 An example of an economic indicator is … number (1.1.1–1.1.8) in the ANSWER BOOK. A labour productivity. 1.1.1 The money market is a market for … term savings and loans. B life expectancy. C housing. (8 x 2) (16) A short- 1.2 Choose a description from COLUMN B that matches an item in COLUMN A. B short- and long- Write only the letter (A–J) next to the question number (1.2.1–1.2.8) in the C long- ANSWER BOOK. 1.1.2 Consumption of fixed capital is used to calculate the gross value COLUMN A COLUMN B added at … 1.2.1 Capital Transfer A the weakening of a currency as result of Account market forces A basic prices. B market prices. 1.2.2 Depreciation B policies aimed at increasing the economic C factor cost. livelihood of a specific area 1.2.3 Free floating C the interest rate which banks charge on 1.1.3 During an economic recession … 1.2.4 Tariffs loans to preferential clients A unemployment will increase. 1.2.5 Regional D world-wide interfacing with trade as the B production increases. development major element C spending increases. 1.2.6 Prime rate E the removal of unnecessary laws that 1.1.4 The new economic paradigm is embedded in … side policies. inhibit the free operation of markets 1.2.7 Globalisation A demand- F subaccount in the balance of payments B supply- 1.2.8 Deregulation C demand-and-supply- G a protection measure against unfair foreign competition 1.1.5 According to the UN classification, South Africa's HDI ranking is H exchange rate system categorised as a … level. I the interest rate at which the Reserve Bank A low charges commercial banks B middle C high J subaccount in the current account (8 x 1) (8) 1.1.6 Economic growth is measured in terms of … A real GDP. B real GDP per capita. C nominal GDP. Copyright reserved Please turn over APPENDIX 203 Copyright reserved Please turn over Appendix

Economics/P1 5 DBE/2014 Economics/P1 6 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar Appendix 204 APPENDIX 1.3 Give ONE term for each of the following descriptions. Write only the term next SECTION B to the question number (1.3.1–1.3.6) in the ANSWER BOOK. Answer TWO of the three questions in this section in the ANSWER BOOK. 1.3.1 A small initial change in spending produces a proportionately larger QUESTION 2: MACROECONOMICS 40 MARKS – 20 MINUTES increase in national income 2.1 Answer the following questions. 1.3.2 The sale of state-owned enterprises to the private sector 2.1.1 Give TWO examples of injections into the economy. (2 x 1) (2) 1.3.3 Goods used as inputs to produce other goods and services 2.1.2 What effect will an increase in the value of the rand against the 1.3.4 An increase in the capacity of the population to produce more US dollar have on imports from the USA? (1 x 2) (2) goods and services 2.2 Study the table below and answer the questions that follow. 1.3.5 It consists of people between the ages of 15 and 60/65 who are willing to work for an income EXTRACT FROM NATIONAL ACCOUNTS OF SOUTH AFRICA AT CURRENT PRICES 1.3.6 Return of land to their original owners after confiscation by the R million 2012 government (6 x 1) (6) Gross domestic product (GDP) at market prices 3 155 195 Primary income from the rest of the world 48 501 TOTAL SECTION A: 30 Primary income to the rest of the world A Gross national product (GNP) at market prices 3 085 188 [Source: SARB Quarterly Bulletin, March 2013] 2.2.1 Define the concept gross domestic product. (2) 2.2.2 Calculate the value of A in the table. (2) 2.2.3 Give an example of a primary income from the rest of the world. (2) 2.2.4 Explain the difference between current prices and constant prices. (4) Copyright reserved Please turn over Economics CAPS Mind the Gap Copyright reserved Please turn over

Economics/P1 7 DBE/2014 Economics/P1 8 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar Mind the Gap 2.3 Study the graph below that depicts a simplified two-sector economy QUESTION 3: ECONOMIC PURSUITS 40 MARKS: 20 MINUTES Economics CAPS (where E = C + I) and answer the questions that follow. 3.1 Answer the following questions. 3.1.1 State TWO fiscal policy measures that can be implemented to Expenditure (E) E=Y redistribute wealth in South Africa. (2 x 1) (2) E1 = 30 + 0,5Y 60 E0 = 20 + 0,5Y 3.1.2 What effect will import restrictions have on the local textile industry in South Africa? (1 x 2) (2) 40 3.2 Study the extract below and answer the questions that follow. 30 INDUSTRIAL POLICY ACTION PLAN 20 The Industrial Policy Action Plan (IPAP) is located in the vision of the National Development Plan and forms one of the fundamental cornerstones of the New Growth Path Framework. IPAP is predicated to bring about significant 45˚ structural change to the South African economy. The existing growth path is led by the consumption-driven sectors, which are growing twice as fast as the manufacturing sectors. The economy is import intensive, especially with 0 40 60 Income (Y) respect to value-added products. Stronger domestic growth in the manufacturing sector is imperative. High structural unemployment is a 2.3.1 Identify ONE participant in the economy above. (2) constant, oscillating between 22,5% and 25% if the strict definition is used. 2.3.2 What does the line E = Y represent? (2) [Adapted from www.bdlive.co.za] 2.3.3 Calculate the multiplier using the following formula: 3.2.1 Identify the main objective of the IPAP. (2) 1 3.2.2 How will the above objective be achieved? (4) k= (1 − mpg) 3.2.3 Explain how unemployment will be addressed by the New Growth Path Framework. (4) The marginal propensity to consume (mpc) = 0,8. (Show ALL calculations.) (4) 2.3.4 What is the relationship between the marginal propensity to consume (mpc) and the multiplier? (2) 2.4 Explain the new economic paradigm. (4 x 2) (8) 2.5 Argue ONE case in favour of free trade and ONE case against protectionism. (2 x 4) (8) [40] Copyright reserved Please turn over Copyright reserved Please turn over APPENDIX 205 Appendix

Economics/P1 9 DBE/2014 Economics/P1 10 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar Appendix 206 APPENDIX 3.3 Study the map below and answer the questions that follow. QUESTION 4: MACROECONOMICS AND ECONOMIC PURSUITS 40 MARKS – 20 MINUTES NORTH 4.1 Answer the following questions. 4.1.1 Name TWO problems of public sector provisioning. (2 x 1) (2) 4.1.2 What effect will low labour productivity have on inflation? (1 x 2) (2) 4.2 Study the graph below and answer the questions that follow. SUPPLY AND DEMAND OF US$ D1 S SOUTH D f Price of R12 dollars e [Source: www.cartoons.com] (R/$) R10 3.3.1 What is indicated by the solid line in the map above? (2) D1 S D 3.3.2 Name TWO countries that make up the G8 grouping of countries in 0 100 130 the North. (2) Quantity 3.3.3 Briefly comment on the trade relations between the countries in the North and South. (6) 4.2.1 At what point on the graph does the equilibrium for foreign exchange originally occur? (2) 3.4 Briefly explain the integrated manufacturing strategy in South Africa. (4 x 2) (8) 4.2.2 What happens to the value of the rand when DD shifts to D 1 D 1 ? 3.5 How can the repo rate be used to stimulate aggregate demand? (4 x 2) (8) Motivate your answer. (4) [40] 4.2.3 How can the Central Bank of South Africa intervene in the market to influence the exchange rate? (4) Copyright reserved Please turn over Economics CAPS Copyright reserved Please turn over Mind the Gap

Economics/P1 11 DBE/2014 Economics/P1 12 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar SECTION C Mind the Gap 4.3 Study the extract below and answer the questions that follow. Answer only ONE of the two questions in this section in the ANSWER BOOK. Economics CAPS SPECIAL ECONOMIC ZONES TO EMPLOY REGIONAL STRENGTHS STRUCTURE OF THE ESSAY: MARK ALLOCATION: Introduction Max. 2 The announcement that 10 potential special economic zones have been Body: identified in conjunction with the provinces could be a game-changer for Main part: Discuss in detail/In-depth discussion/Examine/ Max. 26 South African manufacturers. Such zones are intended to bring mainstream Critically discuss/Analyse/Compare/Evaluate/Distinguish/ economic activity to poor and isolated parts of South Africa by leveraging the Explain/Assess/Debate commercial potential of the particular regions. Additional part: Give own opinion/Critically discuss/Evaluate/ Max. 10 This will include industry clustering, or targeted development. Upington, in the Critically evaluate/Draw a graph and explain/Use the graph given Northern Cape, is a natural home for solar energy research and development. and explain/Complete the given graph/Calculate/Deduce/ Saldanha Bay will service the growing oil and gas industry on Africa's west Compare/Explain/Distinguish/Interpret/Briefly debate coast, while expanding iron ore exports. Conclusion Max. 2 TOTAL 40 The Department of Trade and Industry is devising a draft of regulations that will see the country's industrial development zones (IDZs) in Richards Bay, QUESTION 5: MACROECONOMICS 40 MARKS –35 MINUTES East London and Coega, near Port Elizabeth, taken into a new special economic zones framework. This envisages zones including free ports, free International trade is the backbone of our modern commercial world as producers in trade zones, and sector development zones. various nations try to profit from an expanded market, rather than be limited to selling within their own borders. A special corporate tax rate of 15% is proposed, well below the 28% currently applied. There was, however, a concern that the incentive would cause • Discuss export promotion as part of South Africa's international trade policy. dislocation and would have 'distorting effects' on the economy. (26 marks) • In your opinion, how successful is South Africa with the implementing of the above [Source: www.bdlive.co.za] policy? Motivate your answer. (10 marks) [40] 4.3.1 Define the concept IDZ. (2) QUESTION 6: ECONOMIC PURSUITS 40 MARKS – 35 MINUTES 4.3.2 Identify TWO new proposed economic regions. (2) Supply-side policies focus on the ability of markets to supply enough goods and services to meet aggregate demand. 4.3.3 What is the main difference between an IDZ and an SEZ? (2) • Discuss this statement by focusing on effectiveness and efficiency of markets in the South African context. (26 marks) 4.3.4 What, in your opinion, would be the 'distorting effects' on the • In your opinion, how successful is the South African government in providing for economy? (4) the basic needs of the poor? (10 marks) [40] 4.4 Explain leading and lagging business cycle indicators. (2 x 4) (8) TOTAL SECTION C: 40 GRAND TOTAL: 150 4.5 Explain the TWO social indicators used for children under the age of five. (2 x 4) (8) [40] TOTAL SECTION B: 80 Copyright reserved Copyright reserved Please turn over APPENDIX 207 Appendix

Economics/P1 2 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum Appendix SECTION A (COMPULSORY) 208 APPENDIX QUESTION 1 1.1 MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS 1.1.1 A short  1.1.2 C factor cost  1.1.3 A unemployment will increase  1.1.4 C demand and supply  1.1.5 B middle  1.1.6 A real GDP 1.1.7 C terms of trade 1.1.8 A labour productivity (8 x 2) (16) 1.2 MATCHING ITEMS 1.2.1 F subaccount in the balance of payment  1.2.2 A the weakening of a currency as result of market forces  1.2.3 H exchange rate system  1.2.4 G a protection measure against unfair international competition  1.2.5 B policies aimed at increasing the economic livelihood of a specific area  1.2.6 C the interest rate which banks charge on loans to preferential clients 1.2.7 D world-wide interfacing with trade as the major element  1.2.8 E the removal of unnecessary laws that inhibit the free operation of markets  (8 x 1) (8) 1.3 IDENTIFY THE CONCEPT 1.3.1 Multiplier effect  1.3.2 Privatisation  1.3.3 Capital goods  1.3.4 Economic development  1.3.5 Economically Active Population  1.3.6 Land restitution  (6 x 1) (6) TOTAL SECTION A: 30 Copyright reserved Please turn over Economics CAPS Mind the Gap

Economics/P1 3 DBE/2014 Economics/P1 4 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum SECTION B Mind the Gap 2.5 • Argument in favour of free trade:  - The free trade argument is persuasive. If each nation does what Economics CAPS Answer TWO of the three questions in this section in the ANSWER BOOK. it does best, everyone will enjoy lower prices and higher levels of output.  QUESTION 2 - Free trade leads to greater world production of traded goods, leading to an increase in economic welfare.  2.1 2.1.1 • Government spending  - Free trade allows countries to specialise in economic activities • Investments  in which they have a comparative advantage (economies of scale).  • Exports  Any (2 x 1) (2) - Free trade leads to mutual gains from international trade to all countries.  2.1.2 Imports will increase  (1 x 2) (2) - When there is free trade, more efficient distribution of resources  is possible because each country specialises in its most effective 2.2 2.2.1 The final value of goods and services produced within the borders production.  - Free trade offers consumers greater choice. It allows consumers of a country in one year.  (2) the choice of what to buy globally and not just from what is available locally.  Any 1 argument (2 x 2) (4) 2.2.2 R87 593 million  (2) • Argument against protectionism:  2.2.3 RSA citizen working and earning money in the UK.  (2) - Once the protection measures are introduced it became problematic to remove those measures. 2.2.4 Current prices – (Nominal) Does not take into account changes in - The local business never getting strong enough to confront the global the general price level  arena on their own. Any 1 argument (2 x 2) (4) Constant prices – (Real) Where the change in the general price [40] levels were taken into account  (4) 2.3 2.3.1 Households/Consumers  Business sector/Firms/Producers  (2) 2.3.2 It shows all the possible levels of expenditure and output  at (2) which the economy is in equilibrium  2.3.3 k = ___1____  (1 – 0,8) = 1 0,2 = 5  (4) 2.3.4 The bigger the mpc, the bigger the multiplier (and vice versa)  (2) 2.4 • Theories by the Monetarists ( Friedman) and Keynesians (Keynes) extreme and only true under specific circumstances  • Under real circumstances, government pursues economic growth irrespective of inherently stable or unstable market.  • Therefore governments aren't extreme, but transparent and follow pragmatic policies  • The root of the new economic paradigm is embedded in the prevention of unstable conditions that will lead to contractions  • According to the new economic paradigm it is possible for output to rise Copyright reserved Please turn over over extended periods of time without being hampered by supply constraints and inflationary pressures • Embedded in demand-side and supply-side policies  (Any 4 x 2) (8) Copyright reserved Please turn over APPENDIX 209 Appendix

Economics/P1 5 DBE/2014 Economics/P1 6 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum Appendix 3.4 • The main focus was on developing the global competitiveness of the SA 210 APPENDIX QUESTION 3 manufacturing enterprises (implemented by the DTI)  3.1 3.1.1 • Progressive personal income tax • It is a strategy that applies to all processes that transforms natural products into manufactured products • Wealth taxes • It involve cross cutting issues such as technology, human resource • Cash benefits - grants development, access to finance and infrastructure • Benefits in kind – food parcels/user fee charge/school meals/ • It also concentrate on key input sectors like transport, telecommunications • Land reform programmes – land restitution and land and energy redistribution • The IMS prioritise certain growth sectors like tourism, agriculture, • Property subsidies information technology and cultural industries (4 x 2) (8) • Youth wage subsidies  (Any 2 x 1) (2) 3.1.2 • Increased sales of locally produced clothing  3.5 • The SARB is using interest rates to manipulate the market • Expansion of local industries  • The repo rate is the key interest rate. This is the rate at which the SARB • Increased employment  lends money to banks for short periods of time (Accept any relevant answer) (Any 1 x 2) (2) • The SARB will lower the interest rate if it wants to stimulate the demand for credit.  3.2 3.2.1 • IPAP is predicated on the need to bring about significant • Many people will be encouraged to buy more at lower interest rates.  structural change to the South Africa economy.  (2) • This will lead to a higher demand for goods and services (4 x 2) (8) [40] 3.2.2 • Stronger domestic growth in the manufacturing sector.  • High employment levels  (4) 3.2.3 • Creation of employment.  • NGP envisage the creation of 5 million new jobs by 2020.  (4) 3.3 3.3.1 North/South divide or developed/developing countries (2) 3.3.2 USA, Canada, UK, France, Germany, Japan, Italy, Russia (2 x 1) (2) 3.3.3 Developing countries: mainly export raw to developed countries and import manufactured products from developed countries.  Developed countries: continue to subsidise production of their agricultural goods, making it difficult for developing countries to compete,  while insisting that developing countries eliminate their tariffs on manufactured goods.  Most developing countries have very little foreign trade.  (6) Copyright reserved Please turn over Economics CAPS Mind the Gap Copyright reserved Please turn over

Economics/P1 7 DBE/2014 Economics/P1 8 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum Mind the Gap QUESTION 4 4.4 Leading: Economics CAPS • Give consumers, businesses and the state a glimpse of the direction in 4.1 4.1.1 Accountability/Efficiency/Assessing needs/Pricing policy/ which the economy might be heading.  When these indicators rise, the level of economic activities will also rise a Parastatals/Privatisation (Any 1 x 2) (2) few months later.   Examples of leading indicators are job advertising space; inventory; and 4.1.2 Low productivity – low production – negative effect on the (4) sales.  (Any 2 x 2) aggregate supply of goods and services – same/or growing aggregate demand = rapid increase in general price level  Lagging: (demand inflation) (1 x 2) (2) • Lagging indicators won't change direction until after the business cycle has changed its direction.  4.2 4.2.1 Point, e  (2) • Examples of these indicators are hours worked in construction and total of commercial vehicles sold.  (Any 2 x 2) (4) 4.2.2 The value of the rand depreciates  As a result of the increase in the demand for dollars, the value of the rand decreases from R10 4.5 Infant mortality rates – the number of children younger than one year old for one dollar to R12 for one dollar (4) who die in a year per 1 000 births during that year. In 2010 in SA it was 34 per thousand (Any 2 x 2) (4) 4.2.3 In case of devaluation of the rand, the Central Bank will sell foreign exchange.  Under five mortality rates – the number of children under five years old In case of revaluation of the rand, the Central Bank will buy foreign who die per 1 000 live births during that year. In SA it was 50 per exchange.  (4) thousand.  (Any 2 x 2) (4) 4.3 4.3.1 An IDZ is a purpose-built industrial estate which is closed off and [40] situated in a specific area.  (2) TOTAL SECTION B: 80 4.3.2 Upington, in the Northern Cape, is a natural home for solar energy research and development.  Saldanha Bay will service the growing oil and gas industry on Africa's west coast, while expanding iron ore exports.  (2) 4.3.3 SEZ's currently get a special incentive, which is not applicable to the IDZ. A blanket corporate tax rate of 15%, well below the 28% currently applied.  IDZ is located in a smaller area linked directly to a port, whereby an SEZ covers a wider area. The plan is to incorporate the IDZ into an SEZ.  (2) 4.3.4 Distorting effects – the current IDZ does not benefit from the special tax incentive scheme.  The concern is that companies within the IDZ will close their operations and move over to the SEZ's to enjoy this incentive.  This could mean dislocations and movement to other areas.  Valuable investments will be lost in the area withdrawn. This will cause distortions in the production and output for that region.  (4) Copyright reserved Please turn over Copyright reserved Please turn over APPENDIX 211 Appendix

Economics/P1 9 DBE/2014 Economics/P1 10 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum Appendix 212 APPENDIX Methods of export promotion SECTION C Answer only ONE of the two questions in this section in the ANSWER BOOK • Incentives: The government supplies information on export markets, research on new markets, concessions on transport charges, export credit, etc. in order to STRUCTURE OF ESSAY: MARK ALLOCATION: stimulate exports.  Introduction Max. 2 • Subsidies: These include direct and indirect subsidies:  Body: – Direct subsidies: Cash payments to exporters. Main part: Discuss in detail/In-depth discussion/Examine/ Max. 26 – Indirect subsidies: Refunds on import tariffs and general tax rebates. Critically discuss/Analyse/Compare/Evaluate/Distinguish/ • Trade neutrality: Subsidies equal in size to import duties are paid.  Explain/Assess/Debate Neutrality can be achieved through trade liberalisation.  Additional part: Give own opinion/Critically discuss/Evaluate/ Max. 10 Advantages of export promotion Critically evaluate/Draw a graph and explain/Use the graph given and explain/Complete the given graph/Calculate/Deduce/ • There are no limitations to size of scale since the market is very large. Compare/Explain/Distinguish/Interpret/Briefly debate • Production is based on cost and efficiency. Conclusion Max. 2 • There is increased domestic production. TOTAL 40 • Exchange rates would be realistic. Disadvantages of export promotion QUESTION 5: MACROECONOMICS 40 MARKS – 30MINUTES • The real cost of production is reduced by subsidies and incentives. International trade is the backbone of our modern commercial world as producers in • The lack of competition because of incentives and subsidies forces competitors out various nations try to profit from an expanded market, rather than be limited to selling of the market. within their own borders. • Export promotion results in increased tariffs and quotas by powerful overseas competitors. • Discuss export promotion as part of South Africa's international trade policy. • Export promotion results in the protection of labour-intensive industries by (26 marks) developed countries. (Max 26) • In your opinion, how successful is South Africa with the implementing of the above policy? Motivate your answer. (10 marks) [40] NOTE: A maximum of 8 x 1 marks will be allocated for headings. Introduction ADDITIONAL PART Incentives or mechanisms to encourage domestic manufacturers to increase the The candidate can offer a positive or a negative argument. exports of goods and services to foreign countries  (Max. 2) (Any other relevant definition of export promotion) Positive/Negative  (1 x 2) Arguments   (2 x 2) Body Substantial evidence   (2 x 2) (Accept any other relevant answer) (Max. 10) MAIN PART Conclusion Reasons for export promotion . Any relevant conclusion. (Max. 2) • The country achieves significant export-led economic growth.  • Export promotion enlarges the production capacity of the country.  • Export markets are much bigger than local markets.  • More workers will be employed.  • Prices will be reduced.  Copyright reserved Please turn over Copyright reserved Please turn over Economics CAPS Mind the Gap

Economics/P1 11 DBE/2014 Economics/P1 12 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum Mind the Gap QUESTION 6: ECONOMIC PURSUITS 40 MARKS – 30 MINUTES • Deregulations Economics CAPS - The deregulation of regulated industries provide for greater competition in the Supply-side policies focus on the ability of markets to supply enough goods and market.  services to meet aggregate demand. - Many unnecessary laws and other barriers to competition in SA have been removed, although there are still some regulations, especially the informal • Discuss this statement by focusing on effectiveness and efficiency of markets in sector that has to be revised.  the South African context. (26 marks) • In your opinion, how successful is the South African government in providing in the • Labour legislation basic needs of the poor? (10 marks) [40] - In South Africa, the Labour Relations Act, the Employment Equity Act and the Basic Conditions of Employment Act provide a fair and equitable working Introduction environment.  - Such a workplace atmosphere will motivate workers to not only improve the The stimulation of supply means to increase the output, in terms of goods and quality of their work but also strive towards self-development.  services.  (Any other relevant definition) (Max. 2) • Small, medium and micro enterprises - In South Africa, the government encourages the establishment of SMMEs Body through various financing and support structures.  - Institutions such as Khula, the National Empowerment Fund, the Industrial MAIN PART: Development Corporations and Business Partners are in partnership with national government.  There are various factors that promote the efficiency and effectiveness of resources: - There are also free advisory centres available to provide information on topics such as managing and running SMMEs • Education and training - The Sectorial Education and Training Authorities (SETA's) have been created to • Broad-Based Black Economic Empowerment Act (BBBEE)  promote and facilitate work-related training for the different sectors of the - BBBEE is the economic empowerment of all black people, especially women, economy.  workers, youth, the disabled and people living in rural areas.  - The increase in the number of skilled workers will improve the productivity levels - It is aimed at addressing historical imbalances of the past, through increasing of workers. This will lead to an increase in output.  the number of black people that can own, control and control the country's economy and decreasing income inequalities.  • Fiscal policy • Research and Development - High tax rates discourage individuals, leading them to work less and businesses - An R&D strategy has been implemented by the government to improve national to invest less.  competitiveness.  - In South Africa the tax rates for individuals and businesses have been - The R&D Strategy has three pillars: innovation; science, engineering and systematically reduced. Tax incentives give industries an area to operate at technology (SET), human resources and transformation; creating an effective lower costs. These additional funds can be used to increase production.  government system.  - Individuals get tax rebates.  - Examples are the CSIR and Mintek - This will increase the disposable income levels of individuals. This will stimulate the demand for consumer goods and services.  • Privatisation - Many publicly owned businesses have been privatised or partly privatised.  • Competition - Privatisation is essential in promoting competition in the market place.  - The promotion of competition services as an incentive for new businesses to - It is also proven that private companies are more effective and efficient than enter the market.  state-owned businesses.  - The Competition Act is aimed at limiting the number of monopolies formed and - Examples are Telkom, Iscor,  reducing or eliminating the powers of monopolies.  - In addition, the many barriers of international trade have been lifted over the years.  Copyright reserved Please turn over Copyright reserved Please turn over APPENDIX 213 Appendix

Economics/P1 13 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum Appendix 214 APPENDIX • Infrastructure  - A well-developed infrastructure is the backbone of a growing economy. South Africa has one of the better-developed infrastructure is Southern Africa.  - Transport: The South African transport network consists of highways, railways and ports.  - Energy: Currently Eskom generates 95% of electricity in South Africa. It is one of the world's ten largest electricity suppliers in the world. It also exports to other countries.  - Telecommunications: this is one of the fastest growing sectors in the SA economy. It offers fixed-line, wireless and satellite communication and has the most developed network on the African continent.  • Cost of doing business - It refers to cost of doing business, such as transport, communication and energy costs. - Other costs involve water, sanitation, vehicle and registration and labour markets.  (Max 26) NOTE: A maximum of 8 x 1 marks will be allocated for headings. ADDITIONAL PART: In your opinion, is the South African government successful in meeting the basic needs of the poor? Motivate your response. Yes/No Almost 26% is regarded as absolutely poor in terms of international benchmark poverty line ($1,25 per day) (1) Social security grants: old age pensions, child support grants, disability grants (2) Benefits in kind: free quota water (6 000 litres per household) and electricity (20 kWh) per household, school-feeding schemes (3) Housing: RDP houses (4) Sanitation: Access to clean water, energy, sewerage system (5) Primary healthcare: poor receive free hospitalisation and medicine. From certain income levels fees are staggered. Immunisation for all children is free.  (6) Education: no-fee schools (Candidates must mention some of these basic needs and how it affects the poor) (Max.10) Conclusion Any relevant conclusion  (Max. 2) TOTAL SECTION C: 40 GRAND TOTAL 150 Economics CAPS Mind the Gap Copyright reserved

Economics/P2 2 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar Mind the Gap INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION Economics CAPS 1. Answer FOUR questions as follows in the ANSWER BOOK: SECTION A: COMPULSORY SECTION B: Answer TWO of the three questions. SECTION C: Answer ONE of the two questions. 2. Answer only the required number of questions. Answers in excess of the required number will NOT be marked. 3. Number the answers correctly according to the numbering system used in this question paper. 4. Write the question number above each answer. 5. Read the questions carefully. 6. Start EACH question on a NEW page. 7. Leave 2–3 lines between subsections of questions. 8. Answer the questions in full sentences and ensure that the format, content and context of your responses comply with the cognitive requirements of the questions. 9. Use only black or blue ink. 10. You may use a non-programmable pocket calculator. 11. Write neatly and legibly. Copyright reserved Please turn over APPENDIX 215 Appendix

Economics/P2 3 DBE/2014 Economics/P2 4 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar Appendix 216 APPENDIX SECTION A (COMPULSORY) 1.1.7 When tourists are given the opportunity to experience South Africa's natural beauty it is known as … tourism. QUESTION 1 30 MARKS – 15 MINUTES A cultural B eco- 1.1 Various options are provided as possible answers to the following questions. C international Choose the answer and write only the letter (A–C) next to the question number (1.1.1–1.1.8) in the ANSWER BOOK, for example 1.1.9 C. 1.1.8 The government can play a very important role in environmental sustainability through its … policy. 1.1.1 As a rule, a firm should consider shutting down its business at the point where its … A monetary B fiscal A MC = AVC. C urbanisation (8 x 2) (16) B MR = AC. C MC = MR. 1.2 Choose a description from COLUMN B that matches an item in COLUMN A. Write only the letter (A–J) next to the question number (1.2.1–1.2.8) in the 1.1.2 A market which has major government influence and control can ANSWER BOOK. be described as being ... COLUMN A COLUMN B A unregulated. 1.2.1 Core inflation A price increases combined with high B deregulated. unemployment C regulated. 1.2.2 Stagflation B items that have highly volatile prices are 1.1.3 The value of inputs owned by the entrepreneur and used in the 1.2.3 Climate change excluded from the CPI basket production process is known as ... costs. 1.2.4 Pollution C when it is impossible to increase the A variable welfare of one without decreasing the 1.2.5 Duopoly welfare of another B explicit C implicit 1.2.6 Pareto efficiency D often under-produced by the market, for example education 1.1.4 A patent which gives one the exclusive right to manufacture a 1.2.7 Merit goods product is characteristic of a/an … monopoly. E two industries that dominate a particular 1.2.8 Normal profit market A artificial B natural F excessive price increases C local G average revenue = average costs 1.1.5 The aggregate demand for goods and services that exceeds the aggregate supply thereof is known as … H occurs due to global warming A cost-push inflation. I the flow of residual emissions exceeds the B demand-pull inflation. natural environment's capacity to absorb C deflation. them 1.1.6 Tourism is … intensive. J cigarettes and alcohol (8 x 1) (8) A labour B capital C risk Copyright reserved Please turn over Copyright reserved Please turn over Economics CAPS Mind the Gap

Economics/P2 5 DBE/2014 Economics/P2 6 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar Mind the Gap 1.3 Give ONE term for each of the following descriptions. Write only the term next SECTION B to the question number (1.3.1–1.3.6) in the ANSWER BOOK. Answer any TWO of the three questions in this section in the ANSWER BOOK. Economics CAPS 1.3.1 A market structure dominated by a small number of large firms QUESTION 2: MICROECONOMICS 40 MARKS – 20 MINUTES 1.3.2 Prices that are set below equilibrium price in the market and which 2.1 Answer the following questions. allow the poor greater access to goods and services 2.1.1 Name TWO redress methods used by the government to improve 1.3.3 The additional cost incurred when production is increased by one income distribution. (2 x 1) (2) more unit 2.1.2 Explain how price leadership can result in consumers paying 1.3.4 Seeks creative continuity of the environment, while ensuring that higher prices in an oligopoly market. (1 x 2) (2) environmental change considers the quality of life of both present and future generations 2.2 Study the graph below and answer the questions that follow. 1.3.5 The cost of a basket of consumer goods and services of an LONG-RUN EQUILIBRIUM IN A MONOPOLY MARKET average South African household Price Cost LMC Revenue 1.3.6 A general increase in prices caused by increases in factor input costs (6 x 1) (6) a LAC TOTAL SECTION A: 30 25 s b 19 14 E DD/AR MR 0 100 120 130 Quantity 2.2.1 Define the concept long run as used in economics. (2) 2.2.2 Identify the optimum production level. (2) 2.2.3 Explain why the marginal revenue (MR) curve will always lie below the demand curve (DD) in this type of market. (2) 2.2.4 Calculate the profit or loss of this monopolist. Show ALL calculations. (4) Copyright reserved Please turn over APPENDIX 217 Copyright reserved Please turn over Appendix

Economics/P2 7 DBE/2014 Economics/P2 8 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar Appendix 218 APPENDIX 2.3 Study the article below and answer the questions that follow QUESTION 3: CONTEMPORARY ECONOMIC ISSUES 40 MARKS – 20 MINUTES COMMISSION CRACKS GLASS CARTEL 3.1 Answer the following questions. 3.1.1 Give TWO examples of places or events that form part of Six firms active in the manufacturing and distribution of glass products for the cultural tourism. (2 x 1) (2) building and construction industry have been found to be involved in 3.1.2 How will a sound political climate lead to an increase in tourist a cartel by a Competition figures? (1 x 2) (2) Commission investigation. 3.2 Study the cartoon below and answer the questions that follow. In its latest ruling on anti- competitive practices in the building and construction industry, the commission alleged that Yo! AMIGO!! National Glass, Northern Hardware We need that tree & Glass, Furman and Glass, to protect us from McCoy's Glass, AF-FSL Glass and Glass South Africa were involved in price the greenhouse fixing, market allocation and the fixing of trading conditions through various effect! arrangements and agreements. The investigation into cartel activity in the glass industry was initiated in February 2010 based on information received in June 2009. AF-FSL Glass was granted conditional leniency from prosecution. [Adapted from Business Report, 9 April 2013] Developed countries 2.3.1 Define the term cartel. (2) 2.3.2 Which market structure is depicted in the above article? (1) 2.3.3 What prompted the Competition Commission to investigate anti-competitive behaviour in the glass industry? (2) [Source: Internet Globalisation, 22 February 2013] 2.3.4 Explain how the glass cartel's behaviour can affect the economy 3.2.1 What is the meaning of the greenhouse effect? (2) negatively. (4) 3.2.2 Why is it necessary to prevent global warming at all times? (2) 2.3.5 Name the institution that the glass companies can approach if they are not happy with the fine imposed on them. (1) 3.2.3 Name ONE international convention/protocol against global warming. (2) 2.4 Explain the reasons why cost-benefit analysis is used in practice. (8) 3.2.4 Explain how the market fails to protect the environment. (4) 2.5 How can non-price strategies assist firms to increase their market share? (8) [40] Copyright reserved Please turn over Copyright reserved Please turn over Economics CAPS Mind the Gap

Economics/P2 9 DBE/2014 Economics/P2 10 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar 3.3 Study the table below and answer the questions that follow. QUESTION 4: MICROECONOMICS & CONTEMPORARY ECONOMIC ISSUES 40 MARKS – 20 MINUTES Mind the Gap Economics CAPS EXPECTED GDP: R51,1 billion 4.1 Answer the following questions. Tourist group Volume of local tourism Value of local market market (%) 4.1.1 Name TWO characteristics of monopolistic competition. (2 x 1) (2) (number of trips) Visits to family and friends 32 37,2 4.1.2 What is the value of the production price index (PPI) as an inflation Holiday makers 8,1 44,5 indicator? (1 x 2) (2) Religion 5,3 4 Business 3,8 12,8 4.2 Study the extract below and answer the questions that follow. Medical reasons 0,8 14 [Fictitious figures] TIME RIPE FOR SMART TRANSPORT 3.3.1 Which tourist group contributed most (%) to the local economy? (2) Motorists will have to reconsider their transport options in the light of current petrol price hikes. According to Findalift.co.za many motorists drive to work 3.3.2 Determine the percentage contribution to the gross domestic causing millions of empty seats daily. Registering with Findalift will bring you into contact with people traveling the same route on a daily basis. Sharing the product by people visiting friends and family. (2) total cost of travelling 25 km daily will save you more than R6 500 every year – four people per vehicle will bring this saving up to R10 000. The Universities 3.3.3 Why do you think that tourist figures increased locally after 1994? of Cape Town and Stellenbosch have already registered their students and (2 x 2) (4) employees to lower their travel costs. 3.3.4 How can tourism eradicate poverty in South Africa? (2 x 1) (2) [Adapted from Beeld, March 2013] 3.4 Discuss taxation as a fiscal measure to combat inflation. (4 x 2) (8) 4.2.1 Define the concept inflation. (2) 3.5 Discuss why the loss of indigenous knowledge requires international 4.2.2 Explain the influence Findalift might have on consumer measures. (4 x 2) (8) consumption expenditure. (4) [40] 4.2.3 What impact will reduced petrol costs have on savings and investment in general? (4) Copyright reserved Please turn over APPENDIX 219 Copyright reserved Please turn over Appendix

Economics/P2 11 DBE/2014 Economics/P2 12 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar Appendix 220 APPENDIX SECTION C 4.3 Study the graph below and answer the questions that follow. Answer any ONE of the two questions in this section in the ANSWER BOOK. NEGATIVE EXTERNALITIES – A CAUSE OF MARKET FAILURE Your answer will be assessed as follows: Price and cost STRUCTURE OF THE ESSAY: MARK ALLOCATION: (R) Introduction Max. 2 D SMC 1 SMC Body: Main part: Discuss in detail/In-depth discussion/Examine/ Max. 26 Critically discuss/Analyse/Compare/Evaluate/Distinguish/ Explain/Assess/Debate P1 b Additional part: Give own opinion/Critically discuss/Evaluate/ Max. 10 P a Critically evaluate/Draw a graph and explain/Use the graph given and explain/Complete the given graph/Calculate/Deduce/ Compare/Explain/Distinguish/Interpret/Briefly debate Conclusion Max. 2 D TOTAL 40 0 Q1 Q Quantity QUESTION 5: MACROECONOMICS 40 MARKS – 35 MINUTES Markets are broadly categorised into perfect and imperfect markets. However, in reality 4.3.1 Define the concept market failure. (2) very few examples of perfect markets exist. 4.3.2 Give ONE example of a negative externality. (1) • Examine the conditions of a perfect market in detail. (26 marks) • Draw a clearly labelled graph to show economic profit for an individual producer 4.3.3 Which curve indicates the social cost to society? (1) in the market. (10 marks) [40] 4.3.4 Explain how negative externalities can lead to market failure by using the data given in the above graph. (6) QUESTION 6: CONTEMPORARY ECONOMIC ISSUES 40 MARKS – 35 MINUTES 4.4 Explain inefficiency in the economy as a consequence of market failure. Tourism is one of the fastest growing industries worldwide. (4 x 2) (8) • Critically discuss the effects of tourism. (28 marks) 4.5 What are the effects of taxes and subsidies on the South African economy? • Evaluate how tourism benefits the households in your community by using appropriate examples. (10 marks) [40] (4 x 2) (8) [40] TOTAL SECTION C: 40 GRAND TOTAL: 150 TOTAL SECTION B: 80 Copyright reserved Economics CAPS Mind the Gap Copyright reserved Please turn over

Economics/P2 2 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum Mind the Gap SECTION A (COMPULSORY) Economics CAPS QUESTION 1 1.1 MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS 1.1.1 A (MC = AVC)  1.1.2 C (regulated)  1.1.3 C (implicit)  1.1.4 A (artificial)  1.1.5 B (demand-pull inflation)  1.1.6 A (labour)  1.1.7 B (eco)  1.1.8 B (fiscal)  (8 x 2) (16) 1.2 MATCHING ITEMS 1.2.1 B (items that have highly volatile prices are excluded from the CPI basket)  1.2.2 A (price increases combined with high unemployment)  1.2.3 H (occurs due to global warming)  1.2.4 I (the flow of residual emissions exceeds the natural environment's capacity to absorb them)  1.2.5 E (two industries that dominate a particular market)  1.2.6 C (when it is impossible to increase the welfare of one without decreasing the welfare of another)  1.2.7 D (often under-produced by the market e.g. education)  1.2.8 G (average revenue = average costs)  (8 x 1) (8) 1.3 IDENTIFY THE CONCEPT 1.3.1 Oligopoly  1.3.2 Maximum prices  1.3.3 Marginal cost  1.3.4 Conservation  1.3.5 Consumer Price Index  1.3.6 Cost push inflation  (6 x 1) (6) TOTAL SECTION A: 30 Copyright reserved Please turn over APPENDIX 221 Appendix

Economics/P2 3 DBE/2014 Economics/P2 4 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum Appendix 222 APPENDIX SECTION B 2.4 • Market signals, e.g. price helps to allocate resources through demand and supply.  Answer TWO of the three questions from this section in the ANSWER BOOK. • Goods supplied by the government such as roads, bridges etc. are provided free.  QUESTION 2: MACROECONOMICS • With the absence of market signals, decisions on the desirability of a project may be subjective.  2.1 2.1.1 • BEE • Objective criteria may be required to ensure economic efficiency in resource allocation.  • affirmative action • CBA brings greater objectivity to decision making.  • land restitution • This is done by identifying all the relevant benefits and costs of a project • land redistribution  where an informed decision can be made (Any 4 x 2) (8) • property subsidies (for RDP houses)  (2 x 1) (2) 2.5 • An important aspect of non-price competition is to build brand loyalty,  A dominant firm may increase the price of a product His rivals product recognition and product differentiation.  2.1.2 will see this as a signal to do the same and increase prices.  • This is done by means of advertising and marketing. As a result, firms (1 x 2) (2) tend to spend a substantial amount of money on this.  • Other forms of non-price competition include: 2.2 2.2.1 The long run is the period of production where all factors can - extended shopping and business hours change. The time is long enough for variable and fixed factors to - doing business over the internet change (2) - after-sales services - loyalty rewards for customers 2.2.2 100 (2) - In-store competitions - door-to-door deliveries (Any 4 x 2) (8) 2.2.3 The negative sloping demand curve means that more goods are [40] sold at low prices, hence additional revenue will decrease as more goods are sold.  (2) 2.2.4 Unit profit: 25 – 19= 6 Total profit: 6 x 100 = R600 OR TR – TC  (25 x 100)  – (19 x 100)  = R600 (4) 2.3 2.3.1 A cartel is a group of producers working together to form a monopoly by fixing prices.  (2) 2.3.2 Oligopoly (1) 2.3.3 They received information when AF-FSL Glass had applied for leniency for their part in collusive behaviour.  (2) 2.3.4 • Consumers will pay higher prices.  • Competition will be eliminated which could result in poor quality goods.  • Supply will be reduced which will affect employment Any(2 x 2) (4) 2.3.5 Competition Appeal Court (1) Copyright reserved Please turn over Copyright reserved Please turn over Economics CAPS Mind the Gap

Economics/P2 5 DBE/2014 Economics/P2 6 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum QUESTION 3: CONTEMPORARY ECONOMIC ISSUES 3.4 • Direct taxation increased  less money available for consumption expenditure by consumers  Mind the Gap • Economics CAPS 3.1 3.1.1 • Museums  Indirect taxation increased  as part of a restrictive fiscal policy • Art galleries  government can reduce its spending or increase taxation e.g. sins • Archaeological sites  tax (2 x 4) (8) • Festivals  • Sports events  3.5 • Today's tourists seek authenticity and uniqueness at destinations  Any other relevant fact • They want to understand the indigenous culture, history and environment (2) and how local people live and work  3.1.2 • Where government intervenes to preserve environmental • Of importance is the World Heritage Sites, e.g. Mapungubwe, Vredefort assets more tourists will visit a country  Dome, Sterkfontein Caves and Robben Island  • Better control and management of e.g. indigenous forests will • Environmental World Heritage Sites represent the extreme of our indigenous environmental uniqueness, e.g. iSimangaliso Wetland maximize a country's income over the long run  (8) Park (4 x 2) Any other relevant fact (2) [40] 3.2 3.2.1 Pollutants contribute to a layer or blanket in the atmosphere that traps heat  (2) 3.2.2 There is a steady increase in the average temperature of the earth's near-surface air and oceans that influences all economic sectors like agriculture and transport negatively  (2) 3.2.3 • Kyoto protocol  • Montreal protocol  Any other acceptable answer (1 x 2) (2) 3.2.4 • The environment is a common resource many parts of the environment are not privately owned e.g. the sea • Externalities  when people pollute the environment costs are borne by others • Lack of knowledge  people cause damage without realizing it • Carelessness  people continue with harmful practices and leave future generations to worry about the consequences (4) 3.3 3.3.1 Holiday makers with a 44,5 % share  (2) 3.3.2 51,1 x 37,2 100  = 19%  /19%  (2) 3.3.3 • Safety  • Increased media coverage  • Interest in politics  • Interest in sport  • Improved infrastructure  (2 x 2) (4) 3.3.4 • Job creation – jobs can be provided immediately  • Entrepreneurial opportunities  • Tourism allows rural people to share in the benefits of tourism development  Any other relevant fact (2) Copyright reserved Please turn over Copyright reserved Please turn over APPENDIX 223 Appendix

Economics/P2 7 DBE/2014 Economics/P2 8 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum Appendix 224 APPENDIX QUESTION 4 4.4 a) Productive inefficiency/Technical inefficiency When resources are not used appropriately to produce the maximum number of goods at the lowest cost and best quality. 4.1 4.1.1 • The product is differentiated.  • Use of non-price competition. e.g. advertising.  b) Allocative inefficiency • Displays a hybrid structure. It is a combination of competition When resources are not allocated in the right proportions and the product and a monopoly.  mix does not match consumers' tastes.i.e. the quantity and type of • There are many sellers goods produced do not cater for consumers' needs.  • entry and exit is easy Entry into the market is easy.  • Businesses have little control over the price of the product.  An allocation of resources is inefficient if it is possible to reallocate resources • Information for buyers and sellers is incomplete.  to make one person better off while not making someone else worse off.  (8) • Collusion is not possible under monopolistic competition.  (Any 2 x1) (2) 4.5 ENVIRONMENTAL TAXES: • Rather than taxing environmental use, tax could be imposed on 4.1.2 Pertains to cost of production  the output of a good wherever external environmental costs are generated  Basket consists of goods only  Capital and intermediate goods are included  • These are known as green taxes, charged on items such as tyres – will increase the price  Prices exclude VAT  SUBSIDIES: Interest rates are excluded  (2) • Provide subsidies for activities that reduce environmental damage  Prices of imported goods are shown explicitly  (Any 1 x 2) • Cost to reduce or prevent the harmful effects is recovered from the proceeds of taxation  4.2 4.2.1 Inflation is a sustained and significant increase in the general price • E.g. development of new techniques or equipment to save energy or to level over a period of time and a simultaneous decrease in the reduce smoke  (Any 2 x 4) (8) value or buying power of money.  (2) [40] 4.2.2 Major savings on transport cost will increase consumer TOTAL SECTION B: 80 consumption expenditure  The consumer can redirect his consumption expenditure on other goods and services  (4) 4.2.3 Reduced petrol cost could increase savings and investment in general if most of the consumer's needs are met.  OR Reduced petrol cost will not necessarily influence savings and investment if the consumer spends the extra money on goods and services.  (4) 4.3 4.3.1 Market failure occurs when the market is not operating efficiently e.g. a firm may produce fewer goods than it is capable of.  (2) 4.3.2 • Pollution • Traffic congestion Any other relevant answer (1) 4.3.3 MSC 1  (1) 4.3.4 Negative externalities are costs to third parties which are not included in the market price. Therefore production is at Q, If the external costs were included then production would be at Q1 which is less than Q and is socially desirable. Thus goods which generate negative externalities are over-produced.  (6) Copyright reserved Please turn over Copyright reserved Please turn over Economics CAPS Mind the Gap

Economics/P2 9 DBE/2014 Economics/P2 10 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum SECTION C c) No preferential treatment/discrimination •Collusion occurs when buyers and sellers make an agreement to limit Mind the Gap Economics CAPS Answer ONE question from this section in the ANSWER BOOK. competition. In a perfect market no collusion takes place.  • Buyers and sellers base their actions solely on price, homogenous product fetch STRUCTURE OF ESSAY: MARK ALLOCATION: the same price and therefore no preference is shown for buying from or selling Introduction Max. 2 to any particular person.  d) Free competition/Unregulated market:  Body: Max. 26 • Buyers must be free to buy whatever they want from any firm and in any • Main part: Discuss/Distinguish/Differentiate/Explain/Analyse quantity.  /Evaluate/Assess • Sellers must be free to sell what, how much and where they wish.  • Additional part: Use/Draw/Sketch a graph/diagram …/ Max. 10 • They should be no state interference and no price control.  Deduce …/Outline/Briefly explain/Expand on .../Your own • Buyers should not form groups to obtain lower prices nor should sellers combine opinion to enforce higher prices. Conclusion Max. 2 e) Efficient transport and communication TOTAL 40 • Efficient transport ensures that products are made available everywhere.  • In this way changes in demand and supply in one part of the market will QUESTION 5: MACROECONOMICS 40 MARKS – 25 MINUTES influence the price in the entire market.  • Efficient communication keeps buyers and sellers informed about market Markets are broadly categorised into perfect and imperfect markets. However, in reality conditions.  very few examples of perfect markets exist. f) All participants must have perfect knowledge of market conditions.  • All buyers and sellers must be fully aware of what is happening in any part of • Examine the conditions of a perfect market in detail. (26 marks) the market.  • Draw a clearly labelled graph to show economic profit for an individual producer • Technology has increased competition as information is easily obtained via the in the market. (10 marks) [40] Internet.  g) Freedom of entry/exit:  There is complete freedom of entry and exit, that is to Introduction say the market is fully accessible. Buyers and sellers are completely free to enter or to leave the market. Entry should not be subject to any restrictions in It is a market structure with a large number of participants who are price-takers. the form of legal, financial, technological or other barriers that curtail the The price is determined by the market demand and supply, This market is most freedom of movement of buyers and sellers.  efficient in the allocation of resources  Max (2) h) Mobility of factors of production:  All factors of production are completely mobile,  in other words labour, capital and all other factors of production can BODY: move freely from one market to another.  i) No collusion: Collusion between sellers does not occur.  In a perfectly Characteristics: competitive market, each buyer and seller acts independently from one another. Collusive practices are illegal in South Africa, according to the Competition Act a) Products must be homogenous (i.e. identical).  1998.  • Products must be identical. There should be no differences in style, design and Max. 26 quality.  • In this way products compete solely on the basis of price and can be purchased NOTE: A maximum of 8 x 1 marks will be allocated for headings anywhere.  • If products differ, sellers can persuade buyers to buy their more expensive products by grading them.  E.g. The markets for maize and coal consist of homogenous products which are graded. Grade 1 fetches a higher price than other grades. b) There should be a large number of buyers and sellers.  • It should not be possible for one buyer or seller to influence the price. • When there are many sellers the share of each seller to the market is so small that the seller cannot influence the price.  • Sellers are price-takers, they accept the prevailing market price. If they increase prices above the market price, they will lose customers. . Copyright reserved Please turn over APPENDIX 225 Copyright reserved Please turn over Appendix

Economics/P2 11 DBE/2014 Economics/P2 12 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum Appendix 226 APPENDIX QUESTION 6: CONTEMPORARY ECONOMIC ISSUES 40 MARKS – 25 MINUTES BODY: ADDITIONAL PART Tourism is one of the fastest growing industries worldwide. Cost/revenue Economic Profit • Critically discuss the effects of tourism. (28 marks) • Evaluate how tourism benefits the households in your community by using MC appropriate examples. (10 marks) [40]  AC Introduction  E1  In general we say that tourism involves people moving from their usual place of P1 MR / AR  residence to a destination where they make use of the facilities and take part in   Mark allocation for graph: activities  • Position/shape of MC curve = 1 mark Any other relevant definition. (Max. 2) • D/MR curve = 1 mark S R • Position of AC curve = 1 marks • Equilibrium = 1 mark BODY: MAIN PART • Indication of price/quantity = 1 mark • Labelling (shading) of profit = 1 mark 1.1 GDP  MAXIMUM MARKS = 10 • Biggest impact on services industry than on agriculture or manufacturing  • Indirect contribution: service-based industry – responsible for 65% of GDP in developed economies and 40% of GDP in developing countries  0 Q1 Quantity  • Direct contribution: contribution of 6,8% of GDP compared to 11.6% worldwide.  (Max. 10) 1.2 Employment  • Employs 7% of SA workforce (1,12 million)  Conclusion • largest provider of jobs and earner of foreign exchange, due to:  Tourism is labour intensive  The characteristics above indicate that the market has to meet strict requirements  Tourism employs many skills  before it can be described as perfectly competitive   Tourism can provide immediate employment   Tourism provides entrepreneurial opportunities  Although there very few examples, the conditions of a perfect market does serve a frame of reference when studying other markets.  1.3 Poverty  • Tourism is fast + effective distribution mechanism in development of rural (Any other relevant conclusion) (Max. 2) areas  • Prime tourism attractions located in rural areas  • Promote balanced + sustainable form of development  • Provides alternative to urbanisation, permitting people to continue - a rural family existence, enfranchising both women and youth  • Offers diversity of income sources to poor people:  Allowing them a stake  Empowering them  Creating partnerships  Copyright reserved Please turn over Economics CAPS Mind the Gap Copyright reserved Please turn over

Economics/P2 13 DBE/2014 Economics/P2 14 DBE/2014 NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum NSC – Grade 12 Exemplar – Memorandum Mind the Gap 1.4 Externalities Conclusion Has positive and negative impacts: In reality tourism is a much wider concept and can be quite demanding but very Economics CAPS  Attracts large amounts of revenue, but can cause undue environmental interesting when it is related to a specific community  damage (uses resources and produces waste)  Any other relevant conclusion (Max. 2)  Rapid growth aimed at short-term benefits has more negative than positive effects: degeneration of traditions + cultural values, environmental damage TOTAL SECTION C: 40 to sites and natural settings – pollution and waste  GRAND TOTAL 150  Global tourism will grow due to increased population, improved living  standards, increased free time and expansion of transportation systems  Pressure on tourist sites will increase   Potential: attract revenue to country, alleviate poverty, conserve cultural and natural assets – needs conscious planning   Needs to achieve ethical and sustainable tourism must respect tradition and customs of area, plough back earnings into local community – area must be protected as attractive tourist resort.  1.5 Environment Industrial development has impact on physical environment in which it takes place. Creates environmental stress – categories: • Permanent environmental restructuring (construction work on highways, airports)  • Waste product generation (biological + non-biological waste)  • Direct environmental stress (destruction of coral reefs)  • Effects on population dynamics (migration and urban density, declining rural population)  1.6 Infrastructure • Adequate physical, economic + basic services infrastructure essential for tourist destinations:  Transport infrastructure (roads, railway lines, airports, car parks)   Communication infrastructure (telephone lines, electronic signal stations)   Energy infrastructure (electricity and liquid fuels)   Basic services infrastructure (clean water, reuse removal, sewerage systems).  • Lack of economic + basic services infrastructure prevents growth of tourism  • This infrastructure is seen as public investment  • Seasonality – major problem for infrastructural development  (Max 26) . ADDITIONAL PART Tourism benefits households' prosperity in THREE ways: • Income – salaries and wages – due to involvement with tourism  example from the candidate's environment  • Infrastructure – available for tourists and local people's use  example from candidate's environment  • Skills – variety required – education + training required – school subject  example from the candidate's environment  (Max. 10) Copyright reserved Accept any other relevant answer. APPENDIX 227 Copyright reserved Please turn over Appendix

The Mind the Gap study guide series assists you to make the leap by studying hard to achieve success in the Grade 12 exam. This publication is not for sale. © Copyright Department of Basic Education www.education.gov.za Call Centre 0800 202 933

MTG Economics Eng

Study this subject

Recommended for this subject

Economics Grade 12 Paper 2 Eastern Cape June 2025 Memo

Economics Grade 12 Paper 1 Free State Mock 2025 Question Paper

Economics Grade 12 Paper 2 Gauteng June 2025 Memo (English)

Economics Grade 12 Paper 1 Mpumalanga Mock 2025 Question Paper

Economics Grade 12 Paper 2 Mpumalanga Mock 2025 Question Paper

Economics Grade 12 Paper 1 NSC June 2025 Memo (English)

Economics Grade 12 Paper 2 NW June 2025 Question Paper (English)

Economics Grade 12 P1 Eastern Cape Prelim 2024 Memo (English)

Economics Grade 12 P1 Eastern Cape Prelim 2024 QP (Eng)

Economics Grade 12 P2 Eastern Cape June 2023 Question Paper (Eng)

Economics Grade 12 Paper 2 Eastern Cape June 2023 Memo (English)

Economics Grade 12 P1 Eastern Cape June 2023 Question Paper (Eng)

More from Grade 12 Economics

Economics Grade 12 Eastern Cape June 2024 Question Paper

Economics Grade 12 Paper 1 Eastern Cape Mock 2023 Memo (English)

Economics Grade 12 P2 Eastern Cape Mock 2023 Question Paper (Eng)

Economics Grade 12 Paper 1 FS Prelim 2023 Question Paper

Economics Grade 12 P2 GP Prelim 2023 Question Paper (English)

Economics Grade 12 Paper 2 KZN Prelim 2023 Question Paper